Elektor Electronics USA 1991 12

E
LEKTO
THE INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL
FOR RECREATIONAL ELECTRONICS
DECEMBER 1991 $3.00 us
E
LECTRONICS Double Issue
for the Holidays
LISA MORE THAN 60 PROJECTS AND ARTICLES
Cumulative 1991 index
Active Filters
Class A Power Amplifier
Connect-4
_
s
4—,
(,)
,i)
z
3rD"‘
cr;,1
O,
:^4
X
E 0 S—
IM =,
-'—
U)
O)
Economy Power Supply
FSK/RTTY Decoder for PCs
Temperature Measurement
WorldRadioHistory
RADIO SH AC'
THE PARTS PLACE

Special-Order Hotline. Your Radio Shack store
can special-order over 10,000 items from our main
warehouse—tubes, ICs, microprocessors, transis-
tors, diodes, crystals, styli, computer accessories—
even SAMS® service manuals.
Range-Doubler Multitester. With extra resolution
on V/A ranges plus 50,000 ohms-per-volt DC sensi-
tivity. 125mV and 25 µA ranges. Continuity sounder.
Measures to 1000 VDC in 12 ranges, 1000 VAC in
eight ranges, 10 amps DC in 10 ranges, 20 megs in
four ranges. #22-214 39.95
Digital Logic Probe. So handy! LEDs and tone
outputs reveal logic states instantly. Check opera-
tion and pinpoint problems in all types of digital
circuits—TTL, LS and CMOS, memory, microcom-
puter and peripheral ICs. #22-303 16.95
co toe 270.00119
INFRARED SENSOR
rir (3)
cln Lae0 away end lo
. caa
LED a lap« mages
(I)
(1) High-Speed 12VDC Motor. Up NEW! Infrared Sensor. For secu- (1) Pulsating or Continuous (1) PC-Mount Omnidirectional
to 15,200 RPM no load. About 2" rity systems and electronics pro- Piezo Buzzer. 90 dB at 12VDC. Electret Mike Element. 20-15,000
long. #273-255 2 99 jects requiring remote control. Use #273-068 8 49 Hz. #270-090 179
it to identify and locate near- (2) "Ding -Dong Chime". 80 dB (2) Transmitter Case.
(2) Low-Voltage DC Motor. From
11/2 to 3VDC. About 1/
12"long. 8300
infrared radiation emanating from at 12VDC. #273-071 8 99 #270-293 3 99
RPM max. an LED or laser source. (3) PC-Mount Piezo. 78 dB. From (3) Battery Holder. 4 "AA", 9V-
#273-223 99C #276-099 95C 3 to 20VDC. #273-065 2 49 type snap. #270-383 129
(3)
(1) 12VDC Brushless 3" Fan. Ball (1) NEW! QS-56 75-Ohm TV/ (1) 1/4-Watt Carbon-Film Resis-
Building Power Supplies. Ex-
bearings for long life. Low sound VCR/FM Connectors. For use tors. 5%. #271-312, Set 100/7.95
plains how power supplies work,
level-34 dB. 27 CFM. with RG6QS Quad Shield cable.
both regulated and unregulated. (2) 1/4-Watt Metal-Film Resis-
#273-243 14.95 #278-232 Pkg. of 2/99C
Also includes plans and instructors. 1%. #271-309, Set 50/2.99
(2) 12VDC Brushless Micro Fan. (2) Archere Coax Cable. Four lay- tions on how to build five power
ers of shielding for CATV. (3) Color Code Pocket Guide.
Rated 150 mA. 3.5 CFM airflow. supplies—three linear and two
#278-1317 31C Per Ft. Resistor, capacitor, inductor val-
#273-244 17.95 switching. #276-5025 4 95
ues. #271-1210 79C
(1) Locking Stainless Steel For- NEW! 25-Pin Female D-Sub Con-
ceps. #64-1866 4 95 NEW! Archer" Experimenter's Plug-In Card. Great for experimenters. nector. Right-angle mounting, de-
Build your own serial port card. PC/XT-compatible prototype card for bread- signed for Experimenter's PC/
(2) Nibbling Tool. Cuts up to 18-
boarding digital/analog circuits. Plated through-holes with .100" centers, XT-Compatible Plug-In Card (at
ga. steel. #64-823 10.95
power and ground bus grids, 8-bit V62 plated-edge contacts, I/O mounting
3 left) to provide standard 25-pin
(3) Desoldering Tool. area for 25-pin d-sub connector (at right). input/output port.
#64-2120 695 #276-1598 29.95 #276-1504 2 39
Radio /hack
Since 1921 Radio Shack has been the place to obtain up-to-date electronic
parts as well as quality tools, test equipment and accessories at low prices.
Nearly 7000 locations to serve you—NOBODY COMPARES SINCE 1921
Prices apply at participating Radio Shack stores and dealers. Radio Shack is adivision of Tandy Corporation AMERICA'S TECHNOLOGY STORE"
WorldRadioHistory
El
December 1991
CONTENTS Volume 2
Number 2
Cumulative 1991 Index pages 98-99
EDITORIAL GENERAL INTEREST -continued
11 Join Our Triangle 45 Variable Time Switch

46 Auto Power On-Off for Bicycle Speedometer
APPLICATION NOTES 47 Disco Running Lights
47 Telephone Buzzer as Switch
60 Amplification/Attenuation Selector
48 Bedside Light Timer
62 Digital Tape Counter
50 Video Camera Timer
64 Microprocessor Programmable Universal
51 Switching Clock from Parking Timer
Active Filters
59 LED Indicator for Temperature Logger
86 CMOS Dimmer
60 Slave Power Line On-Off Control Mark
87 REF 200
62 Water Level Control
94 Single-Chip Power Line Supply
70 Voltage Regulator for Cars
70 Fast Switching Gate
AUDIO & HI-FI
73 Horse Simulator
30 Power-On Delay 75 Digital 555
40 Class A Power Amplifier-Part 2 (of 2) 86 Intelligent Power Switch
48 On/Off Delay for Valve Amplifiers 90 Review of the Heath GC-1000 Clock
72 Overload Indicator
81 Electronic Power-On Delay POWER SUPPLIES & BATTERY CHARGERS
85 Protection against Direct Voltage
36 Battery Tester
50 9V NiCd Battery Charger
COMPUTERS & MICROPROCESSORS
54 Economy Power Supply
28 Mouse/Joystick Switch for Amiga 71 Static DC-DC Converter
29 RS232 for Sharp Pocket Computers 72 Relay Fuse
DESIGN IDEAS RADIO, TELEVISION, & COMMUNICATIONS
78 6-digit Coded AC Power Switch 18 FSK/RTTY Decoder for PCs

80 Alexander Graham Bell
GENERAL INTEREST 88 Wideband Antenna Amplifier
14 Musical Christmas Present SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

16 Universal Time Switch
21 Safe Solid-State Relay 52 A Simple and Adaptable Logic
22 Connect-4
26 Automatic Blower Fan Control for Cars TEST & MEASUREMENT
34 VOX Actuator for Baby Alarm
30 Sine Wave Converter
35 Universal Power-On Delay
31 Temperature Measurement Techniques
36 BCD Rotary Switch 37 HCT Crystal Oscillator
37 Gentle Halogen-Light Switch 63 Audible Tester
76 Digital Function Generator-Part 3 (of 3)
77 Pulse Shaper
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
Electronics Scene 12-13; New Books 92;

Cumulative 1991 Index 98-99; Reader Services 100;
Copyright 1991 Elektuur BV Terms of Business 101; Classifieds 102.
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA (US ISSN

10535690I à published monthly except August at 828
per year. MO for two years by Audio Amateur Publica.
tions, Inc, »5 Union St, Peterborough NH 03458 USA.
Second class postage paid at Peterborough NH and an
additional mailing office
POSTMASTER: Send address changes to

Elektor Electronics USA. Caller Box 876. Peter.
borough NH 03458-0876 Return Postage Guaranteed
WorldRadioHistory ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991

4
csotoN);
3.,140
souto OLD COLONY SOFTWARE
ACTIVE FILTER DESIGN STABILIZER 1: This program calculates the resistor-capacitor values
needed to compensate for aknown voice coil inductance and driver DC
Fernando Garcia Viesca, Marco A. Perez resistance.
This easy-to-use program calculates component values for Butterworth OPTIMUM BOX: This is a quick program based on Thiele/Small to
filters in four configurations: high- and low-pass in second- and third-or-
predict the proper vented box size, tuning, and -3dB down point.
der. From SB 4/88; article reprint included. Written in GW-BASIC. 1x
51/4", 360K, DS/DD.
RESPONSE FUNCTION: This program calculates the small-signal
response curve of a given box/driver combination after the input of the
free-air resonance of the driver (fs, the overall Q of the driver (Ors), the
SOF-ACT1B5 ACTIVE FILTER DESIGN for IBM $17.50
equivalent volume of air equal to the suspension ( VAS), the box tuning
frequency (fB), and the box volume (VB).
A-FILTER
L-PAD by Glenn Phillips: This is useful for padding down atweeter or
Sitting Duck Software midrange while still retaining the same load as the driver itself.
Designed to be a companion for the ever popular Active Filter Cook- VENT COMPUTATION by Glenn Phillips: This program calculates the
book by Don Lancaster, this program designs op-amp-based active filter needed vent length for 1, 2, or 4 ports of the same diameter.
networks to order eight. It is aimed at the electronic hobbyist and bench
Purchasing options available:
technician who may be working on other types of projects besides
crossovers, handling 5th, 6th, and 8th orders, multi-stage bandpass,
notch, and anumber of useful utility functions.
SOF-BOX1A5 BOXRESPONSE for Apple (not Mac) $25.00
SOF-AFL1B5G A-FILTER WITH GRAPHICS for IBM $34.95 SOF-BOX1B5 BOXRESPONSE for IBM $25.00
SOF-BOX1C5 BOXRESPONSE
Q COMPENSATION NETWORK
for Commodore 64 (disk) $25.00
COMPONENT VALUES
Hans Klarskov Mortensen SOF-BOX3CC BOXRESPONSE
From Denmark, this program computes component values for the Q

for Commodore 64 (cassette) $25.00
compensation networks described in Speaker Builder 1/90's "An Accel-
eration Feedback System," which are based on design formulas first SOF-BOX2B5G BOXRESPONSE WITH GRAPHICS
published by Siegfried Unkwitz in "Loudspeaker System Design," Elec- for IBM $50.00
tronics and Wireless World, May, June 1978. Written in Turbo-Prolog,
requires DOS 2.0 or higher. 1x 51/
4", 360K, DS/DD, for PC/XT/AT. Article
reprint included.
SOF-AFS1B5 Q COMPENSATION NETWORK The Difference Between

COMPONENT VALUES for IBM $12.50 BOXRESPONSE and BOXMODEL
BOXRESPONSE has two capabilities. The first is the capability
ATTENUATOR STEPS to display various aspects of the performance of apassive-radiator
Dave Halbakken or vented-box loudspeaker system using a generalized
Thiele/Small model. The display is in the form of graphs of
Based on an article by Fred Gloeckler in The Audio Amateur 2/72, this
small-signal response, cone excursion, and so forth. The second
handy program is used for designing stepped attenuators for audio
capability is that of calculating various maximally-flat alignments
signals by using fixed resistors and multi-pole switches, producing alist
for agiven driver.
of resistor values in order from the top of the attenuator to ground. Written
in C; source code also included. Article reprint included. BOXMODEL has the first capability of BOXRESPONSE but not
the second. Its difference from BOXRESPONSE is twofold. First,
it is vastly easier to input and modify data in BOXMODEL, and any
SOF-AST1B5 ATTENUATOR STEPS for IBM $7.50
change you make is immediately incorporated into the system.
BOXRESPONSE is more awkward (though still eminently usable)
BOXRESPONSE in this regard. Second, BOXMODEL is capable of displaying
Robert M. Bullock Ill, Robert White; Glenn Phillips graphs of up to four systems simultaneously, whereas
BOXRESPONSE can only handle one system at a time. This
Very straightforward, menu-driven, and flexible, this package provides
capability makes BOXMODEL an invaluable aid in comparing the
model-based performance data for either closed-box or vented-box
consequences of various design tradeoffs you might want to
loudspeakers with or without afirst- or second-order electrical high-pass
consider.
filter as an active equalizer. It can be used for designing closed, vented,
passive radiator, and electronically augmented vented boxes--and from Alignment generation capability was not included in
different perspectives, which is most valuable (you can base the design BOXMODEL because it would have made the program awkward
on aflat response or specify different descriptive variables, for example). to use and much larger. If you are mainly interested in having
The disk also contains seven additional handy programs: automatically generated alignments, then BOXRESPONSE is the
program you should choose. But, if you want to consider many
AIR CORE: This program was written as aquick way of evaluating the
possible alignments, and compare and contrast their
resistance effects of different gauge (16-38 only) wire on agiven value
performances, then BOXMODEL is the only way to go. Either way,
inductor.
you will be joining hundreds of very satisfied users of each
SERIES NOTCH: This was developed to study the effects of notch program.
filters in the schematics of some manufacturers.
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991 WorldRadioHistory

GREAT HOLIDAY GIFTS!
BOXMODEL TRANSMISSION LINE BOXMODEL allows selection of driver parame-
ters, line length and taper, and properties of the filling material, as well
Robert M. Bullock Ill, Robert White as choice of line air speed and filling porosity. 1x51/
4", DS/DID: requires
This new box design program does large- and small-signal analysis of graphics capability.
driver low-end performance below 400Hz. It is somewhat of a next Purchasing options available:
generation of the authors' BOXRESPONSE program, although it is
considerably more sophisticated. Although no automatic calculation of
SOF-TLB1B5GD TRANSMISSION LINE BOXMODEL WITH
optimal alignment is provided by BOXMODEL (see BOXRESPONSE),
GRAPHICS Demo for IBM (usable as credit toward later
the program has numerous advantageous features:
purchase of full package) $5.00
(1) Instant updating of all system parameters whenever one is changed.
(2) Simultaneous retention of data on up to four different systems. SOF-TLB1B5G TRANSMISSION LINE BOXMODEL
(3) Simultaneous display on acommon axis of parameters from up to four WITH GRAPHICS for IBM $50.00
systems, for easy performance comparison.
(4) One-step inclusion of high-pass equalizer through order 3, allowing CALSOD
easy comparison of performance with and without. Witold Waldman/Audiosoft
(5) Easy accommodation of passive-radiator systems, as well as closed From Australia, CALSOD (or "Computer-Aided Loudspeaker System
or vented boxes. Optimization and Design") is one of the world's most famous software
(6) Provision for distributing loss among absorption, leakage, and packages in the field of crossover network design. It combines the transfer
vent/passive-radiator, allowing for easy assessment of performance vari- function of an LC network with the acoustic transfer function of the
ations due to various possible loss distributions. loudspeaker, by using some form of iterative analysis.
(7) Easy selection of ambient temperature and barometric pressure, CALSOD creates, through the process of trial-and-error curve fitting,
immediately updating relevant parameters. asuitable transfer function model which it can then optimize. The program
was the subject of the designer's research paper, "Simulation and Opti-
(8) On-line help or suggestions for most items.
mization of Multiway Loudspeaker Systems Using aPersonal Computer,"
(9) Running calculations of miscellaneous data such as CMS, vent length, which appeared in the Audio Engineering Society's Journal for Septem-
a, h, and b. ber 1988. CALSOD differs considerably from other software in that it
From SB 6/90; article reprint included. Requires 384K RAM plus CGA, models the entire loudspeaker output of a multi-way system, including
EGA, VGA, or Hercules graphics card. Coprocessor recommended but the low-end response, as well as the summed responses of each system
not necessary. 1x51/
4", 360K, DS/DD. driver.
Purchasing options available: The CALSOD program comes on a single 360K floppy which requires
one directory and two subdirectories in installation, as well as access to
SOF-MOD3B5GD BOXMODEL WITH GRAPHICS the DOS GRAFTABL file which it uses for a couple of special symbols.
Demo for IBM (usable as credit toward later purchase of full The 133-page User Manual, provided on a second disk, is well-written,
package) $5.00 more than adequately describes the various program functions, and
contains an excellent tutorial example which demonstrates the use of the
program. For PC/XT/AT and PS/2 with 512K of free RAM and DOS 2.10
SOF-MOD3B5G BOXMODEL WITH GRAPHICS
or higher. Hard disk recommended (except for demo). 8087/80287/80387
for IBM $50.00
coprocessor recommended but not necessary. CGA, EGA, VGA, or
Hercules graphics card required.
BANDPASS BOXMODEL Purchasing options available:
Robert M. Bullock Ill, Robert White
This program is acomputer model for bandpass loudspeaker systems. SOF-CAL2B4GD CALSOD WITH GRAPHICS
These systems are characterized by the fact that there are two chambers, 31/
2"Demo for IBM (usable as credit toward later purchase
one at the rear of the driver and one in the front. The primary output is of full package) $6.00
from a vent or passive-radiator on the front enclosure. The program
provides eight different acoustic arrangements. 1x51/
4", DS/DD; requires SOF-CAL2B4G CALSOD WITH GRAPHICS
graphics capability. 31/
2"for IBM $67.50
SOF-CAL2B6GD CALSOD WITH GRAPHICS
SOF-BPB1B5GD BANDPASS BOXMODEL WITH GRAPHICS 51/
4"Demo for IBM (usable as credit toward later purchase
Demo for IBM (usable as credit toward later purchase of full of full package) $5.00
package) $5.00
SOF-CAL2B6G CALSOD WITH GRAPHICS
SOF-BPB1B5G BANDPASS BOXMODEL WITH GRAPHICS 51/
4"for IBM $65.00
for IBM $50.00
PC-ECAP
TRANSMISSION LINE BOXMODEL Peter Volpa
Robert M. Bullock Ill, Robert White This package is one of the world's simplest and best AC circuit analysis
This program is a computer model for transmission line loudspeaker programs, as described in the review by Jan Didden in TAA 1/91.
systems. The standard Thiele/Small model is used for the driver, and a PC-ECAP can calculate the frequency response (amplitude and phase)
modified Bradbury model is used for the acoustic section. for agiven circuit. Its simple but adequate built-in editor generates atext
file that describes the circuit to be simulated, and on-line help is available.

6
A0 tON y
ir •
OLD COLONY SOFTWARE

CI ;ea
oe.soue
SOF-LMP1C5 LMP LOUDSPEAKER MODELING PROGRAM PASSIVE TWO-WAYS: This program comes directly from the article
by Dr. Bullock in SB 1/85. It computes the values for components and
for Commodore 64 $17.50
identifies the network diagrams (supplied) for the required net.
SOF-LMP2B5 LMP LOUDSPEAKER MODELING PROGRAM PASSIVE THREE-WAYS: This program, implemented on the Apple by
for IBM $17.50 Robert White after an article by Dr. Bullock in SB 2/85, calculates the
values for two- and three-way passive crossover components.
SOF-LMP3M3 LMP LOUDSPEAKER MODELING PROGRAM EQUALIZER UTILITY: This computes the values for components in a
for Macintosh $17.50 network used to equalize the impedance of a driver over its frequency
range.
"SOUPED UP" SD-LMP LOUDSPEAKER RADIATION PATTERNS: The vertical radiation pattern from a multi-
driver system can be explored with this program based on Dr. Bullock's
MODELING PROGRAM article in SB 1/85.
Ralph Gonzalez, Bill Fitzpatrick EX(CURSION)-LIMIT: This computes the SPL, G force, and required
This package is available for the IBM PC and Macintosh computers, power in watts for agiven excursion, piston diameter, and mass.
providing professional-quality graphics, afast and friendly graphical user CROSSOVER TRANSFER FUNCTION: In this program, the operator
interface, and the means for rapid data entry. It remains compatible with enters the filter order--first, second, third, or fourth--and the center
LMP data files, and documentation is included. The Macintosh version frequency. The program then outputs the transfer function for the high-
(also sometimes referred to as LMP PROFESSIONAL) adds visual and and low-pass sections for a frequency range above and below the
audible square-wave prediction using the internal speaker or audio output selected crossover frequency.
jack. For technical users, this version also permits crossover definition
Requires DOS 3.3 or higher. Graphics version available for IBM only;
directly via the factored or unfactored transfer function, if desired. The
please see PXO PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD elsewhere in this section.
most striking difference is the program's ability to process asine, square,
or sawtooth waveform through the simulated network topology and Purchasing options available:
display it on the screen as well as through the speaker or audio out jack.
CGA, EGA, VGA, or Hercules graphics capability required. IBM SOF-PAS1A5 PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD
PC/XT/AT version: 1x51/
4", DS/DD. Macintosh version: 1x31
2 ", SS/DD.
/ for Apple (not Mac) $25.00
Standard LMP packages (listed elsewhere in this section) may be ex-
changed for a$10 credit toward the purchase of either of the full SD-LMP SOF-PAS1B5 PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD
packages listed below. for IBM $25.00
SOF-LMP3B5G "SOUPED UP" SD-LMP LOUDSPEAKER

SOF-PAS1C5 PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD
MODELING PROGRAM WITH GRAPHICS for IBM $49.95 for Commodore 64 (disk) $25.00
SOF-LMP3M3G "SOUPED UP" SD-LMP LOUDSPEAKER

MODELING PROGRAM WITH GRAPHICS for Macintosh $49.95
PXO PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD
MACSPEAKER BOX Robert M. Bullock Ill, Robert White
Eldon Sutphin PXO is the graphics version of PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD, featuring
the same six programs with improved ease of use, faster performance,
This software allows you to design and examine the low frequency
and high resolution graphics (presented in tabular form if graphics
characteristics of bass reflex, closed box (acoustic suspension), and
capability is not available). 1x51/
4", DS/DD.
infinite baffle types of enclosures. Thiele/Small driver parameters are
used to calculate the response for various design tradeoffs. In general, Purchasing options available:
MACSPEAKERBOX is amust for those who would rather be building and

listening than calculating. Macintosh 512K, Macintosh Plus, or Macintosh SOF-PX03B5GD PXO PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD WITH
SE required. ImageWriter or ImageWriter II recommended for hard copy. GRAPHICS Demo for IBM (usable as credit toward later
DS/DD. purchase of full package) $5.00
SOF-PX03B5G PXO PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD WITH
SOF-MSB1M3GD MACSPEAKERBOX WITH GRAPHICS GRAPHICS for IBM $50.00

Demo for Macintosh (usable as credit toward later purchase of
full package) $5.00 QUICK BOX
Sitting Duck Software
SOF-MSB1M3G MACSPEAKERBOX WITH GRAPHICS
QUICK BOX allows the speaker-building hobbyist to rapidly design
for Macintosh $39.95 closed, vented, and fourth-order bandpass boxes. The program's Library
Manager, which allows "quick preview" of driver parameters and box
PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD possibilities, comes complete with data for 38 common drivers--more are
Robert M. Bullock Ill, Robert White easily added by the user. 1 x 51/ 4". Supports CGA, EGA, VGA, or
Hercules; coprocessor; LaserJet or dot matrix.

PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD (Computer-Aided Design) is the result
of Dr. Bullock's extensive research concerning first-, second-, third-, and
SOF-OBX1B5G QUICK BOX WITH GRAPHICS
fourth-order passive crossovers as published in Speaker Builder 1,2,3/85.
for IBM $34.95
The package contains six extremely useful programs:

GREAT HOLIDAY GIFTS!
Users should note that this is ashareware product, which means that large-signal, or equalized-enclosure design. The disk does contain an
it may be used for a reasonable evaluation period, after which continued IBM version of the original BOXRESPONSE from 1984, but none of the
use morally obligates the user to register his copy with the author and more recent upgrades have been incorporated into it. In addition to
pay the full package price (in this case, about $75). In return, the author operating files #1 through #4, this disk also contains the following files:
provides full support and updates when available. Article reprint included.
#5 LXCOMP.EXE: This is asimple program associated with inductance
1 x 514. Usable with MDA, CGA, EGA, VGA. and Hercules display
measurement, which does not have source information on the title page
adapters.
and does not check most data entries.
#6 QKLOOK.EXE: This allows you to enter the Thiele/Small (T/S)

SOF-CAP1B5G PC-ECAP WITH GRAPHICS for IBM $9.95
parameters of one or two drivers and then displays a chart of how the
driver(s) will perform in closed boxes, in vented boxes, and in apassive.
PSPICE radiator box with alpha equal to delta.
MicroSim Corporation #7 NONOPT87.EXE: This program uses the equations developed by
Within minutes after receiving the description of a speaker system's Small and Margolis to approximate vented-box design in aspecified box
equivalent electrical circuit, PSPICE will provide you with high-quality volume.
graphs of frequency response, phase response, transient response, and #8 OPTIMUM.EXE: This is identical to #7 above, but starts by first doing
cone excursion versus frequency. PSPICE was derived from SPICE, a an approximate optimum design. It can actually do any calculations that
public-domain software package developed in the '70s by researchers at NONOPT87 can do.
the University of California at Berkeley. It was developed primarily as an
#9 BOXRESQ.EXE: This is the original version of BOXRESPONSE as
aid to integrated circuit design, and thus its acronym stands for Simulat.on
discussed above.
Program with Integrated Circuit Emphasis. The PSPICE version of SPICE
is produced by MicroSim Corporation. Users should note that the pack- #10 VBTUNE87.EXE: This program provides tuning data on avented-
ages below are student (demo) versions intended only to introduce box design. It will, however, allow you to do optimum designs, approxi-
PSPICE to potential users who may wish to later purchase the full mate non-optimum designs, or enter just the needed data from an existing
PSPICE package from MicroSim. The PSPICE demo programs below design.
can simulate circuits of up to five nodes and ten transistors, with the #11 PORT87.EXE: This provides for design of the old-fashioned
parameters inserted by the user. "hole-type" ports in vented boxes, which has long been omitted from most
Purchasing options available: modern programs.
DOS 2.0 or higher, 256K of RAM required. Coprocessor optional. 1x

SOF-SPC1B5GD PSPICE WITH GRAPHICS 51/
4", 360K, DS/DD.
Demo for IBM PC $12.95

SOF-DRI1 B5 DRIVER EVALUATION PLUS for IBM $19.95
SOF-SPC2B5GD PSPICE WITH GRAPHICS
Demo for IBM PS/2 $12.95 FREQUENCY/WARBLE TONE GENERATOR
Paul William
SOF-SPC1M3GD PSPICE WITH GRAPHICS
These ingenious programs, PCFREQ and PCWARBLE, along with a
Demo for Macintosh II $12.95
simple modification, transform an IBM PC or compatible into afrequency
and warble tone generator. Some hardware required. Note: Modification
CROSSOVER DESIGN PLUS of PC will usually violate warranty. Written in C; 1x51/
4".
G.R. Koonce
This disk is intended primarily for the design of passive crossovers,
SOF-FRQ1B5 FREQUENCY/WARBLE GENERATOR
although it also contains files #1 through #7 from DRIVER EVALUATION for IBM $9.95
PLUS (elsewhere in this section). Thus it allows the evaluation of the
suitability of drivers for application in closed, vented, and passive-radiator LMP LOUDSPEAKER MODELING
enclosures, as well as the design of approximate optimum and non-opti-
mum vented boxes. Additional files include:
PROGRAM
Ralph Gonzalez, Bill Fitzpatrick
#8 TWWYC087.EXE: This allows the design of first-, second-, and
third-order two-way crossovers. A speaker system modeling program and crossover network design
utility, LMP is based on original work by Ralph Gonzalez. It is aprogram
#9 TRWYC087.EXE: This program provides for the design of first-,
designed to model multi-way loudspeaker systems, with the resulting
second-, and third-order three-way crossovers, and otherwise has the
frequency and phase response curves predicting the on-axis sound
same features as file #8.
pressure level produced by the interaction of your choice of crossover,
DOS 2.0 or later, 256K of RAM required. Coprocessor optional. 1x drivers, and enclosure design. Apple II version: 1x51/
4", SS/DD, requires
514', 360K, DS/DD. DOS 3.3 or higher. Commodore 64 version: 1 x 51/ 4", DS/DD. IBM
PC/XT/AT version: 1x51/

4 ,DS/DD, requires DOS 2.1 or higher. Macin-
SOF-CRS1B5 CROSSOVER DESIGN PLUS for IBM $19.95 tosh version: 1 x SS/DD. Each Standard LMP version below is
usable as a$10 trade-in credit toward the later purchase of a"SOUPED
DRIVER EVALUATION PLUS UP" SD-LMP LOUDSPEAKER MODELING PROGRAM WITH GRAPH-
ICS full package as described elsewhere in this section.
G.R. Koonce
This program evaluates the suitability of drivers for applicaton in
closed, vented, and passive-radiator enclosures. It then goes on to allow
you to design vented boxes in detail, complete with port duct calculations.
SOF-LMP1A5 LMP LOUDSPEAKER MODELING PROGRAM
These programs, in general, will not handle closed-box, passive-radiator, for Apple (not Mac) $17.50

01.0N
OLD COLONY SOFTWARE

0(-1111
:id /.
SOUe
This disk also contains programs for Qt.A, Qrc, and room resonance.
SPEAKER DESIGNER
1x51/4", SS/DD. From SB 1/89; article reprint included.
Stuart E. Bonney
SPEAKER DESIGNER is aloudspeaker system design aid and mod- SOF-TSD1C5 THIELE/SMALL DRIVER PARAMETERS
eling tool for use with both closed and vented systems over the frequency for Commodore 64 (disk) $25.00
range of 10-300Hz. The program computes and displays system fre-
quency response, power handling capabilities, and relative sound pres- TWO-WAY ACTIVE CROSSOVERS PLUS
sure level (SPL) outputs for each of 26 discrete frequencies over this
range. This package runs on any IBM PC/XT/AT, true compatible, or IBM
Gary Galo
PS/2 running MS/PC-DOS 2.0 or higher. Printer output compatible with This program will perform the necessary calculations for the eight
any 80-column or wider printer. 1x51/
4", 360K, DS/DD. common two-way active crossover designs described by Dr. Robert M.
Bullock Ill in Speaker Builder 3/85 (article reprint is included). The
SOF-SPD1B5 SPEAKER DESIGNER for IBM $19.50 schematics are drawn in the text mode using the IBM line drawing
characters. No graphics adapters are needed to display them, but your
printer must be set up to emulate the IBM ProPrinter in the alternate
STEPPED VOLUME CONTROLS
character set mode. As an aid to selecting op amps suitable for use in
Joseph O'Connell audio circuits, also included is aprogram for calculating op amp Vni (input
These ready-to-run Macintosh programs come on a31 2 "SS/DD disk
/ dynamic range), based on an article in TAA 3/86 (article reprint included).
initialized as a400K disk for compatibility with all machines. Also included This program is particularly valuable since the demands of CD players
are the Pascal source codes, should you wish to customize them for your have made VTH such an important consideration in designing analog
own use. The package contains two programs: circuitry. DS/DD.
RESISTOR SELECTOR (Program A): This program simplifies the Purchasing options available:
math necessary to build stepped volume controls.
RESISTOR CHECKER (Program B): This program would be superflu- SOF-TWO1B3 TWO-WAY ACTIVE CROSSOVERS PLUS
ous if it were possible to obtain every resistor value that the above 31/
2"for IBM $20.00
program called for. But because you will be limited to the nearest standard
values, or with series and parallel combinations, this program quickly SOF-TVVO1B5 TWO-WAY ACTIVE CROSSOVERS PLUS
calculates the taper that will result with different actual values. It can also 51/
4"for IBM $20.00
show the effects of different source and load impedances on the taper.
Both programs (contained on the same disk) allow you to save their output
to atext file. From TAA 4/88, 3/89; article reprints included.
VENTWRK VENTED BOX CONSTRUCTION
(PLUS)
SOF-SVC1M3 STEPPED VOLUME CONTROLS George L Augspurger
for Macintosh $25.00
A short segment of a much larger loudspeaker analog program,
VENTWRK is provided by one of audio's most famous names as a
THE LISTENING ROOM companion to his article "New Guidelines for Vented-Box Construction,"
Sitting Duck Software which appeared in SB 2/91 (article reprint included). The program en-
compasses simple design rules developed by the author which enable fa
This interesting program predicts standing wave modes in small rooms
(resonance frequency) to be predicted reasonably accurately for typical
and is designed for positioning speakers--and the listener--in such away
vented loudspeaker enclosures. The Apple Ile version is written in
as to minimize standing wave effects and other room-generated influ-
Applesoft BASIC and runs on any member of the Apple II family having
ences. With proper speaker/listener positioning, serious frequency re-
an 80-column card. It contains the VENTWRK program only. The IBM
sponse dips and peaks due to room influences can be kept to aminimum.
PC version is written in Turbo Pascal. The source code and the compiled
The program allows for afull range of speaker and listener movement in
.EXE program are included on the high density diskette. In addition to
3D space and continuously updates a standing wave Pressure Versus
VENTWRK, the IBM version also contains the following two programs:
Frequency display. 256K RAM, DOS 2.11 or higher required. CGA, EGA,
VGA, or Hercules graphics capability required. LaserJet or dot matrix SPCONV: This program performs very fast interactive conversion
printer recommended. 1 x 51/4"; supplied on the diskette is a second
between Thiele/Small parameters and basic specifications such as B1
version of the program which recognizes a coprocessor. Softbound factor and cone assembly mass.
manual. BXCKT: This calculates and displays the R-L-C analog circuit values
for Locanthi's analog circuit. Closed box, vented system, and passive
SOF-TLR1B5G THE LISTENING ROOM WITH GRAPHICS radiator system are provided.
for IBM $34.95 Purchasing options available:
SOF-VNT1A5 VENTWRK VENTED BOX CONSTRUCTION

for Apple (not Mac) $9.95
THIELE/SMALL DRIVER PARAMETERS
David Long SOF-VNT2B5 VENTWRK VENTED BOX CONSTRUCTION PLUS
This package was written in order to make easier and faster the job of for IBM $19.95
determining the Thiele/Small parameters of raw drivers. The final display
screen will show, in addition to the usual parameters, the effects of WOOFER-SATELLITE OFFSET
amplifier and crossover losses on the driver (Q E, QT, QES, Qrs, and SPL),
Sitting Duck Software
driver impedance at fs, the driver's moving mass (
W AD), the driver's
suspension compliance (Cus), and efficiency. When, due to aesthetic considerations, woofer systems are placed at
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991
9
USE OUR EASY ORDER FORM BELOW!
distances from the listener which are different from that of the satellites, standard database files, the indexes themselves can be updated annually
serious dips in frequency response may result. The magnitude, widt1, or otherwise modified by the user. Alternatively, registration of the index
and frequency of the dips are a function of the aistance differential arid copy with the designer (card provided) will entitle the purchaser to a
the crossover network in use. This program plots the frequency and phase discounted price on professionally produced annual updates.
response curve which results from user-determined offset differentials The Speaker Builder index comes on two 5
ve disks. The EDITORIAL
and network configurations. 256K RAM required. CGA, EGA, VGA, or
CONTENTS disk contains more than 1000 entries for articles, columns,
Hercules graphics capability required. LaserJet or dot matrix printer letters, and corrections. The DRIVERS disk contains more than 800
recommended. 1x51/
4".
entries for raw drivers. It lists all raw drivers for which useful information
is presented in articles, letters, and some advertisements. Further, it also
SOF-WS01B5G WOOFER-SATELLITE OFFSET WITH gives data (when available) on the type, function, construction materials,
GRAPHICS for IBM $34.95 voice coils, and use, as well as the other types of information published
in SB. Occasionally, data has been supplemented by information from
outside sources. The index for The Audio Amateur comes on one 51/
4 "
disk and is presented in the same form and style as the Speaker Builder
SPEAKER BUILDER AND THE AUDIO EDITORIAL CONTENTS.
AMATEUR INDEXES, 1980-1990 Purchasing options available:
Russell Schoof SOF-SBX2B5 SPEAKER BUILDER INDEX, 1980-1990,

These eleven-year indexes, available separately and as a set, chron- for IBM $16.00
icle in a very user-friendly fashion the contents of Speaker Builder and
The Audio Amateur magazines. The indexes are not stand-alone soft- SOF-AAX2B5 THE AUDIO AMATEUR INDEX, 1980-1990,
ware; they require database management software such as PCFile:dB
for IBM $16.00
or Alpha Four for implementation.
These are dBASE III+ files and can be used by any program that eiher SOF-XXX2B5 SPEAKER BUILDER/THE AUDIO AMATEUR
directly accesses or imports that type of file. Since dBASE is the de facto
COMBINED INDEX SET, 1980-1990 $30.00
industry standard, though, most database and spreadsheet programs will
work--even some word processors will. Since the index contents are
DEALER DISCOUNTS AVAILABLE
OLD COLONY SOFTWARE

EASY ORDER FORM
al-Y. ITEM NO. PRICE EACH TOTAL

NAME
SOF-
COMPANY
SOf-
STREET
SOF-
CITY ST ZIP
SOF-
DAYTIME TELEPHONE
SOF- PAYMENT BY:
U CHECK/ MONEY ORDER
j FREE CATALOG SHIPPING
U MASTERCARD U VISA
TOTAL
MC OR VISA EXP.
OLD COLONY
SHIPPING: SOUND LAD
USA: $2 first item, $.75 each additional. PO BOX 243, Department E91
Canada: $4.50 first item, $.75 each additional. Peterborough, NH 03458-0243 USA
Overseas Surface: $6 first item, $.75 each additional 24-Hour Lines

Telephone: (603) 924-6371 or (603)924-6526
Overseas Air: $9 first item, $.75 each additional.
FAX: (603) 924-9467

10
NOW THAT YOU'VE SEEN OUR

NEWEST TREASURE.
WHY NOT HAVE A LOOK AT THE REST?
&AL% SpeakerBuilder
THE LOUDSPEAKER JOURNAL
The magazine
that finally deals seriously with
The newest publication from
the art and craft of speaker building
the folks who bring you
Audio Amateur and Speaker Builder The Art of building aspeaker is to optimize that
mixture of design and engineering to balance all
Glass Audio features the best vacuum tube
the parameters for the most beautiful sound pos-
designs for audio reproduction—past and contem-
sible. The Craft is knowing how and why.
porary. The new designs take advantage of im-
Speaker Builder gives you knowledge—from
proved components and control techniques that
driver parameters and crossovers to woodwork-
make the end results far superior to anything possi-
ing—to develop and refine your techniques, and
ble during the early days of audio's rebirth after
to get the most out of your system.
World War II.
That's why tubes are having such arenaissance

of interest as aperfectionist approach to good
AudioAmateur
sound. And that's why tubes are reappearing in
THE JOURNAL FOR AUDIOPHILE CRAFTS
SpeELou°
original equipment, in high end consumer and pro- The innovative, independent
•
fessional audio systems. audiophile journal for the thoughtful
*en
-3
Published quarterly, Glass Audio will inform you and capable music lover
about new innovations in the field and about parts
sources. We'll also include modification projects, Audio Amateur's articles deal with how audio
reviews of technical basics and regular columns equipment works, as well as how to build or mod-
RED° H„Es &v
such as Tube Troubles, Tube Tips and much more. ify it. Construction and modification articles are
Subscribe today! plentiful, supplying all needed parts, performance
and assembly details. Exceptionally high quality ELE
ON,,
designs.
Audio Amateur offers anumber of features in each
issue that abound with useful ideas. The Letters
column is an open forum for problem solving and
Speaker Builder helps you explore new designs
information interchange; Classic Circuitry reprints
with how-to construction articles, and can show
schematics of state-of-the-art gear—old and new;
you how to modify your old speakers and make
Audio Aids relates readers' experience with sim-
them sound better than ever. Learn from our writ-
ple modifications to equipment and construction
ers who turn abstract theory into practical ap-
techniques. We also feature many useful and prac-
proaches, and from the experience of other
tical hi-fi accessories you can build to further your
readers who have been down the road before you.
audio enjoyment. Speaker Builder is the best investment you can
For asmall investment you can make your music make in your system—six issues per year filled
system sound better—very probably alot better. with stimulating and exciting ideas.
CLASS AUDIO AUDIO AMATEUR SPEAKER BUILDER

E Two years, (8 issues) $35 Two years, (8 issues) $35 E Two years, (12 issues) $45
One year, (4 issues) $20 0 Owe year, (4 issues) $20 Owe year, (6 issues) $25
Canada add $4 per year postage Canada add $4 per year postage Canada add $6 per year postage
NAME
STREET 8 NO
CITY STATE ZIP
MC OR VISA NUMBER EXPIRE
AUDIO AMATEUR PUBLICATIONS

PO Box 576, Dept. E91, Peterborough, NH 03458-0576 • (603) 924-9464 • FAX: (603) 924-9467
Answering machine for credit card orders only: before 9:00 a.m., after 4:00 p.m. and weekends. Have all information plus MCA/ISA available.
WorldRadioHistory
JOIN OUR TRIANGLE
A great magazine community is, in my view, atriangular structure. Deiters reports that although Japanese universities are widely re-
As Isaid last month, the reader/advertiser side of the triangle is im- garded as lax "party" schools making very few demands on students,
portant to the health of the avocation. But just as vital is the interac- with low class attendance and lackluster scores on exams, they are
tion between the magazine and the vendor for their mutual health. nonetheless managing to turn out remarkably capable and successful
Ialluded to the magazine/reader side of the triangular relationship graduates. The secret: clubs. Yes, hundreds of clubs flourish on all
last month. Nothing illustrates the idea like aconcrete example. This campuses dedicated to such mundane interests as tennis. Unlike
one popped out of our FAX just this morning: American clubs, any student may join with any level of expertise.
The most surprising fact about the clubs, however, is that astudent
Gentlemen: rarely belongs to more than one.
Thanks for agreat job on publishing Elektor! Ihave enjoyed every issue! The growth and development of the younger students is guided,
Ithought that maybe you could help me locate some information about inspired, shaped and administered within these groups not primar-
aproject that Iwould like to build, aprogrammable moving sign. Iplan ily by apeer-to-peer relationship, but by an older to younger align-
to use lamps instead of the typical LED array, but it should be easy to ment within what are called "cells." All this is spelled out clearly,
upscale the driving circuits once Iknow the basics. If you have any sug- according to Deiters, in Japanese Society, astudy by Japanese cultural
gestions, please advise. anthropologist Chie Nakane (University of California Press, 1970).
Again, many thanks for agreat magazine! Within the club, "cells" of students form and function to develop
young students into elder guides.
Ellis Guy In their fourth year, the student must perform ayear-long project
Cathedral Sound & Light chosen from alist provided by the professor. In asense this sum-
Fayetteville, NC 28304 marizes and finally forms the capabilities of the student. Deiters
reminds the reader that these students have passed rigorous exams
Mr. Guy, by his letter, rises out of the mass of readers (just over to enter the university which means they are extraordinarily well
10,000 this morning) and becomes amore visible, recognizable per- equipped in all disciplines, especially in mathematics and science.
son than before. "Finally," Deiters says of the students, "at every step of the way,
Next, Mr. Guy shares awish. This touches exactly on one of the he is corrected (mostly by imitating his seniors and emulating his
basic issues about amagazine's function. All too many publications peers) and frequently coached, and his work is evaluated."
project the fountainhead image where the magazine appears to be That statement is aperfect expression of the goals Ipursue for any
the infinite resource for information and answers to problems. Most magazine. A good magazine is never aone-way street. Avocational
of the time this function is more appearance than fact. In my experi- or recreational magazines such as this have one large, added advan-
ence, the readers and editors are both sources of knowledge. Most tage. Trained and experienced professionals in ascientific discipline of-
magazines find answers by research or by accumulating data or data ten choose their avocation in another. Thus they bring unique experi-
sources in acentral office. But no one repository has it all. ence and knowledge to what they write from areas of technology which
Lewis Thomas, one of our finest essayists and long time research may never be part of the ordinary training or experience in the pur-
director at the Sloan-Kettering Institute of Cancer Research in New suit of the hobby. For example, aradar specialist brings something
York, has said that the greatest scientific discovery of the 20th cen- to ham radio which is outside the ordinary ham's knowledge. The
tury is that our ignorance is growing at an exponential rate. We can cross-fertilization factor in technology becomes more important daily.
take that as afrightening fact or regard it as aclear signal that we The avocational enrichment this provides is beyond description.
are more interdependent than ever before. All this adds up to asimple message for every reader of this magazine.
This interdependency is not only anecessity, Japanese universities Tell me what you wish. Tell me what you can offer. Happily, three
are demonstrating that it is an effective educational tool. Writing U.S. authors have become published authors in EEUSA in recent
recently in the October 28, 1991 issue of Electronic Engineering Times, months. You can too. Let's hear your ideas, your queries, your ex-
Robert Deiters paints afascinating picture of Japanese student life. periences with building projects published here. Iwant to see alively
Deiters, who is an American, aJesuit priest with a doctorate in column of letters from you each month. A shared idea or experience
engineering, has been teaching in Japan for 15 years. enriches us all, and you too.—E.T.D.
Published by Audio Amateur Publications, Inc. European Offices HUNGARY SPAIN

Elektuur By Elektor Elektronikai folyoirat Resistor Electronica Aplicada
Edhortpublisher: Edward T. Dell, Jr. Postbus 75 1015 Budapest Calle Maudes 15 Entio C.
Editorial Offices: 6190 AB BEEK Batthyany U. 13. 28003 MADRID
305 Union St., P.O. Box 876 The Netherlands Editor: Lakatos Andras Editor: Agustin Gonzales Buelta
Peterborough, NH 03458-0876 USA Telephone: 011 31 4638 9444 INDIA SWEDEN
Telex: 56617 (elekt nI) Elektor Electronics PVT Ltd Electronic Press AB
Telephone: 603-924-9464 (National) FAX: 011 31 4637 0161 Chhotani Building Box 5505
or +1 (603) 924-9464 (International) Managing Director: M.M.J. Landman 52C, Proctor Road, Grant Road (E) 14105 HUDDINGE
FAX: (603) 924-9467 (National) BOMBAY 400 007 Editor: Bill Cedrum
or +1(603) 924-9467 (International) Overseas Editions: Editor: Surendra lyer UNITED KINGDOM
Advertising: Donald B. Kennedy FRANCE ISRAEL Down House
Telephone: (617) 383-9059 Elektor sarl Elektorcal Broomhill Road
FAX: (603) 924-9467 Les Trois Tilleuls P 0 Box 41096 LONDON SW18 4J0
Subscriptions: Katharine Gadwah B.P. 59; 59850 NIEPPE TEL AVIV 61410 England UK
Elektor Electronics USA Editors: D.R.S. Meyer Publisher: M. Avraham Edkor/Publisher: Len Seymour
Post Office Box 876, G.C.P. Raedersdorf NETHERLANDS
Peterborough, New Hampsire 03458 GERMANY Elektuur BV
Subscriptions to Elektor Electronics USA are Elektor Verlag GmbH Peter Treckpoelstraat 2-4
available ONLY in the fifty United States, Susterfeld Strasse 25 6191 VK BEEK
Canada, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and 5100 AACHEN Editor: P.E.L. Kersemakers
those Pacific territories administered by the Editor: E.J.A. Krempelsauer PORTUGAL
United States of America. GREECE Ferreira á Bento Lda.
Elektor EPE R.D. Estef-83-ni, 32-1°
Kariskaki 14 1000 LISBOA Printed in the United States of America
16673 Voula—Athena Editor: Jeremias Sequeira
Editor: E. Xanthoulis ISSN 1051-5690
WorldRadioHistory
I ELECTRONICS SCENE I
COMPREHENSIVE INDEX FOR WIPES IMPROVE CONDUCTIVITY
DO-IT-YOURSELFERS AND PROVIDE PROTECTION
1989 Index to How To Do It Information con- DeoxIT and PreservIT from Caig Labora-
tains listings for 62 magazines containing tories are available in nonflammable, non-
how-to articles in hobby and special interests MCG'S CATALOG ON toxic, noncorrosive, and ozone-safe wipe
for 1989. This is the 27th annual supplement SURGE SUPPRESSORS applicators.
compiled and published by Norman Lath- A free 16-page catalog and application guide, DeoxIT improves conductivity by dissolv-
rop Enterprises and it includes periodic Surge Protection for Data Lines, which eases ing oxides that form on metal connector and
cumulations. Subjects are arranged alpha- selection of appropriate surge protectors for contact surfaces, eliminating resistance that
betically, entries therein are by magazine title data lines, is available from MCG Electron- impedes electrical performance. DeoxIT and
and then chronological. It offers asynopsis ics, makers of power line surge suppressors PreservIT contain active ingredients that do
of each article and includes the estimated cost with proprietary µZ circuitry. not rely on solvents (freon, alcohol, and oth-
of the project you are researching. Contact MCG Electronics Inc., 12 Burt Dr., ers) for performance. Both have excellent
For details contact Norman Lathrop Enter- Deer Park, NY 11729, (516) 586-5125 or (800) migration properties that coat and condition
prises (NLE), PO Box 198, Wooster, OH 851-1508, FAX (516) 586-5120. the metal surfaces and protect them from
44691-0198. future oxidation and contamination.
For more information, contact Mark K.
I PANEL CONNECTORS Lohkemper, Caig Laboratories, Inc., 16744

FROM NEUTRIK W. Bernardo Dr., Rancho Bernardo, CA
Neutrik's MPR/FPR Series, XLR-Type Panel 92127, (619) 451-1799, FAX (619) 451-2799.
Chassis Connectors are small, feature gold-
I
plated contact elements, shell and chassis
ground and self-tapping screws, and snap into SPEED UP CIRCUIT BOARD ART
printed circuit boards of 1.6mm thickness for New releases from PCBoards include Ver-
prefastening with a bottom retention pin. sion 3.3 of PCRoute and version 3.0 of Super-
They are available in two female and one CAD by Mental Automation, Inc. and fea-
male configurations with or without reten- tures their improved interface. Your sche-
tion spring.
Contact Neutrik USA, 195-3 Lehigh Ave., I DIGITAL ENCODER-DECODER
matic capture program will benefit from a
higher completion ratio, document and art
Lakewood, NJ 08701-4527, (908) 901-9488, The Digital Coded Squelch Encoder-De- created simultaneously, and being executa-
FAX (908) 901-9608. coder, Model DCS-23, is a microminiature ble from SuperCAD.
from Communications Specialists Inc. PCRoute is $99; its upgrade an additional
Measuring 1.36" x 1.18" x .25", it uses sur- $35. SuperCAD's schematic capture pro-
I DIGITAL MULTIMETER
FITS IN YOUR POCKET
Pocket Pro Digital Multimeter, model
face mount technology to permit installation
of all mobile and most portable radios. A
gram is $99 and SuperCAD + is $199 with
an extra library and drivers for laser printers
crystal-controlled CMOS microprocessor and pen plotters, plus a conversion utility.
DM-2A, from A.W. Sperry Instruments
allows operation on avery low 6-20VDC Contact PCBoards, 2110 14th Avenue South,
Inc., is a 31
2 -digit portable tester that in-
/
8mA. Connections are color-coded jumper Birmingham, AL 35205, (205) 933-1122.
cludes manual/autoranging, overload protec-
wires connected to a microminiature plug
tion on all ranges, auto polarity, audible and
and socket. The DCS-23 is $59.95 and
I
visual continuity indication, and built-in
covered by a one-year warranty.
leads. It is UL listed and packed on atrans- XLR-10 BOOSTS MACKIE MIXER
For information, contact Communications
parent blister card with two B-6 batteries, Mackie Designs' XLR-10 adds ten discrete,
Specialists Inc., 426 West Taft Ave., Orange,
C-70 carrying case, and operating instruc- studio-grade, phantom-powered mike pre-
CA 92665-4296, (800) 854-0547, FAX (714)
tions. amps to the CR-1604 16-channel MIC/Line
974-3420.
Contact A.W. Sperry Instruments Inc., 245 Mixer, for atotal of 16. It mounts directly to
Marcus Blvd., Hauppauge, NY 11788, (516) the bottom of the mixer jack panel with no
231-7050.
I CREDIT-CARD SIZE
MEMORY PERIPHERAL
external wiring. Each XLR-10 preamp uses
four conjugate-pair transistors with large
The RAM Card Drive (RCD-1) was devel- emitter geometry to reduce distortion at all
oped by Basicon to provide amore reliable levels and deliver low noise (- 129dBm at
means of data storage, but goes beyond sim- 150e). Contact Mackie Designs Inc., 16130
ple data storage. Woodinville-Redmond Rd. NE, No. 2,
The RCD-1 features include RS-232 or Woodinville, WA, (206) 488-6843.
RS-422/485 communication enabling easy
connection to PC/XT/AT computers and
many other types of industrial computer and
communications systems. Other features in-
clude simple string character commands,
communications line monitoring, command
time stamping, and supplied wall transformer
or 9-13V DC input power connection.
For more information, contact Basicon,
14273 NW Science Park Dr., Portland, OR
97229, (503) 626-1012, FAX (503) 643-4686.
WorldRadioHistory
•
ELECTRONICS SCENE I
NEW CHASSIS PUNCHES FOR FREQUENCY COUNTER
HANDS OR HYDRAULIC FITS IN YOUR POCKET
Leads Metal Products Inc. introduces their The Model 3500 is a pocket-sized frequen-
new 1/
16 DIN (45MM X 45MM) and 1/
32 DIN cy counter from Startek International Inc.
(45MM X 22.5MM) chassis punches. that can find and measure frequencies from
Manufactured of tool steel, they are designed 10Hz-3500MHz or 3.5GHz. It features aone
to easily remove aslug after punching. The megohm input impedance from 10Hz-
COMPUTER PRODUCTS
units may be operated by hand or by ahy- 12MHz and a 500 input impedance from
iimr.Vatund &mime
draulic knock-out driver and can handle up 10MHz-3.5GHz. Its eight-digit red LED dis-
to 14-gage in thickness. The manufacturer play with aHold function is powered by in-
will resharpen and replace parts. ternal NiCad batteries that allow for port-
Contact Eileen Alexander, Leads Metal ability up to 5hours; recharge with supplied
Products, Inc., Circle City Industrial Com- unit or use optional auto adapter. Select from
plex, 1125 Brookside Ave., Suite C, Indian- three gate times, two adjustable clock oscil-
apolis, IN 46202-2748, (317) 631-7200, FAX lators and two MMIC amplifier stages for in-
(317) 631-7237. put sensitivity. The Model 3500 costs $250
and includes a full-year parts and labor
limited warranty. The Model 2500, which
covers 10Hz-2400MHz, costs $210. Call
(800) 638-8050 for orders only.
Contact Startek International Inc., 398 NE
38th St., Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33334, (305)
561-2211, FAX (305) 561-9133.
I 8-CHANNEL MOBILE
FROM MIDLAND
I RESOURCE FOR RESOURCES
The 1992 Annual Catalog from Jameco
H-P SYSTEM-POWER
The Midland LMR Model 70-9150 800MHz Electronic Components lists computer
PRODUCT CATALOG
Mobile is an 8-channel two-way under-dash products in ahandsome, comprehensive 90-
The new HP-IB System DC Power Supplies &
radio. Available from Midland LMR, it is page glossy format with an index. Its selec-
Electronic Loads catalog from Hewlett-Pack-
PLL synthesized and is programmable from tions include cables and adapters, power
ard features 42 new H-P products, offering
806-825MHz and 951-870MHz transmit, supplies, computer kits, coprocessors, ICs,
awide selection of system-power products.
851-870MHz receive, with maximum fre- monitors/cards, and printers & accessories,
Select the appropriate power supply from 28
quency separation of 64MHz, transmitter to to name afew. Benefit from direct line ser-
pages for almost any automatic-test-equip-
receiver. RF output is adjustable from 7.5- vice for ordering, technical assistance, and
ment (ATE) application. Included are single-
15W. customer service. Photographs of items ap-
and multiple-output units and amainframe
Contact Midland LMR Marketing, 1690 N. pear in color, followed with alisting of their
with easy-to-interchange modules. Also, it
Topping, Kansas City, MO 64120, (800) attributes and price.
contains information on 15 analog/manual
MIDLAND, ext 1690. Send your request to Jameco Electronic
programmable, and DC power supplies.
Components, 1355 Shoreway Rd., Belmont,
Contact the Hewlett-Packard Company In-
CA 94002-9864, (800) 831-4242, FAX (800)
quiries, 19310 Pruneridge Rd., Cupertino,
237-6948.
CA 95014.
II TOOLBOX FOR
NUMERIC COMPUTATION
MATLAB Optimization Toolbox, available
from The Math Works, Inc., performs
System
minimization and maximization of mathe- IX' l'u‘vet .Supplie!,
matical functions used in complex system Eleetrimic Limits
analysis and design. Applications include
I
ANALOG/DIGITAL SOUNDTRACKS ON curve fitting, parameter identification and
SAME 35mm PRINT optimization, performance tuning, and cost
Dolby has developed anew 35mm print for- minimization.
mat, Dolby Stereo SR-D. It features two sep- Interactive routines enhance numeric com-
arate optical soundtracks on the same print: putation software. When you combine the
anormal analog stereo SR track in the usual Toolbox with MATLAB, you can explore 2-
location, and anew six-channel digital track and 3-dimensional graphics. It also integrates
adjacent to it. Titles in the new format and linear algebra, matrix computation, and
theater equipment to play the digital track graphics.
will be commercially available next year. Prices begin at $495, with academic and
For more information, contact Dolby, 100 quantity discounts available. Contact The
Potrero Ave., San Francisco, CA 94103, (415) Math Works, Inc., Cochituate Place, 24
558-0200, FAX (415) 863-1373, TELEX Prime Park Way, Natick, MA 01760, (508)
34409. 653-1415, FAX (508) 653-2997.

14
A MUSICAL CHRISTMAS PRESENT

Build this little circuit and surprise whoever you think eligible for a
Christmas present that plays ashort tune when opened.
M ELODY ICs are now available in such

awide variety that it has become fairly
easy to build an electronic music box from
very few components. Here, we propose the
use of an IC that contains eight popular
Christmas tunes. The circuit starts to play a
tune when triggered by aswitch. The switch
and the circuit should be carefully tucked
away in the Christmas present. Remember,
this time the electronics is less important—it
is the appearance of the present that matters
most. The nicer it looks, the better your
chances of success.
The heart of the circuit shown in Fig. 1is
formed by an UM3481A melody generator
IC from United Microelectronics Corp.
(UMC). Although aseries of similar ICs is
available offering awide variety of tunes, the
UM3481A is used here because it plays eight
'evergreens' suited to the festive season. The
chip contains an oscillator (tone generator), a
modulator and an electronic memory. The
information contained in the memory con-
trols the tone generator and the modulator,
so that asequence of tones is produced to
form atune. All that is required additionally
3V 1V5
Belli
1V5
BC327
C13
1V5
100p
10V
Bett2 IC1 = 74HC132 LP

1V5 R6 2_. ENV M70
4708 CE MTI
IC2
OP1 100k,
C11
OP2
MIM
IC1c IC1d 3481A 18n
SL OSC1
100n OSC2
BC337 LS1
C6 TSP OSC3
AS elm
33p
BC547B
OU
700n
200mW
•
BIM 910157 -11
Fig. 1. A switch-triggered eight-melody generator for the festive season.

WorldRadioHistory
MUSICAL CHRISTMAS PRESENT 12
COMPONENTS LIST
Resistors:
1 2k522 R1
3 1001d2 R2;R9;R11
1 10kS2 R3
1 220n2 R4
2 470ki1 R5;1:16
1 47k12 R7
1 180k12 R8
Lo_ 1 10Mil R10

1 561cf2 R12
2 3301(o R13;R14
1 100e2 preset H P1
Capacitors:
6 100nF pitch 5mm Cl ;C2;C4;C6;
C7;C9
1 10µF 10V radial C3
1 4µF7 10V rachal C5
1 33pF C8
2 18nF C10;C11
2 100µF 10V radial C12;C13
Semiconductors:
1 BC547B Ti
Fig. 2. Single-sided printed-circuit board for the melody generator. 1 BC327 T2
1 BC337 T2
to make the tune audible is asmall power Pin 5of IC1b is connected to areset circuit 1 74HC132 IC1
amplifier and aloudspeaker. The balanced based on transistor Ti. When the UM3481A 1 UM3481A* IC2
power output stage is formed by transistors has finished playing atune, a'1' appears on
T2 and 13. The loudspeaker is connected to the TSP output, pin 1. This signal causes Ti •UMC distributors:
this amplifier via output capacitor C12. The to conduct briefly, and reset the bistable, so UK:
volume can be controlled by preset Pi con- that the CE input of the melody generator is Manhattan Skyline Ltd. (0628) 75851
nected between the audio output, MTO made low. When the present is opened, METL (0844) 278781
(pin 2) of IC2 and the input of the on-chip switch Si is set to position 'B'. Since Ci is then USA:
not charged yet (it was previously connected Unicorn Microelectronics Corp. (408) 727-
driver, MTI (pin 12). The power amplifier
9589
transistors are driven direct from the push- to ground via Ri), pin 1of the bistable is
pull outputs of the IC, OP1 and OP2 (pins 10 pulled low briefly, so that the output (pin 3)
Miscellaneous:
and 11). changes from low to high.
1 Microswitch with change- Si
The frequency of operation of the on-chip The two remaining gates in ICi ensure
over contact
oscillator is determined by components Ru, that adifferent tune is played every time Si
1 Miniature loudspeaker LS -1
R12 and C8. The tone frequency can be is actuated. The eight available tunes are
0.2W/812
changed by altering the value of C8. The tim- listed in Table 1. As soon as the output of 2 1.5-V penlight battery
bre is determined by Rs and C5. For experi- ICla supplies alogic '1', C2 is charged via Rs. 1 Holder for 2 penlight batteries
ments with the timbre, change the value of When the 'high' trigger level of ICic is 1 Printed circuit board 910157
C5 to personal taste. reached, this Schmitt-trigger NAND gate
toggles and supplies ICid with apulse via a
differentiating network, C4-R4. This pulse is you use abox, you may want to fit afalse bot-
inverted and, on arrival at the SL input tom and install the electronics and the loud-
causes the melody generator to select the speaker between it and the real bottom. A
Table 1. UM3481A melodies next tune from the memory. In this way, all cigar box or alarger chocolate or sweets box
eight tunes are played in succession, al- will be sturdy enough for this purpose. Do
Jingle bells though this requires the preseent (a box?) to not forget to drill afew holes where the loud-
Santa Claus is coming to town be closed and opened again eight times. speaker is fitted, otherwise the sound will
Silent night, holy night The circuit is powered by two series-con- lack brightness. Next, the microswitch is
Joy to the world nected 1.5-V penlight batteries. Given the fitted near the lid, such that it is switched to
Rudolph the red-nosed reindeer low current drain of the circuit, the batteries the rest position (position 'B' in the circuit di-
We wish you a merry Christmas should last through many 'recitals' of the agram) when the lid is opened, or taken from
0 come, all ye faithful IC's repertoire. the box.
Hark, the herald angels sing For ease of construction, asmall printed- If all is ready, assembled and tested, pro-
circuit board has been designed for the ceed with dressing up the box. Do not forget
Christmas tune generator (see Fig. 2). Most to put your Christmas present inside (the
passive components are fitted vertically. The tunes are all very well, but She will probably
The melody generator IC is switched on two ICs may be fitted in sockets, but to re- not appreciate the electronics as much as you
and off by aset-reset (S-R) bistable, duce cost they may also be soldered direct on do), and use alarge red ribbon to wrap the
A tune is started when the output of ICia to the board. whole thing up.
supplies alogic high level to the CE (chip en- Much of the effect achieved with your
able) input, pin 2, of the melody generator. melodious Christmas present depends on
When the CE input is held low, IC2 is your creativity in hiding the electronics, and,
switched to the low-current (1 µA) standby- even more importantly, in finding the best
mode. This obviates an on/off switch. way to fit the switch unobtrusively. When

16
UNIVERSAL TIME SWITCH

by R. Lucassen
THIS circuit meets the requirement for asim-

ple, low-cost timer with atiming range
of aless than asecond to several tens of hours,
and athyristor-based mains interface capa-
ble of controlling inductive loads.
The circuit consists basically of atimer
section and aswitching section. The timer
derives its accuracy from the mains frequency:
50 Hz or 60 Hz. Components R4, R3, R2, Cl
D1 and D2 convert the mains voltage into a
clock signal for binary ripple counter IC1, a
4040. Counters IC1, IC3, and an 8-input AND
gate, IC4, form aprogrammable divider. When
the time set with the jumper wire(s) at the
outputs of IC2 and IC3 has elapsed, the out-
put of IC4 goes low and causes bistable IC2b-
IC2c to toggle. As aresult, the gate drive of
thyristor Thl is removed, and the load con-
nected to K2 is switched off. To prevent mains
pollution and switching noises, the load is
switched during the zero crossing of the mains
voltage. The timer can also be used to switch
on aload after the preprogrammed time <197>
this only requires wire jumper 'Y' to be fitted
instead of 'Z'.
The time is set by fitting amaximum of eight
wires between the 8-input AND gate and the
counter outputs. The actual time is the sum WARNING. Since the circuit carries dangerous voltages at anumber of points, never work
of all selected times listed in the table. on the circuit when the mains is connected to it. Make sure that no part of the circuit can be
The 12-V supply voltage for the circuit is ob- touched when it is being set, adjusted or used.
tained from the mains with the aid of asin-
gle-phase rectifier, D3. The supply voltage is
stabilized and smoothed by zener diode D5
and reservoir capacitor C6.
The two series resistors in the rectifier, R16
and R17, must not be replaced by asingle
100-kn resistor. Remember, the total voltage
drop across R16 and R17 is of the order of
220 V (at amains voltage of 240 V), which is
too much for asingle resistor rated at 0.5 W.
The same applies to resistors R3 and R4.
The timer is actuated by pressing push-but-
ton S2. Note that actuating the timer means
that the load is switched on or off, depend-
ing on whether jumper Yor Zis fitted. During
the timing cycle, the circuit can be reset by
pressing S2 again. This starts afull timing cycle,
irrespective of when the switch was pressed.
The timing cycle can be stopped by pressing
Si. Provision is made for electronic control of
the start and stop functions. This is achieved
with the aid of two optocouplers, IC5 and
IC6. The electronic control inputs, K3 and
K4, are electrically isolated from the timer, and
can be driven with control voltages of 5 V.
The construction of the timer is straightfor-
ward. A minimum of wiring is required since
all parts are contained on asingle printed-
circuit board. The start and stop switched
must be rated at 250 V because they are at
mains potential. The circuit must be fitted
into an ABS enclosure with non-metallic screws.
Take care to provide adequate strain reliefs
and insulation of the mains input and output
cables.
WorldRadioHistory
UNIVERSAL TIME SWITCH
SWITCHING TIMES
IC, Time Time

output 50 Hz 60 Hz
Qi 0.02 s 0.02 s
Q2 0.04 s 0.04 s
Q3 0.08 s 0.07 s
Q4 0.16 s 0.13 s
Q5 0.32 s 0.27 s
Q6 0.64 s 0.53 s
Q7 1.28 s 1.07 s
Q8 2.56 s 2.13 s
Q9 5.12 s 4.27 s
Qlo 10.24 s 8.53 s
Q11 20.48 s 17.07 s
Q12 40.96 s 34.13 s
IC3
output
Q1 1m 22s 1m 8s
Q2 2m44 s 2m 16 s
Q3 5m 28s 4m 33s
Q4 10 m55 s 9m6 s
Q5 21 m 50s 18 m 12 s
Q6 43 m41 s 36 m 24s
Q7 1h23m lh 12m
Qs 2h55 m 2h25 m
Q9 5h5Om 4h51 m
Qu3 11 h39 m 9h43 m
Q11 23 h 18 m 19h 18 m
Q12 46h 36 m 38 h50 m
PARTS LIST
Resistors:
RI, RI3, R14, R19 = 33 Ica
R2= 1001M
E3, R4 =470 IcS2
R5—R12, R20 = 2.2 MO
RI5, R18 = 1MO
R16, RI7 =47 Id/
R21, R22 = 1ki-2
Capacitors:
CI = 1nF
C2, C3 = 100 nF
C4, C5 =4.7 nF, 400 V
C6 = 220 µF, 63 V, radial
C7 =4.7 fif, 63 V, radial
Semiconductors:
DI, D2, D6, D7 = 1N4148
D3 = 1N4007
D4 = not used
D5 zener diode, 12 V, 1.3 W
B1 = B380C1500 (round type)
T1 =BC547B
Tri 1=TIC106 D
ICI, IC3 =4040
IC2 =4093
IC4 =4068
IC5, IC6 =CNY65
Miscellaneous:
KI—K4 = 2-way PCB terminal block, 7.5 mm
pitch
SI, S2 = push-button switch for 250 VAC
Fl =fuse, 1A, delayed action, with holder
for PCB mounting
Enclosure, e.g., Bopla E430
WorldRadioHistory
18
FSK/RTTY DECODER FOR PCs

The circuit and the software described here are aimed at those of
you who have so far dreaded the complexity of afull-blown FSK
decoder and the well-presented objections of the Miss or Missus
about the weight, size and noise of agood-as-new teleprinter
machine (no matter how cheaply you may have acquired this
wonderful equipment), when all you want to do is receive RTTY
(telex) transmissions in the short-wave bands.
by Roger Collins
different types of FSK, different baud rates, principle of frequency shift keying (FSK).
K
EEPING the peace at home and still be
able to intercept FSK (frequency-shift and different mark/space tone conventions. The data to be sent is in the form of logic is
keying) transmissions requires some hard- The method used to accomplish this is fairly and Os. This stream of data is used to shift the
ware to be built or purchased that changes rudimentary, and intended as a guide for frequency of the transmitter, resulting in two
the output of a short-wave receiver into a further experimenting. discrete frequencies being radiated just like
form that is suitable for processing by aper- an SSB signal modulated by two (alternate)
sonal computer (PC). The decoder presented tones. A high transmit frequency denotes a1
FSK techniques (or mark), and alow transmit frequency a0
here does everything to achieve just that. In
combination with asimple BASIC program Much transmission of data, whether news (or space). The two tones and the difference
(Fig. 2), it turns your IBM PC (or compatible) broadcasts, weather information or amateur in frequency shift vary depending on the
into an RTTY decoder capable of handling traffic, over a radio network employs the standard used.
Fig. 1. Circuit diagram of the FSK decoder. A MAX232 is used to ensure the correct signal levels for the PC's serial port, COM2:.
WorldRadioHistory
ESKIRTTY DECODER FOR PCs
19
A databyte can be sent asynchronously if

it is preceded by astart bit to enable the ter- Table 1. 8250 UART register functions
minal equipment to get ready to receive it.
Likewise, one or two stop bits are used to en- address LCR bit 7 Function
able the terminal equipment to shift the
newly received databyte out, and prepare
base + Tx holding reg. (THR) (write)
for the next start bit, which signals the arrival
o Rx data reg. (RDR) (read)
of anew databyte.
Since abyte is eight bits, acomplete database + baud rate divisor low (BRDL)
word would produce a packet of 10 or base + 1 1 baud rate divisor high (BRDH)
11 bits. To reduce the number of bits, and
base + 1 o interrupt enable reg. (IER)
with it the bandwidth occupied by the trans-
mitter, the length of the dataword is reduced base + 2 interupt ID reg. (IIR)
to seven and ahalf bits — five databits, one base + 3 line control reg. (LCR)
start bit, and aone and ahalf stop bit. How- base + 4 modem control reg. (MCR)
ever, five bits of data will only produce 32
base + 5 line status reg. (LSR)
(2') combinations. Assuming that plain lan-
guage is used for the transmission, the 32 base + 6 modem status reg. (MSR)
codes available allow the complete alphabet
to be sent. In the RTTY (radioteletype) sys- x= don't care.
tem, one of the codes is reserved to indicate
'figure shift', which offers another set of
32 codes that may be used for numbers and
punctuation marks. In this set, there is a'let-
ter shift' code that returns the equipment to
the alphabet. The code used is based on the Table 2. Teletypewriter codes
Murry, or more frequently, the Baudot, con-
vention. CHARACTER CODE SIGNALS ASCII
To keep the bandwidth of the trans-
LTRS FIGS START 1 2 3 4 5 STOP CODE LTRS FIGS
mission in the short-wave band as small as
possible, the transmission (data-) rate must
A 1 1 0 0 0 3 65 45
be kept within limits. The normal speed in
terms of bits transmitted per second (baud 1 0 0 1 I 25 66 63
rate) is 45 to 75. At 50 baud, one bit of data 0 1 1 1 0 14 67 58
has alength of 20 ms. Using atone of 1kHz D 1 0 0 1 0 9 68 36
to indicate a1would mean 20 cycles of the
E 3 1 0 0 0 0 1 69 51
tone being transmitted.
At the receiver, aBFO (beat frequency os- > 1 0 1 1 0 13 70 62
cillator) enables the two tones to be con- G 0 1 0 1 1 26 71 42
verted to any frequency within the audio H O 0 1 0 1 20 72 60
pass-band, i.e., they may not necessarily be
8 0 1 1 0 0 6 73 56
the exact original two tones. In the FSK de-
modulator, filters and phase-locked loop bell 1 1 0 1 0 11 74 07
techniques are used to convert these two 1 1 1 1 0 15 75 40

tones into the marks and spaces (Is and Os) O 1 0 0 1 18 76 41
of the original transmitted data.
O 0 1 1 1 28 77 46
O 0 1 1 0 12 78 44
FSK decoding on a PC
o
rj 9 0 0 0 1 1 24 79 57
MS-DOS as well as most communication and
o 0 1 1 0 1 22 80 48
terminal emulation programs developed for
PCs will allow the baud rate of aserial port
o 1 1 1 1 0 1 23 81 49
(COM1: to COM4:) to be set only as low as 4 0 1 0 1 0 10 82 52
110 baud, and the data format to 7or 8bits, 1 0 1 0 0 5 83 39
with 1or 2stop bits. For the reception of FSK
5 0 0 0 0 1 16 84 53
data we require to set the baud rate as low as
U 7 1 1 1 0 0 7 85 55
45, with 5databits and 11/ 2 stop bit. Quite an
unusual format for the average PC user! V O 1 1 1 1 30 86 61

Most PCs use a8250 UART or similar IC 2 1 1 0 0 1 19 87 50
in the serial interfaces COM1: and COM2:.
X 1 0 1 1 1 29 88 47
The COM1: and COM2: base addresses are
03FB and 02FB respectively. The register Y 6 1 0 1 0 1 21 89 54
functions of the 8250 are listed in Table 1. 1 0 0 0 1 17 90 43
For the present application, COM2: is BLANK 0 0 0 0 0 o oo 00
used, and the BASIC program has been writ-
SPACE O 0 1 0 0 4 32 32
ten to use this port for the RTTY decoder.
The baud rate is sent to the UART as two CR 0 0 0 1 0 8 13 13
bytes (high and low). Testing LSR bit 0will LF 0 1 0 0 0 2 10 10
indicate if data has been received in the RDR. FIGS 1 1 0 1 1 27 00 00
Next, the RDR is read, the content is con-
LTRS 1 1 1 1 1 31 00 00
verted to ASCII, a check is made on letter
shift or figure shift, and the converted char-

20 RADIO AND TELEVISION
Table 3. Decoder to PC connections
10
Decoder (D9) PC (09) PC (D25) Signal
20
30 FSK DECODER PROGRAM
40
50 L - LTRS ARRAY 5 5 7 ground
60 F - FIGS ARRAY
70 BRD - BAUD RATE DIVISOR 3 2 3 RxD
80 G - 1/0 FIGS/LTRS
90 &H2F8 - COMM 2 RDR/BRDL
100 ' * &H2F9 - COMM 2 IER/BRDH
110 ' * &H2FB - COMM 2 LCR
120 ' * &H2FD - COMM 2 LSR
130 '
sharp transition at this centre frequency.
140 ' If the receiver is tuned so that the high
150 CLS
160 PRINT
tone and the low tone (mark and space) are
170 PRINT FREQ BAUD RATE " equidistant around the centre frequency, the
180 PRINT "
190 PRINT mark and space signals will produce Is and
195 PRINT " 20.967 50 TASS " Os, depending on the received transmission.
200 PRINT 18.404 50 TASS "
210 PRINT " 18.194 50 TASS " The Q and C2 signals are used to drive the
220 PRINT " 18.439 50
230 PRINT 18.049 50
mark and space LEDs to assist tuning to the
FRENCH "
240 PRINT " 15.937 50 FSK transmission. As there are as many
250 PRINT " 13.490 50 FRENCH "
260 PRINT " 8.064 50 FRENCH "
marks as spaces, the two LEDs will flash at
270 PRINT n 7.594 50 BELGRADE " the same rate when the tuning is correct.
280 PRINT
290 PRINT These signals are also fed to the phase revers-
300 INPUT "Enter baud rate ing switch, Si, and from there to a Type
310 BRD=1843200!/(16*B)
320 BDRL=BRD AND &HFF MAX-232 RS232 driver, IC3. This IC has an
330 BRDH-(BRD AND 6HFF00)/256
340 CLS
on-board DC-DC converter providing +10 V
350 DIM L(31),F(31) and —10 V rails to ensure the correct swing of
360 FOR J=0 TO 31
370 READ L(J) the RS232 signal required by the serial port
380 NEXT J of the PC.
390 FOR J=0 TO 31
400 READ F(J) Correct setting-up of the serial port, the
410 NEXT J
420 OUT &H2FB,&H84
baud rate, the number of databits and stop
430 OUT sH2F8,BRDL bits will result in the interception of the
440 OUT SH2F9,BRDH
450 OUT &H2FB,&H4
RTTY transmission, which will de displayed
460 S=INP (&H2FD) on your computer monitor. Converting the
470 K=S AND 1
480 IF K=0 THEN GOTO 460 5-bit code into ASCII will enable the charac-
490 A=INP (&H2F8) ters to be displayed.
500 IF A=27 THEN G=1
510 IF A=31 THEN G=0 Presets are sufficient here since the final
520 IF G=0 THEN PRINT cHR$(1..(A)); ELSE PRINT CHR5(F(A)); adjustment of the audio signal can be done at
530 OUT &H2FD,0
540 GOTO 460 the receiver. The phase switch, Si, will be
550 DATA 00,69,10,65,32,83,73,85,13,68,82,74,78,70,67,75,84,90,76,87,72,89,
80,81,79,66,71,00,77,88,86,00
called upon occasionally when the marks
560 DATA 00,51,10,45,32,39,56,55,13,36,52,07,44,62,58,40,53,43,41,50,60,54, and spaces are swapped as aresult of tuning
48,49,57,63,42,00,46,47,61,00
91015312 the receiver above or below the tones (USB or
LSB).
Finally, the decoder is powered by a
Fig. 2. Listing of the control program written in BASIC. simple 5-V supply connected to the mains.
Although its current drain is small, no at-
acter is sent to the video adapter. LSR bit 0is i.e., for frequencies higher than 500 Hz. The tempt should be made at powering the
then cleared, and the software waits for the result is that frequencies between 500 Hz decoder from the modem signals on the PC
next character by testing this bit. and 1kHz will produce alogic 0, and fre- serial port lines.
quencies higher than 1kHz alogic 1, with a
A simple FSK decoder
The circuit diagram of the FSK decoder hard-
ware is given in Fig. 1. The audio output of
the receiver is applied to connector Ki, and
the preset level of Pi is adjusted to give a
squared-up signal at the collector of Ti. Pro-
vided the receiver has been tuned correctly
to the FSK signal, the rectangular signal sup-
plied by Ti will be the digital version of the
two tones.
The two signal frequencies are fed to IC2a
via aSchmitt trigger, 1C1c. IC2a is aretrigger-
able monostable multivibrator set to amono
time of about 1 ms with preset P2. This
means that signals higher than 1kHz will
cause this mono to be permanently set. Any
frequency lower than 1kHz, for instance, the
lower FSK tone, will cause the mono to set
and clear. This signal is fed to a second
monostable, IC2b, set to 2 ms with P3. This
monostable will be set for the periods of the
signals, supplied by IC2a, shorter than 2ms,
WorldRadioHistory
SAFE SOLID-STATE RELAY
by J. Ruffell
pends to some degree on the current to be

switched, and will typically lie between 5mA
and 20 mA. The optimum value is best de-
termined empirically, observing amaximum
current of 40 mA. The minimum value of
the series resistor, Rimin, in 52, is calculated
from
Rimin =25 (Us-2.4)-130
where Us is the control voltage applied to con-

nector Kl.
Diode D1protects the SSR against reverse
control voltages, and D2 indicates whether
the SSR is supplied with acontrol current.
Network R2-C 1 is connected across the SSR
A
PARTS LIST
A LTHOUGH the S202DS2 solid-state relay
..(SSR) from Sharp is auseful and inter-
output to protect the device against voltage
surges on the mains.
Resistors: esting electronic component, it fails to meet When connected to amains supply of
RI = 100 S 2
. the minimum requirements for electrical safety 220 V or 240 V, the circuit may be used with
R2 = 10012, 2.5 W in many countries where the mains voltage non-reactive loads up to 330 W, which cor-
is 220 V or 240 V. This is mainly because the responds roughly to the maximum permis-
Capacitors: breakdown voltage of the optocoupler in the sible effective load current of 1.5 A.
C1= 100 nF, 630 V S202DS is too low, and the pin spacing of the
device is too small. WARNING. Since the circuit carries danger-
Semiconductors: For the many applications where electri- ous voltages at anumber of points, it is es-
Dl = 1N4004
cal safety is aprimary concern, Sharp have sential that proper electrical insulation is ap-
D2 =LED, red
developed another SSR, the S201SO4. The plied. Never work on the circuit when the
ISO I=S201SO4 (Sharp)
small SIL enclosure (shown in the photo- mains is connected to it. Make sure that no
Miscellaneous: graph) contains an optocoupler complete part of the circuit can be touched when it is
Kl =PCB terminal block, 5mm pitch with aseries resistor, azero-crossing switch being set, adjusted or used. Good guidance
K2 =PCB terminal block, 10 mm pitch and apower triac. The presence of the zero- on safety precautions may be obtained from
crossing switch implies that the SSR is suit- the IEEE Wiring Regulations, acopy of which
able for non-reactive loads only. Furthermore, is available in most Public Libraries in the UK.
since the value of the series resistor is only
130 n, an additional, external, resistor will
often be required to prevent too high acur-
rent through the LED in the internal opto-
coupler.
For reasons of safety, the solid-state switch
is best built on the printed-circuit board shown
here (this board is not available ready-made).
o9 The value of the external series resistor, R1,
914008.12 depends on the control voltage and the trig-
ger current. The trigger current, in turn, de-
WorldRadioHistory
CONNECT -4
This article describes a
battery-powered little
circuit that allows you to
play Connect-4 against a
computerized opponent.
by Richard D. Bell
A LTHOUGH most of you will know how

A
..to play Connect-4, here are the rules.
The game is played on a 7-by-7 vertical
board. Players take it in turns to drop their
counters down the columns. The counters
stop falling when they hit the bottom of the
column or another counter. The aim is to get
your counters in aline of four either horizon-
one time. The software would have cycled
tally, vertically or diagonally. The first to get Fig. 2is used. Provided asoldering iron with
aline wins. through the columns at afast enough rate so afine tip is used, no problems should be en-
Ihave always enjoyed playing Connect-4 that it appeared as if all 7 columns were countered.
as long as Ican remember. It is agame that is being displayed simultaneously). Addi- It is best to start with the lowest profile
not as taxing to play as chess, but it does pro-tional components would also be required: components. The following order is recom-
vide enough mental stimulation when at least two more ICs, 7transistors and some mended: wire links, resistors, IC sockets, ca-
played against afairly competent opponent. resistors. Coupled with the LEDs, the PCB pacitors, transistors, jack socket (use short
With this in mind Iset about designing a size would have at least doubled. For all of pieces of solid wire to mount it alittle above
small pocket-sized circuit so that Icould play these reasons, I decided against using the board), crystal and then the regulator
sitting in lectures, or when Iwas on the train. 49 LEDs, and instead to use asingle 7-seg- (IC5).
The result is a80x60 mm board with remark- ment LED display. A 4-MHz crystal must be used because all
ably few components that plays a pretty The use of a 7-segment LED display timing for the RS423 link is derived from it.
mean game of Connect-4. means that the player has to keep track of the If the serial interface is not required, any
state of the play manually. That is, you have crystal up to the maximum frequency of
to draw the board (or buy one of those 4MHz could be used. For example, the com-
Circuit description pocket Connect-4 games). monly found 3.58 MHz NTSC colour burst
At the heart of the circuit (Fig. 1) is amicro- The circuit has an RS423 interface, which crystal.
processor Type 6802. This was chosen be- allows the game to be connected to a(dumb) Next, fit the two switches. Depending on
cause it has 128 bytes of in-built RAM, which terminal, acomputer running acommunica- the height of the enclosure you intend to use,
suited my requirements perfectly. tions program, or a printer with a serial these may be fitted direct on to the board, or
The microprocessor runs a program input. The serial link enables the game board connected to it via short wires. The same
stored in a27C64 8-KByte EPROM. The pro- to be printed out automatically. The soft- goes for the display, which may have to be
gram is all machine code, and about ware provides two data transfer rates, select- fitted into awire-wrap socket to allow it to
6.5 KBytes long. It takes care of everything: able by the user, of 300 baud and 9,600 baud. reach up to the front panel of the enclosure.
user input, deciding where the computer The RS423 standard is similar to the more Alternatively, stack up acouple of regular IC
should move, displaying the computer's common RS232, except that the voltage sockets. In any case, fit aregular 14-pin IC
moves, etc. More information on the soft- swing is only ±.5 Vas opposed to ±12 V. Most socket in position LD1 on the board. The
ware can be found further on. equipment will receive RS423 signals just as voltage regulator must be fitted with asmall
The two four-input AND gates contained well as it does RS232 signals. heatsink, making sure that this can not touch
in IC3 (a 74HC20) serve to decode the ad- The driver for the RS423 link consists of any of the component wires near IC5.
dress space of the microprocessor, so that it two transistors and acouple of resistors. It is Finally, connect the battery leads to the
can read the EPROM, and write and latch only an output — no handshaking lines are board. The red lead goes to the hole marked
data to the display. received from the external equipment. It is '+', and the black lead to the hole marked
For the display it was decided to use a assumed that at 300 baud the equipment will If you do not intend running the circuit from
single 7-segment LED type. The idea of using be able to handle displaying the received abattery, asuitable DC input may be used
49 bi-coloured LEDs was toyed with (the characters without the need of handshaking. instead. If you power the circuit from the
board is 7x7), but this was rejected for a At 9,600 baud, it is assumed that the equip- mains, do not use the RS423 link, or else the
number of reasons: cost, circuit complexity ment buffers all received data, making hand- 'ground' on the jack connector will be
and current. Being apoor student at the time, shaking also unnecessary. shorted to 0V (it is normally at around 4V).
the cost of 49 LEDs was found a bit ex- Any DC voltage from 7V to 15 Vcan be used
cessive, while the current drain was also to power the circuit.
Construction
something to worry about (thinking about it If the RS423 link is not required, the fol-
now, this was not really aproblem because Construction of the game is relatively easy lowing components can be left out: R3, R4,
only one column of 7LEDs could be lit at any when the printed circuit board shown in Rs, R6, Ru, Ris, D, T2 and Ki.
WorldRadioHistory
CONNECT -4 El
Fig. 1. Circuit diagram of the Connect-4 game. Remarkably, the game is played with a single push-button, Si, as the input device, and a
7-segment display as the output device.
Testing which must be mounted centrally in the 14- you see the message 'c on4' cycle through
way IC socket, that is, pin 1of the display on the display.
Inspect your solder work carefully before goes to socket pin 2. If you have the game connected up to a
testing the board. Also check the orientation Switch on, and hopefully you should see printer or terminal, press the button any time
of the polarized components and the IC the letters 'c on4' cycle through on the dis- during the 'con 4' display to actuate the ser-
sockets. Do not fit the ICs yet, except the volt- play. If nothing at all appears on the display, ial link. The letter 'P' will appear on the dis-
age regulator. Connect a9-V (PP3) battery, or if the display remains steady or shows play indicating that printout (serial output)
and switch on S2. Check that +5 V can be constantly changing garbage, there may be a is enabled. Release the button, whereupon
found on all the pins that it should be on problem with either the crystal, the reset cir- the display will switch between a'3' and a
(refer to the circuit diagram), and that it does cuitry or your solder work. All that can be '9'. Press the button on the '3' to select
not appear on any that it should not. If every- done is to check the supply voltage, change 300 baud, or on the '9' for 9,600 baud. The
thing seems all right, you may proceed. the value of Ci, and check the PCB meticu- game will restart, and this time data will be
If you have fitted the parts for the RS423 lously for any open or short circuits. The sent to the terminal.
interface, check the voltage on the common EPROM must, of course, contain the right You will now be asked to specify the
('ground') connection of the jack socket. This program. board size (serial link only). See the
voltage should be about 4V with respect to examples in Figs. 6and 7for the difference
the circuit ground. If it is not, there is aprob- between the two sizes. Stop the display on
lem with R14 and/or R15. Next, with apiece
Serial connection
the 'S' for the small board, or on the 'L' for
of wire short pins 1and 19 of the socket for The serial link on the board sends data at the large board.
IC4. Measure the voltage on the 'signal' (plug 300 bits/s or 9,600 bits/s. The format is 8da- Next, the display will cycle through
tip) connection of the jack socket. It should tabits, no parity, and 1stop bit. either 1, 2 or 3 horizontal bars (segments)
be about 0 V. Next, remove the shorting Figure 4shows the connection to the ser- being lit. This is the prompt for the level of
wire, and short pins 19 and 20 together on ial port on the BBC microcomputer, and difficulty. Stop the display on the desired
the same socket. This time the voltage on the Fig. 3the connection to the RS232 (or RS423) level, 1bar being easiest, 3being the hardest.
signal connection should be about 8.5 V. port of aterminal, printer or an IBM PC or Finally, you must tell the game who is to
If everything is all right so far, switch off compatible. In all cases, an RTS-CTS connec- go first. Stop the display on the 'H' (for
the power, and insert all ICs and the display tion is fitted to simulate handshaking. human) if you want to go first, or on the 'C'
into their sockets, making sure to observe the (for computer) if you want the 6802 to go
orientation. Note that the microprocessor, first.
Get ready to play!
IC1, is the other way around from the three You are now playing the 6802 at Connect-
other ICs. The display is a 10-pin device You are ready to play the game as soon as 4. Do not forget to have aready-drawn board
WorldRadioHistory
EEEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991
24 GENERAL INTEREST
Resistors:
1 33k12 R1
1 3k123 R2
2 41d27 R3,R4
1 10012 R5
1 2k122 R6
8 1kt R7-R13,R15
1 27012 R14
Capacitors:
1 47p.F 25V mole Cl
1 le 16V tantalum C2
Semiconductors:
1 BC547B Ti
1 BC557B T2
1 1N4148 D1
1 6802 IC1
1 27C64 (ESS608 -) IC2
74HC20 IC3
74HC374 IC4
7805 IC5
HP5082-7613 [Di
Miscellaneous:
1 4.00 MHz quartz crystal
1 PCB mount 3-mm jack K1
socket
1 miniature push-button Si
1 miniature cn/off switch S2
1 PP3 (9V) battery clip
1 heatsink tor IC5
handy if you are not connected up to aserial

link.
When it is your turn, the display will
cycle through the numbers '1' to '7', which
correspond to the seven columns on the
board. Press the button on the column you
wish to play. In later stages of the game,
some of the numbers will be missed out, in-
dicating that the column is full. When you
press the button, the falling graphic will be
displayed, representing your counter drop-
ping down the column.
When it is the computer's turn, the top
segment of the display flashes, showing that
the 6802 is 'thinking' about its move. When
it has finished, it will display anumber indi-
cating which column it wishes to play.
If you wish to retire, just turn the game off
and then on again.
Fig. 2. Printed circuit board for the Connect-4 game. If you win, asymbol which looks like a'u'
is displayed. If you lose (far more likely, even
at level 1) an 'L' will be displayed. In the
event of a draw, a 'd' will be displayed.
a='17.1-r T.
GND
Whichever indication appears, just press the
button to start another game.
If you are using the serial link, you will be
025 prompted for your response at each stage
(see the examples in Figs. 5, 6and 7).
34 5 7
0000000000000) Software
o
000000000000 The machine code program contains atotal
of six search algorithms. Depending on the
910138 -13
level of difficulty selected, either one, five or
all six are used. The first search goes through
Fig. 3. Serial lead connection details for PCs, printers and terminals. each of the seven columns, and gives them a
WorldRadioHistory
CONNECT -4
rating. The column with the highest rating is

then checked to see what effect it would have
RxD if it were played as the computer's go. If pla-
RTS ying it would allow the human to win, it is
TX ignored, and the next higher rated column is
CIC IN) GND tried. If the level of difficulty is one, this is the
CTS only search used to pick up the computer's
0V TxD go.
If the level of difficulty is either two or
910138 -12 three, a further four search techniques are
used. These are far more complex, and in-
volve searching forward by up to 12 moves
Fig. 4. Serial lead connection details for BBC-B micro. in some instances. The microprocessor at-
tempts to force the human into alosing situ-
ation, or create multiple win lines for itself,
CONNECT 4 - game (c) MB Ltd, code (c) R D Bell 1990-91, version 1.6 that the human will not be able to block.
Instructions:
For level three, only one more additional
search is used. This compares the current
Try and outwit the computer by being the first to make a line of four, either
vertically, horizontally or diagonally. board positions against stored ones in mem-
ory. If amatch is found, the ideal response is
The game is played on a 7 by 7 board. Play progresses with each player taking
turns to drop their counters down a column. The counters will fall until they read from memory. This search can be quite
hit the bottom or another counter. The first to make a line of 4 wins.
time consuming, but it does not mean that
any moves that the micro rates as the best
Do you want a (S)mall or (L)arge board?
(but in the long run have proved not the best)
ALT-F10 HELP I ANSI-BBS I HDX I 9600 N81 I LOG CLOSED I FAT OFF i CR CR
can be avoided. It will be found that the 6802
Instructions: plays a very good game of Connect-4 at
Try and outwit the computer by being the first to make a line of four, either level 3, when the maximum 'move' time is
vertically, horizontally or diagonally.
about 20 seconds.
The game is played on a 7 by 7 board. Play progresses with each player taking The search algorithms are quite compli-
turns to drop their counters down a column. The counters will fall until they
hit the bottom or another counter. The first to make a line of 4 wins.
cated, and their operation is not discussed
further here. The author can supply the
Do you want a (S)mall or (L)arge board? source listing (which is about 2,500 lines
Large: You're ## I'm /\
long) on paper or disk (BBC, Amiga or IBM
## \/
format) for £8.
Select the level of difficulty by pressing the button. (1-easy, 3-hard)
Easy: What a wimp!
If you want to go first stop the display on H, or if you wish the computer to
go first stop it on C.
Ok, I'll go first.
I'm thinking . . .
I'll go in column 4
910138-14
Fig. 5. Instruction screen displayed on the terminal when the serial link is used.
.HC
H C C
• C C H
• H C H
• CHHH CH
1 2 3 4 5 67
I'm thinking . .
I'll go in column 2
II
0I0I
0 0I
I ## I ## I /\ I ## I . . . H C .
I ## I ## I \i I ## I . . H C C .
. . C C H .
I ## I /\ I ## l\ I .CHCH. .
I ## I \/ I ## \/ I .CHHHCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
## I ## IA I ## I ##
## I ## IV I ## I ##
910138-16
I'm sorry, you've lost.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I'm sorry, you've lost.

91013845
Fig. 7. As Fig. 6, but showing the 'small
board' option. As you can see, it is quite
Fig. 6. Example of the large board' option as displayed on the terminal. difficult to beat the 6802!
WorldRadioHistory
26
AUTOMATIC BLOWER FAN CONTROL

FOR CARS
by J. Riecker
TN CASE you were not aware of it, the rush

lhour can affect your health. Stuck in atraf-
fic jam or caught in the dense traffic in abig
city, car drivers are often forced to switch off
the fan to prevent being choked by the exhaust
fumes produced by the vehicle in front of them.
Switching the fan on and off every minute
or so to keep the fumes out is anuisance,
and calls for an automatic switch controlled
by the engine speed. Such switches exist, but
unfortunately for most of you they are only
found in top-of-the-range cars equipped with
an airconditioning system.
The circuit shown here will not set you back
too much, yet puts you at apar with certain
BMW 7xx drivers—well, at least as far as the
fan control is concerned. The control auto-
matically switches off the fan when the en-
gine runs at arelatively low speed. After a
short delay, the fan comes on again auto-
matically when you are clear to drive after
passing acongested spot or start moving
again in atraffic jam.
The circuit consists essentially of (1) an en-
gine speed monitor circuit set to aswitching
level of 1,800 rev/min; (2) an integrator to pre- runs at arelatively low speed. The monitor some cars the contact breaker pulses can have
vent fast switching around the engine speed; consists of two monostable multivibrators, apeak value of up to 200 V. Monostable IC a
and (3) a time constant that introduces a ICi aand ICib. The first is supplied with pulses supplies pulses of afixed length as long as
delay before the fan is switched on. from the contact breaker. Resistors RI-R 2and the period of the input signal is greater than
The engine speed monitor serves to sense diodes D1-D 2 serve to reduce the pulse level the time constant defined by network P1-R3-C 1.
whether you are moving or not. This is achieved to the maximum supply voltage of the cir- If the input pulses are shorter, the Q output
by detecting when the car engine idles, i.e., cuit. This protection is necessary because in of ICi a remains at 1. The time constant, ti
WorldRadioHistory
AUTOMATIC BLOWER FAN CONTROL FOR CARS rla
for a6-cylinder engine, t1=11.11 ms; and for

an 8-cylinder engine, t1=8.32 ms.
The second monostable, IC 1b, is triggered
as long as it receives input pulses from IC Ia.
This results in pin 10 of IC Igoing high when
the engine speed drops below 1800 rev/min.
To delay the response of the engine speed
monitor, asmall hysteresis is provided by R5
and C2. The monotime of IC16, t2, must be
greater than the greatest value of "C 1.Here,
t2 is set to about 100 ms.
The integrator is formed by network R7-
C4, whose time constant, t3, is set to about
3s. Then follows athird monostable, IC 2a ,
which determines the on time, t4, set to about
20 s. A transistor driver, T1,interfaces the
control to arelay. Note that the fan is switched
off when the relay is energized. This is done
to enable the fan to be used when the control
is not powered for whatever reason. Finally,
the third monostable is connected to the first
via the positive trigger input. This is done to
prevent IC 2 being re-triggered every time
the engine speed drops below 1800 rev/min.
The circuit is best constructed on the printed-
circuit board shown here. Keep an eye on
the maximum fan current that flows via the
board and the relay contacts—the connections
between the fan and the board, 'P' and 'NC'
(for normally closed) must be made in heavy-
duty terminals and sockets as used in cars.
Test the circuit with the aid of afunction
generator connected to pin 5of ICi. Set a
generator frequency that corresponds to the
desired engine speed at which the fan con-
trol must operate. The generator frequency
is 1/"C l.
Set the length of "C 1by adjusting pre-
PARTS LIST depends on the number of cylinders, N, in set Pi until the signal at pin 10 just toggles.
Resistors: the engine: Lower the frequency. The relay must be en-
R1=56 kn ergized. Increase the frequency, and the relay
R2 = 8.21c12 Ti = 120 /(engine speed xN ) must be de-energized after adelay of about
R3 = 15 Id2 20 s. The circuit is now ready to install in the
R4 = 22 kià For example, for afour-cylinder engine, and car. The current consumption is about 1mA
R5 = 100 1c1-
1 aswitch-off speed of 1800 rev/min: in the off state, and about 38 mA when the
R6 = 2201(12
relay is energized. 3
R7 = 470 IcS2
"C 1 =120 /( 1800 x4). 16.67 ms.
R8 = 1MI1
R9 = 4.7 Id2
Similarly, for a5-cylinder engine, ti =13.32 ms;
R10 =470 e
P1 =47 kn preset
Capacitors:
Cl, C3 =470 nF
C2, C7, C8 = 100 nF
C4= 10 le, 16 V
C5 = 22 liF, 16 V
C6 = 220 µF, 16 V
Semiconductors:
D1, D2, D3 = 1N4148
D4, D5 = 1N4001
D6 = LED
Ti = BC547B
ICI, IC2 =4538
Miscellaneous:
Rel = 12 V/330 11 PCB mount relay.
contact rating about 8A, e.g.
Siemens V23127-A0002-A201
5off angled 'fast-on' pin for PCB
mounting
WorldRadioHistory
28
MOUSE/JOYSTICK SWITCH FOR AMIGA

by D. Gembris
H
ERE is an interesting circuit for all Amiga
owners who object to having to discon- 1
nect the mouse every time asecond joystick
Frir --
is required for avideo game. The switch is I " I
all-electronic, and can be connected perma- MOUSE
IRI = ARRAY 8 0 3k3
nently to the joystick-1 port on the Amiga. L_

7 7 2
Extremely simple to build from aminimum K2
of components, the circuit detects automati- NC
cally when the joystick or the mouse is used. 6 5

O 2
M4 144
o '
3 4
M3 0
O 8
O 4 3 K3
M2 M2
o9 1 NC
5 2
M1 MI
4 2 0
04 14
1N4148
O
ICI
03
13 3 0
1,
K1 GAL 8 o
16V8 4 0
NC 7(;..---.1 1 0 2 2
1
9 o
NC 0 6
19
J1 2 J4 01 Il
0 7
7
J3
° 3
8
J3 o e J2
BUTTON 0 9
J4 s
JOY-STICK
914078 ,11
The mouse supplied with the Amiga com-

puter supplies four signals, apart from the two
button signals. Signals H and HQ (or V and
VQ) indicate the direction, and XO and X1
the speed (see Fig. 2). The joystick supplies
similar signals, although it must be noted that
joystick activity is simpler to detect than
mouse activity. The joystick is active when-
ever one of the four direction signals goes low.
By contrast, mouse activity can only be
detected by comparing the current state of the
'IDENTIFICATION
3
ELEKTOR,
'TYPE GAL16VS,
'PINS
MI=2, M2=3, M3=4, M4=5, 21=5, J2=13, J3=7,
J4=6, Q2.T=12, Q3.T.13, Q4.T.14
BOUT 1=15, VOUT.T=16, SNM.T.17, DIF.T=18,
Q1 T=13:
'BOOLEAN EQUATIONS
SWM = /DIF 6 SNM 6 JI 6 J2 • J3 J4
+ DIE,
QI = SWM O M1
+ /SWM & .71;
Q2 = SWM & 142
+ /SWM & 32;
Q3 = SWM & 143
+ /SWM & J3;
04 = SWM 8 844
+ /SWM S J4;
VOUT = MI;
BOUT . 842;
DIF = /VOUT 6 MI
+ /M1 6 VOUT
+ /BOUT 8 142
+ /M2 4 HOOT;
*END 914078.13
WorldRadioHistory
MOUSE/
JOYSTICK SWITCH FOR AMIGA 29
PARTS LIST
Resistors:
R I= array, 8x3.3
Semiconductors:
DI = 1N4148
ICI = GAL 16V8(ESS6003)
Miscellaneous:
Kl, K2 = 9-way male sub-D connector,
angled, for PCB mounting
K3 = 9-way, female sub-D connector,
angled, for PCB mounting
PCB 914078
H and V lines with the previous state. The cal, so that even the slowest GALs can he nected.
mouse is active when these states are differ- used—a few nanoseconds are sufficient for Those of you with access to aGAL pro-
ent. Hence, abistable and aclock would be areliable mouse activity detector. grammer can use the source listing in Fig. 3
required to implement an activity detector. The left-hand mouse button is combined to produce aJEDEC file and program their
Here, amuch simpler solution has been with the button on the joystick via diode D I. own device. If you do not have aGAL pro-
found by making use of the propagation Pull-up resistors are fitted at the joystick and grammer, you may like to know that IC 1 is
delay of the logic functions contained in the mouse inputs to prevent non-defined sig- available ready-programmed through our
GAL. In practice, the actual delay is uncriti- nals when one of these devices is not con- Readers Services.
RS232 WITH SINGLE POWER SUPPLY

by K. Walters
I N MOST personal computers, the power be soldered with the shortest possible leads
supply provides +5 V and ±12 V lines. between pins 2and 19. Preferably, do not
The positive 12 V line is needed for the disk use an IC socket, because fairly high peak cur-
drives, and the ±12 V for the RS232 inter- rents flow when theelectrolytic capacitors are
face. Over the past few years, ICs have become being charged. 1111
available (such as the MAX232) that can drive
serial channels (which need ±12 V) from a
single +5 V line.
In the diagram, a Motorola MC145407
and four electrolytic capacitors provide ±10V
(the supply for RS232 connections may lie
between ±5 V and ±15 V). The circuit also
provides three input buffersand three out-
put buffers (the MAX232 provides two of
each). If more buffers are needed, the IC can PREVIEW
supply a145406 via its Vdd and Vss pins to SPEAKER BUILDER
give atotal of six input buffers and six out-
put buffers. Issue 6, 1991
The 10-volt potentials are generated by
an integral 20 kHz oscillator and two volt- •Sensitivity of vented-box
age doublers. When the supply is loaded, these designs
voltages drop alittle, but remain \'ell within •Transmission line speaker
the RS232 requirement. evaluation
The open-circuit current drawn by the IC •A speaker system capable
is only 1.5 mA, but this increases, of course, of concert-level music
under load conditions: • Improved cables for better
It is advisable to keep the construction as sound delivery
compact as possible and to locate the elec- •An Amazing loudspeaker
trolytic capacitors very close to the relevant •A 3-way reflex cabinet
pins. The 330 nF deco'upling capacitor must
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBF:
R 1991
30
SINE WAVE CONVERTER

by H. Kühne
T
HE converter, based on aType CA3080
operational transconductance amplifier
et. 4mA 15V
(OTA) converts atriangular voltage into a
sinusoidal one with very low distortion. An
OTA is adevice whose amplification can be
varied by acontrol current.
IC1
The circuit needs astable, precisely sym- On
CA3080
metrical supply voltage, since the control is
derived directly from this via resistor R2. It
f\i
also needs asymmetrical triangular voltage
at alevel of 350 mV p-p at pin 3of ICi. The 6 00
output in those conditions is asinusoidal R3
voltage at alevel of 2.85 Vr.m.s. Provided the

circuit is constructed carefully and P1 is set
correctly, the distortion does not exceed 1.2%.
R1
This figure deteriorates rapidly when the R4
supply voltage is not accurate or precisely

symmetrical.
C2
o
On 15V
914074-11
POWER-ON DELAY
by G. Peltz
T
HE power supply for this analogue cir- in C4. In spite of C4 being discharged, the relay Note that the circuit is connected electri-
cuit that affords delays of 330 seconds is remains actuated because the gate voltage cally to the mains so that great caution should
taken directly from the mains. The direct of T1 is held via Dg. Only when the supply be observed during any testing and operation.
voltage at the output of the bridge rectifier voltage is switched off will the relay be deen-
is held at 22 V by zener diode D5. Resistor ergized.
R6, which enables C1 to discharge rapidly as
soon as the mains is switched off, must be
rated at 250 V a.c. or 400 V d.c.
The delay is provided primarily by C4,
which is charged via C3, whose impedance
at 50 Hz is about 10 M, and half-wave rec-
tifier D6-137. After agiven period, the poten-
tial across C4 will be 12 V higher than the
source voltage of T1,which is set with P1.
•The gate of T1 has the same potential as C4.
Network R2-0 5 serves to suppress any spu-
rious voltage peaks.
When the potential across C4 becomes
higher than the source voltage of T1,the FET
begins to conduct and this will result in T2
being switched on. Moreover, the voltage
across the relay is fed back to the gate of T1
via Dg. This feedback ensures that T1and T2
are quickly driven into saturation.
Once the relay has been energized, tran-
sistor T3 will be switched on via R5-C 6. When
this happens, C4 will discharge through the
transistor, so that the circuit is quickly back
in its initial state. The delay on power-up is,
therefore, not shortened by the residual charge
WorldRadioHistory
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
TECHNIQUES
Whereas over the past few centuries temperature was These are used, for example, in fuses. A bi-
metallic strip consists of two thin metal
measured by observing the expansion of a liquid (and
plates secured to one another, having differ-
later, asolid), nowadays many temperature measuring ent expansion coefficients. One end of the
devices are based on electronic sensors. This article strip is securely fixed. Current flow through
looks at the physical backgrounds and application areas the strip causes a temperature increase,
which in turn causes the strip to bend owing
of such sensors, as well as the methods of using them.
to unequal expansion of the components.
The free end can thus serve to open or close
an electrical circuit. The calculation of the
change of length is similar to that for fluid
T
EMPERATURE in the abstract is not The best known instrument to record the expansion:
easy to define, but it may be said of two first type of change is the fluid thermometer.
bodies at different temperatures that one The length of the fluid column (mercury; al- =lo a 1)
feels hotter to the touch than the other, or cohol) is a measure of temperature. The
that when placed in contact, heat flows from fluid is forced to expand in one direction by where a is the length expansion co-efficient
the hotter to the colder. Temperature is thus asmall (glass) tube. A temperature change u for the relevant material. It should be noted
adifference, which may be measured by the gives rise to avolume change, AV (VI—V2), that the co-efficients y and a are constant
physical effects it produces in contact with a of within a certain temperature range only
measuring instrument called athermometer. (generally, 0-40 °C for fluids, and 0-100 °C
Thermometers of whatever nature are de- AV= Vo y u for solid matter).
vices for comparing temperature intervals The phase change from solid to liquid as
with a standard temperature interval, that where y is the thermal expansion co-effi- aresult of atemperature rise is exploited in
between two fixed points. The practical cient per kelvin for the relevant matter. a well-known electrical component: the
fixed points are the ice point (the equili- A second example of temperature recor- fuse. The wire in afuse melts when the cur-
brium temperature between ice and air-satu- ding elements are thermometers and rent through it exceeds acertain limit.
rated water at standard atmospheric thermostats based on bimetallic strips. Bimetallic elements and fuses are not,
pressure) and the steam point (the tempera-
ture of equilibrium between liquid water and
its vapour at standard atmospheric pressure).
The SI definition of temperature makes the
fixed points absolute zero (0 K) and the
triple point of water (273.16 K), that is,
when the three phases liquid, solid and va-
pour exist together in equilibrium.
Scientifically speaking, temperature
(symbol: 7) is ameasure of the kinetic en-
ergy of the molecules, atoms or ions of
which abody or substance is composed. The
faster the movement of these particles, the
higher the temperature of the body or sub-
stance. Unfortunately, measuring the speed
of molecules is hardly apracticable method
to express temperature as a value. Fortu-
nately, we can make use of some of the ef-
fects of temperature changes to measure the
temperature proper. What effects can we ob-
serve?
• the volume increases (usually) with
higher temperatures;
• the state of matter (usually) changes
from the solid into the liquid and, finally,
the gaseous phase.
• Many properties of matter, including
heat capacity, sound propagation and
electrical resistance, change. Fig. 1. Characteristic curves of some passive temperature sensors.
WorldRadioHistory
TEST AND MEASUREMENT
strictly speaking, direct temperature sen-

sors. They are unsuitable for analogue tem- Table 1. Temperature scale conversions
perature measurement, and merely serve to
establish or break an electrical circuit per- Kelvin (K) Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit ('F)
manently or temporarily by monitoring a Absolute zero point o -273.15 -459.67
current flow. Triple point point of water * 273.15 o 32
Steam point 373.15 100 212

The resistance-based
thermometer *For practical purposes, the ice point and the triple point of water may be taken as the same,
but strictly speaking, the triple point of water is a little higher than 0 "C since, under the
One of the most important effects of tem- pressure of its own saturated vapour at that temperature, the melt,ng point of ice is about
0.0075 "C.
perature changes on physical properties is
the change of resistance of conductors and
semiconductors. There exist materials
whose resistivity, p, (rho), rises with tem-
perature. This is caused by an increase or de- positive metal
crease of charge carrier mobility, as aresult

of a greater charge carrier density. In the
first case, the material has apositive thermal
WARM COLD
co-efficient, in the second, anegative ther- (measurement (comparison
location) location)
mal co-efficient.
Thermometers based on resistors are
passive sensors that require auxiliary energy 4— uth negative metal
to enable the effect of atemperature change 910165-12
to be measured.
Conducting temperature sensors usually
consist of acopper-nickel alloy (tempera-
ture range approx. -50 °C to +150 °C), or Fig. 2. Basic construction of a thermocouple.
platinum (-250 °C to +1000 °C). The type
marking of the sensor indicates the material Table 2lists the values of the first two co-ef-
resistance at 0°C. A Type Pt100 sensor, for ficients for the materials indicated in Fig. 1. Table 2. Co-efficients of tempera-
example, consists of platinum, and is pro- Note that ture-dependent resistivity
duced to have a resistance of 100 S2 at 0°C. • metals are less sensitive to temperature
Apart from the metal-based sensors, changes than semiconductors (the o (1/K) B (1/K 2)
there are also semiconductor sensors such as curves are straighter); Nickel +5.5 10 -3 +7.4.10 -6
KTY sensors, PTC-cold, and NTC types. • the curvature of the characteristics is sig- Platinum +3.9 ,10 -3 -0.6.10 -6
These sensors are inexpensive, and widely nificant at very high temperatures only, Copper +4.3.10 -3
used in, for example, electric household since the Bco-efficient is 3to 4powers
KTY +9-10 -3 +11.10 -6
utensils (washing machines, tumble dryers, of ten smaller than the a-coefficient;
Manganin <0.04.10 -3 -0.5-10 -6
etc.). • the temperature/resistance characteristic
Figure 1 shows the temperature-resist- of copper is linear;
ance characteristic of a number of metals • the non-linearity of semiconductor sen-
and semiconductors. The curves shown may sors is much greater than that of metal tive temperature coel icient within acertain
be approximated mathematically by an ex- sensors; temperature range only—outside this range,
ponential series. Since the curves are rela- • the resistance of manganin is virtually the co-efficient is negative.
tively straight, a sufficiently close independent of temperature; Resistor-based thermometers come in
mathematical description may be achieved • the thermistor characteristic is so non-li- many shapes and sizes. Thermistors, PTCs
for powers up to 3. Similarly, the resistance near that it is better described by an e and NTCs are inexpensive, readily applic-
characteristic is described sufficiently ac- function than by series of powers. The able and quite sensitive. Their non-linear be-
curately by resistance is described by haviour, however, makes them hardly
suitable for measurement applications.
R =Ro a (1) - 1)o) + ( -uo) + R. Ro eB (1/T- 1/To) Their maximum usable temperature is
+ Y ( -po usually 200 °C to 300 °C, although special
where Tis the absolute temperature, and To (and much more expensive) types may be
In this equation, is the current temperature equals no + 273.15 K, or the reference tem- found with arating of 1000 °C.
and Do the reference temperature of 0°C, at perature at which Ro is valid. The material Integrated semiconductor sensors such
which the resistance Ro is valid. constant, B, is found in the datasheets. It as the LM35 series from National Semicon-
The first power indicates the rate of rise takes values of 2000 K to 5000 K at vo = ductor are cheap and tailored to temperature
of the curve (the temperature co-efficient), 20 °C, and causes a sensitivity that is ten measurement. These sensors have the in-
and the second its curvature. The sensitivity times higher than that of metal film resistors, valuable advantage of ahigh linearity within
of the sensor may be obtained by differentia- since the operating temperature range. This li-
tion: nearity is ensured by internal compensation
Sr=5/To 2. of the self heating caused by the current flow
Sr=a + 213 ( -uo )+3y ( -vo ) through the sensor. There also exist versions
Also note that PTC thermistors have aposi- with an internal current source, which
WorldRadioHistory
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES
The most commonly used thermoele-

ments are classified according to the DIN-
IEC 584 standard:
Mark Combination Symbols

copper/constantan Cu/CuNi
E chromium-nickel/constantan NiCr/CuNi
iron/constantan Fe/CuNi
culettNI
chromium-nickel/aluminium-nickel NiCr/NiAl
CuM/P9 «nee 4__ R platinum + 13% rhodium/platinum Pt13Rh/Pt
platinum + 10% rhodium/platinum Pt I
ORh/Pt
cutivC. D_
C9111/A9 PjVÇ
In addition to these elements, thermo-

couples are available based on gold, silver,
rhenium, cobalt, molybdenum and wolfram.
Therrnoelements are coupled to the
measurement electronics either by welding
Pt 10Rh/PI cry,. st
or bolting. One alternative is a connector

whose contacts must be made of the same
2 0 oo 200
°'
3
700 800 900 1000
materials as the therrnoelement.
\_ A SILW
Pyrometers
Pyrometers are instruments for measuring
very high temperatures. Their main applica-
tion is in the metal industry (steel works;
Fig. 3. Characteristic curves of commonly used thermocouples. melting ovens), but also in meteorology. A
principle is used that has not been discussed
allows current-drive to be applied, avoiding sultant thermocurrent, 4h, causes athermo- so far. Each body with atemperature higher
errors caused by the resistance of long con- voltage, Uth, across the resistor. than the absolute zero emits electromagnetic
necting wires. The main shortcoming of The thermovoltage is proportional to the waves of a length between 800 nm and
semiconductor temperature sensors is their difference, 1) between the temperature at the 1mm. The power of this so called radiant
restricted operating temperature range and measurement location, um ,and that at the exitance depends on the temperature and on
maximum temperature, which is usually comparison location, 'pc: the shape and colour of the object: black and
150 °C or so. rough objects have ahigher radiant flux than
High temperatures are the exclusive do- = De + smooth, bright ones. The relation between
main of passive and metal sensors. Inex- the emission constant, the radiant flux, the
pensive and accurate, these devices are used In practice, an electronic circuit is used to re- surface and the temperature is given by Ste-
at temperatures up to 1000 °C. Their non-li- late the temperature of the comparison loca- fan's law (Stefan's law, often called the
nearity is fairly easy to compensate. On the tion to a virtual reference of 0 °C. The Fourth Power law, is properly called the Ste-
down side, passive and metal sensors offer a degree of electron shift is a material con- fan-Bolzmann Law, since while Stefan de-
low sensitivity, and are relatively expensive. stant. Some values are given below in order duced it empirically, Bolzmann later gave a
Fortunately, metal film sensors are now of thermoelectrical voltage: theoretical proof of it).
available that can be produced economically The radiant flux is distributed over a
whilst offering the same accuracy and sta- Material Symbol Uth (01/K) wide spectral range, i.e., it is not of asingle
bility as the traditional types. Antimony Sb +35 wavelength. It has been found that the short-
Iron Fe +16 wavelength components in this spectrum
Zinc Zn +3 become more prominent as the temperature
Thermoelements
Copper Cu +2.8 rises (Wien displacement law). This effect
The group of active thermoelements is quite Lead Pb may be observed when iron is heated: red
different from that of the passive resistance Aluminium Al —0.5 glowing iron is 'colder' than white glowing
thermometers. While the latter require acur- Platinum Pt —3.1 iron.
rent flow to operate, thermoelements pro- Nickel Ni —19 The optical pyrometer depends for its ac-
duce avoltage proportional to temperature Bismuth Bi —70 tion on the Wien displacement law, and the
by virtue of the Seebeck-effect: if two differ- total radiation pyrometer on Stefan's law.
ent metals are joined, and the two junctions Figure 3shows the characteristic curves of Most pyrometers have optics complete with
are kept at different temperatures, an elec- some commonly used thermocouples. It is adiaphragm and an interference lens. The
tromotive force (e.m.f.) is developed in the seen that some of these exhibit avirtually li- application is governed by the 'visible' area,
circuit. The e.m.f. is caused by electron near thermovoltage characteristic, for in- the frequency range of the optics, and the ab-
shifts inside aconductor of which the ends stance, the nickel/chromium-nickel, solute absorbtion capacity of the receiving
are at different temperatures. A metal is copper/constantan and iron/constantan com- surface, which is usually asmall black area.
called `positive' if it has asurplus of elec- binations (constantan is a copper/nickel This area absorbs the radiation energy, and
trons at the `hot' end, and `negative' if the alloy). The curves of the high-temperature consequently heats up, allowing the above
`cold' end is negative with respect to the thermoelements with a range of up to mentioned types of sensor to be used for the
'hot' end. When apositive and anegative 2650 °C are relatively non-linear, which is actual temperature measurement.
metal are joined as shown in Fig. 2, the re- indicative of alow sensitivity.

34
VOX ACTUATOR FOR BABY ALARM

by R.G. Evans
H
04
AVING a recent arrival in the family RI ci
meant that some form of baby alarm or 10n
94
monitor was required if 'junior' was not to 12
RST
IC2 IC3
'wah' unduly in his cot when left unat- 92
tended. The circuit published in Ref. 1 11
01 IC1 3
4060
seemed suitable, and was duly built. How-
ever, having dealt with single-transistor RF 013 2_ IC3 = 4011
Man
oscillators before, Iwas suspicious about the

SEEM Øo
long-term stability of the transmitter, and
05
did not want to sit thinking all was well 96 97
3
when 'junior' was actually 'wahhing away' a 1N4148

OMB
lOn
few tens of kHz further up or down in the DI 3 5
IC3a
FM band. O3 6 IC3b
14
The circuit shown in Fig. 1 was de- CLK
1
03
34
IC2 05
veloped to enable the VOX (voice-operated T 4017 1N4148
switch) at a user-determined interval (1 to 02 4

02
eie l
12
11
IC3d
10 minutes), and to emit a recognizable 3
ENA
IC3c
10 13 6,1
sound, such that the correct operation of the 95 9

11
R6 99 C4
device could be verified. Well, in actual fact
the single-transistor oscillator in the FM 7n
transmitter proved to be more stable than the

910140-11
receiver used to monitor it!
The circuit
The circuit (Fig. 1) comprises three sections: Fig. 1. Circuit diagram of the VOX timer.
an oscillator and counter, adigital pulse gen-
erator, and two tone generators. Referring to cade counter, IC2. If a slower progression output, Q14). The decade counter, IC2,
the circuit diagram, Ri, R2 and Ci are con- through the counts is required, simply use makes each output high in succession, until
nected to the oscillator pins of a4060 oscilla- subsequent outputs, for example, Q5 avail- Q9 is reached. This is connected directly to
tor/divider, ICi. Resistor R3 and capacitor able on pin 5of the 4060). Since the 4060 is a the ENABLE to disable counting when high.
C2 serve to reset both counters when the cir- binary counter, each successive output will Before this happens, each successive 'high' is
cuit is switched on. Resistor R4 and LED Di take twice as long to step through the tone fed through adiode to the required oscillator
form acounting indicator that provides evi- sequence selected. Similarly, if ashorter time enable input. Gaps of one or more counts
dence that the circuit is actually working — between bleep sequences is needed, take have been left between successive tones. By
ideal for anxious parents! Pin 7on ICI sup- lower Q outputs to reset both counters (as using various combinations of diodes and
plies the clock pulse that steps the 4017 de- drawn, this is done by the highest counter IC2 outputs, a variety of effects can be
achieved. In this application, all that was re-
quired was a distinctive note, although a
morse-code-like sequence could easily be
programmed.
Circuit IC3 contains four NAND gates,
allowing two gated oscillators to be realized.
Note that each oscillator drives asingle piezo
resonator direct. On the prototype, this
caused no problems with overloading of the
NAND gate outputs. Changing the value of
C3 or C4 will change the tone frequency as re-
quired.
Current consumption of the circuit
should average about 5mA, most of which
goes to the 'counting' LED. Removing this
on the prototype reduced current consump-
tion to 0.8 mA except when tones were
sounding, when the current drawn was
6mA. At this low level, an Alkaline PP3 9-V
battery should give about 500 hours service.
Reference:
1. "Mini FM transmitter," Elektor Electronics
Fig. 2. FM transmitter used with the VOX (see Ref. 1).
(UK), July/August 1990.
UNIVERSAL POWER-ON DELAY
by J. Ruffell
O
UTPUT Q1 of this delay circuit becomes
active after the switch-on period has
elapsed and remains so until the next cycle
is begun. Output Q2, on the other hand,
also functions as amonostable; after its mono
period has elapsed, Q2 automatically be-
P
.
comes inactive. The mono period can be set
between 1second and 4seconds with 2 The
power-on delay can be set accurately between
1second and 1minute with P1 and DIP
switch SI.
The circuit is also provided with acount-
down indicator: the digit display on LD1
gives continuous information on the remaining
switch-on time. The 7-segment display is
driven by IC 4,adecoder chip that makes
only the normal digits (1-9) visible.
When the end of the delay period has
IC3a
IC 2111
been reached, counter ICi has come to posi-
7414e? 132
tion 0. As aresult, the output of goes
IC3b
high and T1is switched on. Since at the same
IC2d
time the output of toggles from high to
a .c,..eleensevt. leleerreieeelr
low, monostable is started. The output
T
,
13.E.0 Ors
of the monostable then goes high and switches
on 2 indicated by the lighting of the deci-
IC2b—IC2c
mal point of the display. Also, start/stop
bistable is reset, which disables the
counter and the oscillator. To start the next
time-out cycle, the bistable must be set afresh,
for which, with link JP1 in the position shown
in the diagram, alast transition (trailing
S2,
edge) is required at the input. This is ar-
LD1 ranged most simply by pressing but the
15
13 CC CC transition may also come from another cir-
-111 " 111 cuit or from asensor.
550il c
When JP1 is in the other position, the out-
LUC)
- 6130lt d n
680li —1- e put of the monostable is linked to the input

of the start/stop bistable (flip-flop). This re-
6130tà
an
sults in the time-out cycle being started anew
"' .22
at the end of the mono time. The circuit then
operates as an oscillator.
The circuit requires apower supply of
8-15 V. It draws acurrent of about 40 mA,
T2
most of which by the display. Transistors T1
and can switch up to 400 mA.

36
BCD ROTARY SWITCH

by J. Ruffell
B INARY-coded-decimal (thumb-wheel)
switches are not only relatively expens-
ive, but are also often not available to the
3...18V
wanted specification. A good alternative is
shown in the present circuit that uses gener-
IC2 = 4070B
ally easily available components and a12- JPI
p IjD1 J l
N ICI IC2
position rotary switch (the most popular TOn
type) of which two positions are disabled. ILLL

The terminals of the switch are connected
to the inputs of aprority encoder, ICI. When
D
an input goes low, the IC puts the number of
1,1 2
that input as an inverted BCD code at the 12
2
output. The four XOR gates enable the in- 13
à
IC1
verted code to be inverted again into astan- 6 IC2b 4
40147B
dard BCD code. This operation is effected with 2
link JP1: in position P, the output carries the o 3

e 6 8
10
standard BCD code, and in position N, the e. 9 5
inverted BCD code. D

4 12
IC2d
The circuit is powered by 3-18 V (because
CMOS ICs are used). The use of a5 V source 15
enables LS, TTL, HC and HCT inputs also to 914027-11
be connected to the switch.

The circuit draws acurrent of only about
200 µA.
BATTERY TESTER
by A.B. Tiwana
\l'ARIOUS types of dry and rechargeable

V battery (with an e.m.f. of 52.7 V) can be
tested with the circuit shown in the diagram.
It is based on the well-known Type LM3914
TICINO I
LED-display driver from National Semicon-
ductor. The circuit compares the e.m.f. of the 1
battery with areference voltage that is derived alma

¡tow (1101
from an internal source. The reference po- SIGNAI INPUT
tential (pin 8) can be set between 1.5 V and DIVIDE n

MGM SUM
2.7 Vby R1-R 2-P 1. The voltage at pin 8refers RIPPIIPIICI OUTPUT
to the maximum scale value of the LED se- NUENINCI AUGUST
ries. That is, if that voltage is 1.5 V, each LED

represents 150 mV. It is recommended to set
it to 1.5 V for NiCd batteries, and to 2.0 V
for dry batteries. Resistor R1 arranges acur-
rent of 12.5 mA for each LED.
It is advisable to test dry batteries on load,
since the terminal voltage depends on the
residual capacity. And, of course, the e.m.f.
of even an almost flat battery is still close to
its specified value. Rechargeable batteries
retain their specified e.m.f. until they are vir-
tually discharged, when it drops fairly rapidly.
It is, therefore, of not much use to check the
residual capacity of these batteries on the basis
of their e.m.f.: the test is limited to an indi-
cation of whether the battery is fully charged
or (nearly) flat.
WorldRadioHistory
GENTLE HALOGEN-LIGHT SWITCH
by H Moser
rr HE switch circuit, intended for low-volt- and C7 in farads. With values as shown, the That circuit then toggles, which stops gener-
1 age halogen lights, extends the life of the time is 700 s(11 min). ator ICi c,but Ti is kept conducting by ICi d.
lamps, because it ensures that the filament When the reset input of IC 2a is earthed, The potential across C6 is kept just above the
current is increased gradually, thus obviat- the lamp can be controlled only via Si; timer toggle level of ICi a by D2. This arrangement
ing the high peak currents that flow through IC 3 and the associated RC network can then makes it possible, if required, for the lamp to
the lamp with normal switches. The addi- be omitted. be turned down almost immediately after Si
tion of atimer would enable the circuit to When the lamp is switched on with Si, is pressed or the time set for IC 3has elapsed.
switch the lamp off again after apreset pe- the voltage across C6 rises slowly. Because of When ICi a toggles again, the triangular
riod of time. D3, even at standby there is apotential across voltage is compared with the falling poten-
The lamp is switched via T1,aMOSFET C6 at alevel just below that necessary to tog- tial across C6, so that the pulse width of the
that has achannel resistance of only 0.08 SI, gle comparator ICib. As soon as C6 is being output signal from ICi d decreases. When the
which ensures that losses are low (in the charged, the comparator will, therefore, tog- voltage across C6 has reached the level at
prototype 5250 mW). Control is by means gle almost immediately. This starts rectan- which iCib toggles, the generator is switched
of pulse-width modulation, which also tends gular-wave generator ICi c.However, it is off again, but this time T1,and thus the lamp,
to minimize losses. not the rectangular signal that is used here, remains off.
The circuit is switched on and off with Si. but the triangular signal across Cg. That sig- Finding switch Si in the dark is facilitated
Bistable IC 2bis adebounce circuit that clocks nal is compared with the voltage across C6. by using aswitch with integral LED (D 4).
binary scaler IC 2a .When the Q output of the This results in a25 kHz rectangular signal The power supply consists of asuitable
scaler is high, the lamp is on or is coming at the output of ICi d,whose pulse width in- mains transformer (which is probably al-
on; when the Q output is low, the lamp is creases slowly. That signal is used to drive ready present for the lamp) and abridge rec-
out or going out. The lamp may be switched T1,and thus the lamp, which will gradually tifier rated at 3 A. The current is drawn pri-
off automatically by IC 3 after apreset time. begon to light. marily by the lamp: with a20 W lamp, it
The time, t, in seconds, is calculated from The voltage across C6 continues to rise until amounts to 1.6 A.
t=32768x 2.3 xR 4xC 7,where R4 is in ohms the toggle level of comparator ICi ais reached.
HCT CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR

by J. Bareford
vices eminently suited to building quartz age are used to build three crystal oscilla-
T
HE wide frequency range, low power
consumption and well-defined switching crystal oscillators with TTL compatible out- tors. The only difference between the 2MHz,
levels of HCMOS inverters make these de- puts. Here, the six gates in a74HCTO4 pack- 16 MHz and 24 MHz oscillators is the capac-
WorldRadioHistory
38 HCT CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
itance around the quartz crystal, which in

all cases must be atype that resonates at the
fundamental frequency; overtone crystals can-
not be used here.
For output frequencies,f., other than the
ones used here, use the following design
data:
C2 = 723 /
= C2 / 4.
where f0 is in MHz and C1, C2 in pF. For

1—MHz crystals with ahigh impedance:
= C2 / 10.
When one of the oscillators is not built,

make sure to fit awire link in PCB position
Cl, C3 or C5. This ensures alow level at the
input of the first oscillator gate, preventing
high current consumption and spurious os-
cillation of the HCT04.
PARTS LIST
Resistors:
RI, R3, R5 = 10 1‘,412
R2, R4, R6 = 220 5 2
.
Capacitors:
C1= 82 pF
C2 = 330 pF
C3 = 12 pF
C4 =47 pF
C5 =5.6 pF
C6 = 22 pF
C7 = 100 nF
Semiconductors:
IC 1= 74HCTO4
Miscellaneous:
X1 =crystal 2MHz
X2 =crystal 16 MHz
X3 =crystal 24 MHz
2764 EPROM EMULATOR

by I& H.J. Ehlers
THE emulator enables aType 2764 EPROM

1 in an existing circuit to be replaced by a
static RAM. It is avery compact circuit: to-
gether with the stand-by power supply, it
fits on a105x40 mm (4 1/8 X 19 /16in) board.
To all intents and purposes, the action of
the circuit is indistinguishable from that of
an actual 2764 EPROM. The programming
voltage may be 12.5 V or 21 V. An addi-
tional advantage of the emulator is that pro-
gramming and erasing during adevelop-
ment phase are not necessary, thus saving
much time.
The position of switch S2 determines whether
the circuit is actuated or inactive. When it is
closed, the circuit is inactive and the mem-
ory cannot be influenced externally: it is then
WorldRadioHistory
2764 EPROM EMULATOR 39
5V RIS 05
135140
612 BAT85
,gc RIS
53
1N4148 RI,
BC556B 66
03
R10 BC556B RI4
8C547111
RI31Ç
8 8 2 3V:
IC3 IC2 m4M
2y2
non 2V
Ion
IC3b IC3c
ILI. ILI
28
1317
5. 28 I
I
-45V Vpp 5V NC
47k
11 10 AO
AO 10 DO AO
0 DO
12 9 Al V
12 DI A1
g Al DI
13 2
13 02 A2
A : A 2
A 3 02
15 7
D3 ICI A3
A4 6 SOCKET 16
04 6264 A4
5
D
AS
AS g AS 7 5 AS
4 A6
y A6 4 A6 A6
6
7 A7 3 3
A7 A7
25 25 A8
A8
13 7 24 Al
Al
Al IC2d IC2c 26
241 5 IC2b G I CS2 21
if if
Al '
410
A10 IC2a
/ All 23 II 27 2
3 4
if All
23
All FOI DI
2 Al
Al2 2 Al2
2
2/ BAT85 s 27
NC 21, WE
22 eraSe 22
OE
20 20
Cs CS1
ONO Il ONO
IC3d 14
14 IC3a
IC2 = 74HCT132
1C3 = 74HCTO2
\1 *see text
904099.11
in the stand-by mode. This mode should be way the memory can be erased is by placing
selected when it is expected that the circuit it in an EPROM programmer, setting switch
will not be used for some time or when it is S1to'erase', and actuating the function 'Blank
removed from, or placed into, another circuit. Check' or 'Read Out' on the programmer.
When S2 iS open, the content of the mem- When this routine has been completed, the
ory is protected by IC 2,14 and Ti. The only entire content of the emulator is set to FF-H.
Switch S1 must then be set to position 'pro-
PARTS LIST gram' again, whereupon the emulator can
Resistors: be programmed in the traditional manner.
RI, R8 = 22 1(12 When programming has been completed,
R2, R15 = 100 I)
R3. R4 =560 kL
R5, RII=68 kfl
R6 = 39
R7 =3.3 1(11
R9 =3300
R10=5600
R12. R14, R16 = 11(12
R13 =3.9 l<12
RI7 =array 8x47 1(52
PI = 250 kL preset
Capacitors:
Cl = 100 nF
C2= 2.2 µF. 16 V
C3 = 100 pF
Semiconductors:
D, D5 = BAT85
D2 = 1N4148
D3 =zener diode 3.3 V, 400 mW
D4 = zener diode 2.7 V, 400 mW
TI, T4 = BC556B
T2 = BD140
T3 = BC547B
ICI = 6264
IC2 = 74HCT132
IC3 = 74HCTO2
Miscellaneous:
SI —S3 = PCB slide switch;change-over contact
Battl = 3V lithium battery
WorldRadioHistory
40
CLASS A POWER AMPLIFIER PART 2

by T. Giffard
THE voltage amplifier and current ampli- speaker on switch-on: if this is lower than The circuit diagram of the protection sec-
fier are housed on separate printed-cir- 2.2 a(nearing short-circuit), the output tion is given in Fig. 5. Note that the relay is
cuit boards—see Fig. 3and 4(Part 1). The relay is not energized; not shown here, because it is located on the
current-amplifier board is fitted just above the • deactuate the relay if the direct voltage current amplifier board—see Fig. 4(Part 1).
heat sink as shown in Fig. 1, while the drivers, across the output terminals of the ampli- The relay is controlled by Schmitt trigger T43
current control transistor and output tran- fier rises above 0.6 V (indicating adefect and T41. The hysteresis in these stages, de-
sistors are screwed underneath (or beside) the in the amplifier); termined by R99 -R 13 ,ensures that the relay
board on to the heat sink. The terminals of • deactuate the relay if one, or both, of the is energized when the potential across C47 is
the transistors are bent upwards at 90° about secondary a.c. voltages fails—this also not less than 11 Vand de-energized when that
3mm from their housing and then soldered ensures that the loudspeakers are discon- potential drops below 8.5 V. Inverter T42 in the
directly to the board. All other components nected from the output when the ampli- collector circuit of T41 conducts when the
are fitted at the track side of the board afew fier is switched off. relay is energized and this causes D29 to light.
millimetres above the surface. Although the amplifier is not protected When the power is switched on, and every-
against short-circuits during operation, the thing is in good order, C47 is charged slowly
Protection circuit output transistors can cope with such large via R97. Once the potential across the capac-
currents that ashort-circuit has disastrous itor has reached alevel of 11 V, T43 is switched
The protection circuit serves to: results only when it happens at full drive. Such on and the output relay is energized.
• delay the energizing of the output relay conditions are, however, not envisaged. After Capacitor C47 is shunted by 140, which
by afew seconds from power-on; all, this is aquality design, not afoolproof pub- enables it to discharge very rapidly if afault
• monitor the d.c. resistance of the loud- lic-address amplifier. arises. The base of T40 is connected to the
Fig. 5. Circuit diagram of the protection unit.

WorldRadioHistory
CLASS A POWER AMPLIFIER -PART 2 41
secondary winding of the transformer via

R95 -C 48 -R 105-D 30 -D 31 .This rectifier circuit
provides anegative direct voltage at alevel
which ensures that T40 is switched on as soon
as the secondary voltage fails.
All other protection sections make use of
T40 via acomparator based on T39 . When the
base potential of 139 drops below about 12 V,
that transistor conducts, and this causes C47
to discharge via T40 .
The value of the loudspeaker resistance
is monitored by IC I immediately after the
power is switched on, but just before the
relay is energized. The inputs of the IC are
connected to aWheatstone bridge, one arm
of which consists of R75 and the loudspeaker
resistance, and the other of R77 and R78 .If
the loudspeaker resistance is smaller than
2.2 SI, the output of the opamp goes high so
that 138 is switched on and LOW IMP indi-
cator D27 lights. At the •-,a me time, T3 9switches
on T40 ,so that the relay cannot be energized.
When the loudspeaker resistance is higher
than 2.2 S2, the relay is energized afew sec-
onds after power-on. The voice coil is then
no longer connected to the inverting input
of ICi via pins 5and 6of K2 and the IC can
no longer monitor its resistance. During nor-
mal operation, the output of ICi is kept low
via diode D20 .
The direct voltage at the output of the am-
plifier is measured by the differential ampli-
fier formed by 135 and 136 .The output sig-
nal is fed to T35 direct and to T36 via C44 and
C45 . If the direct-voltage difference is greater
than 0.6 V, the collector voltage of either 135
or T36 drops to such an extent that 139 is
switched on via D23 or D2 4,depending on
the polarity of the direct voltage.
Transistors 127 and 130 in the current am-
plifier—see Fig. 2in Part 1—measure the
current through the emitter resistor of one of
Fig. 6. Printed-circuit board for the protection unit. the output transistors in the positive and
negative half of the output signal respectively.
When the peak value of that current exceeds
PARTS LIST Capacitors: 15 A, T39 is switched on via the ERROR line,
C40 = 150 nF so that the relay is de-energized.
Resistors: C41, C46 = 10 g, 25 V
R75, R77 = 15 1(12 C42, C43 = 1¡IF, 63 V
Power supply
R76, R99, R101 = 100 1(1-2 C44, C45 = 220 g, 25 V
R78 = 2.2 12 C47 = 100 g, 40 V The power supply is designed as adual mono
R79, R81 = 101(12 C48 = 2.2 g, 63 V configuration to ensure complete isolation be-
R80 = 1.8 k, 0.5 W tween the two output stages. Its circuit is
R82, R89, R105 = 2.2 1(12 Semiconductors: contained in Fig. 2(Part 1). It also needs an
R83, R85 = 221(12 D20, D23-26 = 1N4148 additional board—see Fig. 7—to house the
R84, R86 = 100 n D21, D22 =zener, 15 V. 400 mW auxiliary transformer, Tri, rectifiers D35-D 38 ,
R87 = 1k12 D27 = LED, orange and smoothing capacitors C54 and C55 .The
R88 = 1501(12 D28 = zener, 10 V, 400 mW board is designed to be fitted with anumber
R90 = 27 D29 = LED, red of terminal blocks to facilitate the inter-wiring
R91 =5.61(12 D30, D31 = 1N4002 of the amplifier sections.
R92= 2.21(12, 0.5 W D32 = zener, 18 V, 400 mW
R93, R95 = 56 kf2 T35, T36, T40, T43 = BC546B
Construction
R94 = 12 k12 T37 = BF256A
R96 = 150 SI 138 = BC639 The construction details are given for amono
R97 = 270 K2 139, T41, T42 = BC556B amplifier; two such amplifiers are needed,
R98, R104 = 2.7 ki-2, 1.5 NY ICI = LF411CN of course, for astereo installation.
R100 = 1MS-2 The prototype is built in afairly expens-
R102 = 330 SI, 0.5 W Miscellaneous: ive enclosure with integral heat sinks; asuit-
R103 = 220 IcS2 K2 = 10-way header for PCB mounting able box and separate heat sinks may, of course,
IDC socket for mating with K2 also be used. It is best to begin by drilling (and,
PCB 880092-3 (see Readers' services) preferably, tapping) holes in the heat sinks for
the fastening screws of the boards and tran-
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS I'S.% DECEMBER 1991
42 AUDIO & HI-FI
sistors: aphotocopy of Fig. 4can be used as coil, thus 'floating' agood centimetre (about on the board are no longer correct.
atemplate. Note that the board must be cen- 7/16 in) above the board. After the three boards have been com-
tred on the heat sink to ensure even heat dis- Make certain that the type numbers of T1 pleted, fit the drivers, output transistors and
tribution. and T2 in the voltage amplifier have the suf- T20-T26 to the heat sink: use heat conducting
Next, build the voltage and current ampli- fix 'V' (which indicates the amplification fac- paste and insulating washers throughout. Cut
fier boards, followed by that for the protec- tor). Also ensure that the dot on the case of about 1mm off the washers for the output
tion unit. It is worth while to pair the tran- this dual FET is located above the corresponding transistors to prevent their overlapping.
sistors beforehand, pa rticularlyT 3-T 4, T6-T7, dot on the board. Bend the pins of T23 -1 26 into a'Z', so that
T21-T22, T23+T24-T25+T2 6,and, not so im- The pairs T3-T 4 and T6-T 7 must be juxta- their ends finish up about 1.2 mm ( I/16 in)
portant, T8-T 9 and T10 -T 11 . posed with their smooth sides separated by above the heat sink—see Fig. 8.
On the current amplifier board, fit all com- heat conducting paste. Tighten the pairs to- The pins of T21 and T22 must point straight
ponents at the track side, afew millimetres gether with anylon cable tie. up and those of the quiescent-current tran-
above the tracks. Note that inductor L1 has Mount transistors T8, T,, T10 and T11 ,in- sistor, T20, obliquely upwards. While bend-
fewer turns than its counterpart in the LFA150. sulated from one another, on acommon L- ing the pins, check from time to time with
Resistor R63 is located in the centre of the shape aluminium heat sink measuring the current amplifier board to make sure that
55x20x15 mm (2 1/ 8x3/ 4x9/ 16in). everything fits nicely. If so, the board can be
Note that the dimensions of anumber of fitted on to the heat sink with the aid of 1cm
PARTS LIST components on the print have become smaller (3/8 in) long spacers. The transistor termi-
(because their rating has been reduced) and nals should locate exactly in the appropriate
ANCILLARY POWER SUPPLY that several of the indicated voltage levels holes in the board.
Resistors:
R106 = 820 SI
Capacitors:
C50-53 = 22 nF
C54, C55 = 1000 g, 63 V
C56, C57 = 680 nE, 100 V
C58 = 22 µF, 25 V
Semiconductors:
D35-39 =1N4002
D40 = LED, green
Miscellaneous:
Tri =mains transformer, 2x9 V, 3VA for
PCB mounting
F1= fuse, 50 mA, delayed action, with
PCB-mount holder
3x six-way PCB terminal block FI
PCB 880092-4 (see Readers' services)
MAIN POWER SUPPLY: —

r
B1 = B100C35000
Tr2 =torroidal mains transformer, 2x22 V,
5A
C31, C32 = 2x22,000 µF, 40 V
F2 = fuse, 2A, delayed action
SI= double-pole mains switch
Mains input socket with integral
fuseholder
Heat sink: thermal resistance ≤0.4 K/W
Enclosure
SWITCH-ON DELAY SECTION

Resistors:
RI = 220 S2
R2 = 1MS), ≥350 V
R3, R4= 22 1/, 10 W (4x12 0, 5W
Capacitors:
Cl = 1000 g, 40 V
C2 = 330 nF, 630 V
Semiconductors:
D1-4 = IN4007
D5 = zener, 24 V, 1.4 W
Miscellaneous:
Rel =relay for PCB mounting, 24 V d.c..
20 inA, contact rating ≥5 A
Fig. 7. Printed-circuit board for the ancillary power supply.

WorldRadioHistory
CLASS AAMPLIFIER -PART 2 43
Bend the terminals of the output transis- eration in high temperatures. The 'earth' side of the audio input con-
tors so that they lie on the relevant solder pads The bottom panel also needs some holes nector must be connected to the metal case.
over alength of afew millimetres, whereupon for access to presets P1. If an insulated connector is used, fit asolder
all transistors can be soldered in place. In the prototype, the two mains trans- tag to its 'earth' side and solder this to the
Next, fit the voltage amplifier on to the cur- formers were placed one above the other in metal case. These are the only earth points that
rent amplifier board on 30 mm (1 3/16 in) the centre of the case. Fit each of the boards should be connected to the metal case. Note
spacers, and then the protection board on to of the ancillary power supplies on two L- that the loudspeaker return line is not con-
the voltage amplifier board, again on 30 mm shaped pieces of aluminium, in such away nected, as usual, to the central earthing point
(1 3 /16 in) spacers. The length of the spacers, that the 6-way terminal blocks are accessible (between C31 and C32), but to point C on the
by the way, is dictated largely by the dimen- from above. Screw the bridge rectifier next current-amplifier board. This arrangement
sions of the components. to the transformers to the bottom panel with ensures the least possible potential differ-
Interconnect the 10-way connectors on behind it the electrolytic capacitors—see ence via the earth line between the input sig-
the protection board and current-amplifier Fig. 12. Keep areasonable gap between the nal and the feedback signal at the gate of T2
board by alength of suitably terminated 10- rectifier and the capacitors, because the rec- on the one hand, and the loudspeaker signal
core flatcable. Interlink points A, B, C and tifier gets pretty hot. on the other, so that distortion is kept well
FB on the current amplifier and voltage am- Figure 12 gives the wiring diagram of a below that in atraditionally wired amplifier.
plifier boards by short lengths of enamelled mono amplifier: everything shown must be It was arrived at after extensive measurements
copper wire. doubled for astereo amplifier, except the with anumber of earthing configurations.
Provide agood number of ventilation holes mains entry, on/off switch and switch-on delay
in the top and bottom panels of the enclos- circuit.
Testing and setting up
ure: the heat sinks get pretty hot and part of The switch-on delay circuit prevents the
that heat is radiated into the case. Note that fuses blowing when the amplifier is switched After the wiring of the power supplies has
the ageing of most electrolytic capacitors (in on (surge currents!). It consists of only afew been completed, it is wise to check it care-
the power supply) is accelerated at very high components, so that it can easily be accom- fully before the amplifiers are connected to
temperatures. It pays, therefore, to use elec- modated on asmall piece of vero (proto- the power lines. Switch on the mains and
trolytic capacitors that are designed for op- typing) board. measure the voltages across the buffer ca-
Fig. 8. This photo shows how the output transistors should be Fig. 9. Harmonic distortion over frequency range 20 Hz to 20 kHz
mounted; their terminals are bent into an 'Z' shape. at an output power of 25 W.
Power at THD+noise r0.1°. and 0.01'.

100.00
(w) Ap
90.000
80.000
70 000
00.000
50.000
40.000 —,..
‘...,
•
30.000 .......... ........
20.000
10.000
0.0
20 100 1k (Hz) 10k 20k
Fig. 10. Harmonic distortion as afunction of output power into Fig. 11. Maximum output power into 8 Q with harmonic distar-
8L≥ at afrequency of 1kHz. tion at 0.1% (solid line) and 0.01% (dashed line).
WorldRadioHistory
44 DIO & 111-11
Fig. 12. Wiring diagram for a mono amplifier.

WorldRadioHistory
Ei.EKToR EtEcTRoNics LS DECENIBER 1991
CLASS A POWER AMPLIFIER -PART 2 45
pacitors, which should be ±30 V, and those on the mains. Next, with P2 and P3 respect- ter resistors is 138 mV. It is advisable to let
at the terminal blocks, marked ±70 V, on the ively, set the supplies to the voltage ampli- the amplifier operate in that state for about
ancillary supply boards, which should be fier to +38.5 V and —35 V. With amultimeter, an hour and then to measure the voltage
±44 V. If the last voltages are clearly lower measure the direct voltage at the output of the across the emitter resistors again: readjust
than that value, the windings of the main trans- amplifier and set it to zero with P1.Adjust P4 if required.
former and of the ancillary transformer are the quiescent currents by varying P4 until Committed Class A enthusiasts can adjust
not in series. That is remedied by interchanging the voltage across the emitter resistors of the the quiescent current to 1.8 A, correspond-
the connections to the terminals marked output transistors is 10 mV. When that is ing to 50 W into 8S2 in Class A. However, much
40 V—% done, and the d.c. setting at the output re- larger heat sinks (lower Rth) or forced cooling
When all these levels are in order, run mains virtually zero, the resistors in the are then required. In the near future, we in-
supply lines to the three boards, suitable supply lines to the current-amplifier boards tend to publish an indicator circuit that shows
lengths of screened cable to the audio inputs can be removed after the mains has been when the —3 dB drive and the clipping point
and heavy-duty wires to the loudspeaker switched off. Switch the mains on again, and have been reached during music reproduction.
terminals. For safety's sake, connect a10 Ix measure the offset at the output afresh: re- In that way, it will be possible to check whether
5W resistor in each of the supply lines to the adjust Pi if necessary. Then, the quiescent cur- the amplifier operates in Class A or in Class
current-amplifier boards. rent can be increased until the average di- B.
Set P4 to maximum resistance and switch rect voltage across each of the four 0.22 SI emit-
VARIABLE TIME SWITCH

by C. Mieslinger
the second press on S1,the lamp goes out

T
HE SWITCH described has two time ranges on.
that are selected with apush-button. In At the same time, the QA output switches briefly. This is effected by IC 2d ,
which is given
the prototype, the ranges were 5minutes on transistor T1,so that Rg is short-circuited. apulse by differentiating network R9_C 5when
and 20 minutes, but these can be altered eas- Capacitor C4 is then discharged via R3. After QB of IC 3 goes high.
ily. Moreover, pressing the switch three times the potential across C4 has dropped to the When S1 is pressed three times in succes-
in succession switches off the load (here, a lower trigger level of IC 2b, which takes about sion, both QA and QB of IC 3 go high, which
lamp). 5minutes, IC 3 is reset and the relay switches results in the output of IC 2bbecoming 0and
When Si is pressed, IC 3 is enabled via D1 off the lamp. C4 discharging rapidly. The lamp is then
and NAND gate IC 2b; at the same time, ca- When Si is pressed twice in succession, the switched off instantly.
pacitors C3 and C4 are charged. When the counter gets two clock pulses and its QB out- Rotary switch 52 enables switching the lamp
switch is released, IC 3gets aclock pulse from put goes high. Transistor T1then remains off on or off permanently. When this switch is
IC 2a via R2, so that its QA output goes high. and C4 discharges via R3+R4, which takes about in its centre position, the relay is controlled
This results in the relay being energized by 20 minutes. As an indication that the longer by the timing circuit.
T2, so that its contact closes and the lamp comes time has been selected, immediately after

46
AUTO POWER-ON/OFF FOR

BICYCLE SPEEDOMETER
,
Pull-up resistor Ri ensures that the input

to gate ICla is low most of the time (the
chances of the bike being left in aposition
where the reed switch and magnet coincide
are much smaller than them being separate,
and so allow the circuit to turn off, e.g., when
you leave the bike for ashort while). When
the bike is ridden, the reed switch is closed
by apassing magnet, when the input of ICia
is taken low, and the output of the gate goes
high. The resultant pulse train charges capa-
citor Ci via diode Di. Resistor R2 determines
the 'on' time, and the value shown provides
a30-second delay. The voltage across CIis
applied to the input of gate ICib, which,
along with ICic and feedback resistor R3,
forms apulse shaper that provides awell-
defined high or low output used to control
the voltage regulator via one further inver-
ter, ICid. The regulator control voltage is low
Fig. 1. Circuit diagram of the auto power-on/off extension. for 'on' and high for 'off'. The two remaining
inverters are connected in parallel, and also
take the reed contact signal. Their outputs
by R.G. Evans was an off-road bike), which meant that each are, therefore, high when a magnet passes
LED would represent 1mph — easy to read, the reed switch, just what the rev counter
and novel in its appearance. needs for correct operation.
W hen a bicycle speedometer must be

rugged, accurate and, above all, novel Automatic on/off control Battery considerations and connection
The stand-by current of the prototype was a
and alittle unusual, the 'high-tech' compu- Building the circuit to the original Elektor
terized LCD units found in the shops are not Electronics article was easy. However, a mere 0.8 mA, which goes mainly on account
really what you are looking for. The author problem arose with the voltage regulator of the regulator. Since the circuit was being
found acircuit published in this magazine specified, an 48L10 low-drop 10-V stabilizer powered from a12-V 800-mAH lead-acid gel
far more attractive, and set out to design an IC. This proved difficult to obtain, so an al- battery, this would provide at least aweek
automatic on/off control for it. ternative was sought, and located in the RS between recharges. Incidentally, recharging
Digital revolution counters (or 'speedos') (ElectroMail) catalogue. The LM2931CT is accomplished by using two contacts on the
are all very well, but although satisfactory in from National Semiconductor has the facility base of the cycle lamp holder, so that the bat-
practical use, are unlikely to create much in- to adjust the output voltage, and offers an tery need not be removed for recharging. A
terest from other cycling enthusiasts. The on/off function coupled with low standby suitable battery charger may be found in
same applies to aconventional moving-coil current drain. The idea was born to imple- Ref. 2.
meter display, which is no alternative be- ment an automatic on/off control for the bi- The current consumption of the active
cause it requires scale lighting, and its wave- cycle speedo. It had already been decided to circuit is about 30 mA on average, giving at
ring needle is difficult to read in the first (a) make the device quickly removable to least 24 hours use in a week. This was
place. So, what is needed is acombination of prevent theft, and (b) to make it rechargeable deemed more than sufficient (after all, who
a LED-based readout and yet some novel to reduce running costs, and (c) to cut down has the time to cycle more than three hours a
feature such as aline of lights. Fortunately, on the fiddling about when installing the de- day).
such acircuit was found in Ref. 1: aLED rev- vice. Connections to the reed switch (a nor-
olution counter with the LEDs arranged in a Basically what was needed was a low mally-open type) are made via aminiature
circle, just like aconventional rev counter or current drain monitoring device that would plug and socket combination mounted on
speedo. The circuit is based on Telefurtken's sense the front wheel's movement, and the back of the lamp holder, which, with
U1096B 30-LED bar driver. switch the voltage regulator in the speedo on careful modification, provided a ready-
Some quick calculations on the likely rpm and off. The circuit to accomplish this is made housing for the battery and the circuit
(and therefore speed) of abicycle wheel led shown in Fig. 1. Based on asingle CMOS IC, board. Using such a ready-made housing
to substantially lower input pulse rates than its standby current is under 1µA, while its was felt reasonable in this case, as someone
would be encountered in the original appli- output capability is sufficient to switch the else had already spent time designing an
cation. Referring to the original article made regulator on. Also, there are two inverter anti-slip and anti-jolt bracketry to suit abi-
redimensioning the monostable period gates left, which are used here to provide the cycle environment, thereby solving what
simple, and the use of four trigger pulses per count signal to the rev counter circuit. A could be amajor problem for some construc-
revolution helped iron out low-speed flicker simple high/low input was obtained from a tors. •
whilst retaining areasonable 'reaction time' cheap reed switch mounted on the front fork, References:
to changes in speed (although not many triggered by four passing magnets attached 1. 'LED revolution counter'. 303 Circuits, cir-
people ride abike at 1-2 mph). to the spokes of the front wheel. This signal cuit no. 045.
In the present application, it was required is processed to suit both the rev counter 2. 'Lead-acid battery charger'. 303 Circuits,
to display amaximum speed of 30 mph (it input and the on/off circuit. circuit no. 250.
WorldRadioHistory
47
DISCO RUNNING LIGHTS

by A.B. Tiwana
OP
p
MUSIC and light effects are insepa- counter ICi via asingle-transistor amplifier, phone across it, when it functions entirely con-
rable. The circuits that make the effects Ti. Its (amplified) level must be high enough tact-less. After amplification, the signal is
possible vary from simple to complex. The to overcome the switching threshold of the applied to ICi via Pi, which controls the sen-
circuit presented here is asimple one and is counter, while its frequency determines how sitivity of the circuit.
asort of running light whose rate of change often the counter is clocked. Since audio frequencies are too high for
depends on the frequency and intensity of the The input may be fed with the signal of a making agood visual effect, the signal fre-
sound. preamplifier, but it is also possible, as shown quency is scaled down by ICi when Si con-
The signal is applied to the clock input of in the diagram, to connect an electret micro- nects pin 11 with pin 15. When the switch is
in the other position, pin 2is connected with
pin 15: the counter then divides by 1and the
effect assumes acompletely different char-
acter that no longer resembles arunning
light.
The actual running light is provided by
IC 2,acounter with integral 1-from-10 decoder,
which is clocked by the QO output of ICi. Of
the ten outputs of IC 2,each of which is con-
nected to an LED, there is always one 'high'.
The ten LEDs have acommon bias resistor,
R5, an arrangement that is perfectly feasible,
since only one LED lights at atime (although
it often seems as if more do so).
The circuit may be expanded by adding an
LED at pin 12 (carry out) of ICi. This LED must
have its own bias resistor (560 Q).
The power supply must be able to pro-
vide acurrent of up to 100 mA: at low fre-
quencies the current is appreciably lower.
The colours of the LEDs can be chosen to
individual taste. a
TELEPHONE BUZZER AS SWITCH

by A. Rigby
R ECTIFYING the buzzer signal on atele- rectified by Di—D 4;the rectified voltage is however, that in spite in this, the telephone
phone line results in avoltage that may smoothed by C2 and held at 15 V by zener authorities in some countries may not per-
be used to switch one or more loads, for in- diode D5. The voltage is used to drive the LED mit the use of the present circuit: it is always
stance, alight to show the deaf or hard-of- in optoisolator ICi via R3. The optoisolator best to seek the advice of your local tele-
hearing that the telephone is ringing. provides safe isolation between the telephone phone manager.
In the present circuit, the buzzer signal is line and the present circuit and its load. Note As soon as acall signal appears on the
telephone line, the LED in the optoisolator en-
sures that the integral transistor is switched
on. This in turn switches on T1,whereupon
relay Rei is energized.
Capacitor C3 is charged as long as the
transistor in the optoisolator conducts, but
discharges via R4-R 5-T 1 when the call signal
fails: this prevents T1being switched off dur-
ing the intervals between the various pulses
of the call signal. When that signal fails, the
relay will be denergized after ashort delay.
The circuit can be supplied by a 12 V
mains adapter. The current it draws depends
on the type of relay used, but should not ex-
ceed 100 mA. Make sure that the relay can
handle the switched voltages and currents.
Ill
WorldRadioHistory
48
ON/OFF DELAY FOR VALVE AMPLIFIERS

by A. Rigby
!THIS circuit has been designed primarily During operation of the amplifier, the in- C3 rises to alevel where IC 3bgets aclock
1 for use with valve amplifiers. When the verting input of ICi and the non-inverting pulse. This results in IC 3a being reset, where-
amplifier is switched on, filament voltage is input of IC 2,both of which circuits are con- upon T2 is switched off, so that relay Re 2 is
supplied first and the anode potential afew nected as comparator, are provided with a deenergized and the high voltage is removed
minutes later. When there has been no input voltage of about 6 V by potential divider from the valves. Transistor T1is provided with
signal for awhile, the anode voltage is switched R1-R 2-R 3-R4. The audio signal from the pream- base current via R11 and D3, so that the clock
off again automatically. plifier or output amplifier (one channel suf- input of IC 3bremains low. This bistable re-
When the mains is switched on, aset pulse fices) is fed to both ICs. The earth of this sig- sets itself almost immediately, however, via
is supplied to bistable (flip-flop) IC 3bvia nal is connected to the potential divider, which R15 -0 5.The interval between clock pulse and
R16—C6. The Q output (pin 13) then goes high means that the supply and earth lines of the reset is so short that Rei remains energized:
and the bistable resets itself via R5-C 15 ,
where- amplifier and the delay circuit must be well heater voltage to the valves is, therefore,
upon relay Rei is energized via T3 and the isolated from one another. When the signal maintained.
valves are provided with heater voltage. After level is about 60 mV or greater, the output There are two keys for user operation: Si
adelay, dependent on time constant R13 -C 4, of either ICIor IC 2 will go high, depending resets IC 3a whereupon the high voltage is reap-
the potential at the clock input of IC 3a reaches on the polarity of the signal. Transistor T1 is plied to the valves; S2, when pressed, causes
alevel that causes the bistable to toggle so that then switched on via R6 or R7, which results aclock pulse to be generated that switches the
its Q output (pin 1) goes high. Relay Re 2 is in C3 discharging. When T1is off, C3 is charged amplifier to standby. 3
then energized and switches the high volt- slowly via R18. When there has been no sig-
age to the valves. nal input for afew minutes, the voltage across
BEDSIDE LIGHT TIMER

by H. Moser
M
ANY young children will insist on keep- to this little domestic problem. Simple to thyristor, Th l.The complementary bistable
ing the bedside light on for acouple of build from ahandful of inexpensive compo- output, Q, goes low and enables timer IC2.
minutes after the storybook has been closed nents, it lets you determine how long the The load, asmall bulb (max. 60W) is switched
and father or mother has gone downstairs. bedside light remains on after you have said on, and remains on until counter IC 2 resets
They are also prone to fall asleep with the light goodnight and actuated the timer. ICi a.
on, which is awaste of energy, and aprob- Pressing switch S1 causes bistable ICib to The counter, aType CD4541, has an on-board
lem for the parent because the light has to be toggle, and produces adebounced clock pulse oscillator that operates at afrequency,f, given
switched off without waking the child. at the input of the second bistable, ICi a,
whose in Hz by
The timer shown here is an elegant solution Q output goes high, triggering alow-power f= 1/2.3 RîcCit,
WorldRadioHistory
BEDSIDE LIGHT TIMER 49
where RTC and CTc are the resistor and ca- D2, is used as an orientation aid for the child.
pacitor connected to pin 1and 2respectively. The LED forms part of the ITW (Digitast)
The resistor connected to the RS input, pin 3, push-button,
has avalue of about 2Rî. It should be noted that the actual supply
The scale factor of the 4541 is set to 65 536 voltage of the circuit may lie between 6V
(2 16 )here by tying its A and Bcontrol pins to and 12 V, depending on the characteristics
the positive supply rail. This means that the of T1. The actual value is of little importance,
OUT pin changes state after 32 768 clock pulses. however, as long as ICi a is capable of sup-
The logic levels defined at pins 5, 10 and 9 plying atrigger current of about 200 µA to
select alogic low level at the OUT pin when the thyristor.
the RESET pin is logic high. Hence, the delay, The circuit is constructed on the printed-
t, in seconds, introduced by the circuit can circuit board shown in Fig. 2, and fitted in a
be calculated from suitable ABS enclosure. In the interest of
safety, make sure the input and output cable
T= 2.3 x32 768 x R5 x C5. are properly insulated and secured with strain
reliefs. The clearance for the keytop in the
The circuit is powered direct by the mains. top panel of the enclosure must be made as
Transistor Tiforms a10-V zener diode. A LED, small as possible to prevent any risk of the
circuit being touched.
1 WARNING. Since the circuit carries danger-
ous voltages at anumber of points, it is es-
-C) 1
0v sential that proper electrical insulation is ap-
01 1N 4007 ci 11 plied. Never work on the circuit when the
mains is connected to it. Make sure that no
021 part of the circuit can be touched when it is
D3
L— — —J BC547A 1 6v being set, adjusted or used.
K2
RI 1N4148
OW5
K1
>e
B1 B380C 1500 560W
PARTS LIST
10V
BRX49
Thlir 3
Resistors:
R2 3
EI13 IC 1a ICRI
1 RI = 180 IcSI, 0.5 W
14 CO) CLK 14 In R2 = 220 lcS1
CLK 3
— 4027 K 4027 K R3, R4 = 470
4 12 R5 = 180W
10V
R6 = 3901(12
6
5
*see text
12
IC2 RTC Capacitors:
4541CTC
13 3 Cl = 22 pF, 16 V
u u
K
RS 4*- 1 4
PH MO CS C2 = 100 nF
9 10
R6 7n
C3, C4 = 1nF
RS
C5 =47 nF
914070-11 Semiconductors:
D1 = 1N4007
D2 = LED, high-efficiency (see SI)
D3 = 1N4148
BI = B380C1500
TI = BC547A
Thl = BRX49
IC1 =4027
IC2 = 4541
Miscellaneous:
Si = digitast push-button switch with
integral LED
Ki, K2 = PCB-mount terminal block,
pin spacing 10 mm
ABS enclosure about 100x50x25 mm
WorldRadioHistory ELF:KTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991

50
9-VOLT NiCd BATTERY CHARGER

by H. Moser
T HE regulated power supply and four rises). The charging voltage, resulting from charged).
identical current sources shown in the the current through the battery or batteries LEDs in the emitter circuits of the transis-
diagram enable the simultaneous charging of can rise to the level set with P1.When that level tors give avisual indication of the on and off
four 9-volt NiCd batteries. The potential at is reached, the relevant circuit is switched switching of the charging current. When the
the wiper of P1 determines to what voltage off, and the e.m.f. of the battery drops al- battery is nearly flat, the LED will be on con-
the batteries will be charged: an unusual, most instantly. This might cause the charg- tinuously; when it is about fully charged,
but effective method. The voltage at the wiper ing current to be switched on again, result- the charging current will be interrupted more
is also applied to the non-inverting inputs of ing in acharging voltage rising to the level and more frequently, so that the LED begins
four comparators, IC 2a -IC 2d, via 100 1(0 reset with P1.To prevent this oscillatory ac- to flicker. The more nearly the battery is charged,
sistors. When the battery voltage is too low, tion, the capacitor across the opamps enables the faster the LED will flicker; when the rate
the relevant comparator toggles, which re- the battery to stabilize. If, after ashort delay, is about 1 Hz, the battery is fully charged.
sults in the associated transistor being switched the battery voltage proves to be too low, the The circuit requires an alternating volt-
on, whereupon the battery is charged. The rate current is switched on again. The capacitor age of 15-18 V; it draws acurrent of about
at which the comparators can toggle is slowed then ensures that the current will flow for a 150 mA. 3
down by acapacitor shunting the opamps while, irrespective of the battery e.m.f. (after
(when abattery is being charged, its e.m.f. all, the battery was found not to be fully
VIDEO CAMERA TIMER

by C. Hag!
S
COME video cameras have asocket for a that it is not always easy to conn ect an i
nter - Bl au pun kt 8010 camcorder i
snot sw i
tc hedon
remote control unit. It appears, however, val-control to this socket. For instance, the or off in the traditional manner, but with a

VIDEO CAMERA TIMER BM
1
0C)
g
RO 13 9V
P1
1M Ip/16V
e
13 12
96 R
'.4'
CS
11
100n R7
9 o 213 à4
t
.83
à
9 o
IC1b
2 . L2
1N4148
, D1
ID 1170n
ICia
a
IC2a
1N4148
100n
ICI = TLC556
Ti
o
1r
IC2 = 4011 6 5 D
9V BS170
o
RI 92 At the same time that ICi a generates the
ICI IC2
start pulse, ICib is triggered to commence mea-
Y 4' G
914089-11a
eC)
suring the time interval between the start
and stop pulses. This interval can be preset
with Pi. During the interval, signal H is kept
low and this disables switch Si. Once the
40-60 ms long pulse. One pulse switches the sures that 1C 2a gets only ashort pulse (signa mono time of ICib has elapsed, signal H goes
camera on, the next one switches it off. Manual B), even if Si remains closed for some time. high via IC 2d, so that ICi a is triggered anew
operation with aswitch is virtually impossi- Assuming that the circuit was quiescent be- and sends astop pulse to the camera. The
ble to achieve. However, the timer described fore Si was closed, pin 1of IC 2a is high, so circuit then returns to the quiescent state, until
here offers asolution. that the output of the IC (signal C) goes low Si is closed afresh.
The timer generates the pulses automati- as aresult of signal B. As drawn, the circuit is particularly suit-
cally; the interval between two pulses can The output signal of IC 2a triggers monos- able for adding titles to the filmed material.
be set between about 1sand 10 s. It operates table ICi avia AND gate D2-D3-R3, whereupon One touch of Si and the title in front of the
from a9V (PP3 or 6F22) battery: the current the output of ICi a(signal E) switches on tran- camera lens is recorded within afew sec-
drain is only 330 µA. sistor Ti. This transistor serves as the stop/start onds.
When switch S1 is closed (signal A—see switch of the camcorder; its drain and source Switch Si may be replaced by an interval
Fig. 2), differentiating network R2-C 1 en- are connected to the camera. timer for making speeded-up recordings. a
SWITCHING CLOCK FROM

PARKING TIMER
by W. Zeiller
Q
VERCHARGING of batteries is prevented sive parking timer and asimple switching cir- D2 serves as on/off indicator and as voltage
by the timely switching off of the charger. cuit as shown in the diagram. stabilizer for the timer. The voltage across
A timer that can be set to within aminute The button cell is removed from the timer the buzzer is used as the output signal. Check
can be built fairly easily from an inexpen- and the connections remade as shown. Diode that the buzzer in the timer you are using is
connected as suggested here.
When the buzzer comes into action, its out-
put is rectified by D2 and then used to charge
Ci. When the capacitor is charged to acer-
tain level, the potential across it is sufficient
to switch on T1,whereupon relay Rei is en-
ergized and its contacts change over. One of
these holds Ti in conduction; the other can
be used to make or break contact. The load
can also be switched manually with Si.
The connecting wires between the timer
and the rest of the circuit pass via asmall
hole drilled in the back of the timer and a
hole in the case that houses the other com-
ponents. When that is done, the timer is glued
to the front of the case so that its operating
controls remain within easy reach. U

SCIENCE 8c TECHNOLOGY
A simple and adaptable logic
a simplest logic of all
by M. Soper, MA
A PROBLEM with standard logic as im- preferred: the first is that no easy logic could
plemented in the 7400 series of integrated be simpler, and the second is the fact that a
circuits is that, since the approach is func- relation is not hierarchical and can thus op-
tional, there is anatural tendency to orga- erate on converging data streams to create
nize any system into levels—a kind of nested new true and false statements without any
hierarchical structure results. But suppose the hierarchical structure being necessary. One
requirement is more unilevel and free-wheel- can imagine triples of related strings, each
ing—suppose true statements are chasing each one of which represents a'proposition', mov-
other round in aloop in asystem intended to ing through adata network like 'trains with
have ause as associative memory in arti- three carriages' and interacting with other
ficial intelligence applications, some ex- trains at junctions to produce more trains of
pressed positively: 'all ships are intended 910112-12 statements on the data lines. Each junction
for use in water' and some negatively: 'no can become asource of proliferation and
normally conducting useful circuits are short segments on the 'lines', when triples of propo-
circuits', then any hierarchical approach to The proof is thus: sitions are formed in this way, can 'float
analysing what can follow from statements Let a,b be odd: then his even and, since bis about' on the communication lines of adis-
like these will confound the flexibility of odd, from ((e,b,g)) we have eand gis even; tributed processing system preceded by aspe-
the system by deciding the functional pat- then ((h,d,e)) implies d is odd so that from cial symbol or token (like three carriage
tern of logical analysis at the outset. The ((fg,d)), fand gare even and, since fand g trains running freely through anumber ofjunc-
logic suggested in this article, being relational. are even, from ((f,g,c)), cis odd. tions). Thus, for an artificial intelligence
not functional, gets round this. system, each triple can be compared at each
Let a be even and bodd, then as before, e junction according to interference rules like
Building the new system and gare even, but in this case his odd since these:
ais NOTh. Since his odd, from ((h,d,e)), d
The system used here is very simple and eare even now since d,g are even, fis ((A,D,E)), ((A,B,C)), ((B,C,D)) implies
odd so that ((f,g,c)) implies cis even. ((B,C,r)) and E false;
EVEN is true ODD is false
Let abe odd and bbe even, then his even: ((A,D,1)),((B,D,X)), NOT((A,D,B)) implies
and the relation is, for three integers a,b,c: ((h,d,e)), ((e,b,g)) imply eis even and d,g ((A,F,T));
odd; OR eis odd and d,g are even in either
a+b+c is odd abc is even. case because ((gf,d)), fis odd. Moreover f ((B,C,E)), ((A, B,C)), ((C,D,E)), ((A, D, F))
is odd and ((fg,c)) implies cis even. implies ((B,E,F));
Here, addition and multiplication are car-
ried out as usual. Let abe even and bbe even, then his odd ((A, B, C)), ((C, D, E)),((A,D, F)), NOT((B,C, E))
To show that this simplest logic is what and from ((h,d,e)), d and eare even; from implies ((17,E,F))
is claimed, we must show that all logic can ((e,b,g)) and e,b even, we have godd, then
be done by this relation. Consider the nota- from ((fg,c)), cis even. ((A, B, C)), ((B,C,D)), ((B, C, E)) implies
tion ((a,b,c)) used to indicate that numbers NOT((A, D, E))
a,b,c obey this rule: a+b+c is odd and abc is From all this we now have the table
even. We must show that this relation is ad-
Liberation from standard
equate for all logic and this can be done if a
the existence of the functions (relations) binary functional logic
NOT and OR (first of all NOT) must be odd odd odd The most useful rules for generating afew
shown to exist: odd even even of the many possible relations are:
even odd even
• ((a,b,2)) is equivalent to a=NOT b, since even even even ((A, D,7)), ((B, D, X)) iff A vB is true, where
one of a,b is even and the other is odd. In X has any possible value, and
fact, the relation is exactly two of a,b,c
are even numbers. which is the correct pattern for the logic ((A, B,C)), ((B, C, D)) iff A=D.
function OR with even meaning true, and odd,
• to show we can make OR: consider ((a,h,2)), false. Note that ((A, B,T)) iff A=re, and
((h,d,e)),((e,b,g)),((gf,d)), (f,g,c))—these
entail that aOR b=cis TRUE. Why should this logic be ((A, B,X)) implies A or B true.
preferred?
Here is adiagram of this logic circuit, where These relations, therefore, can generate
circles denote the relation: There are two reasons for this logic to be all standard logic. But we need, perhaps, to

A SIMPLE AND ADAPTABLE LOGIC El
generate from any propositions ones that are teresting logic is asix-logic, where the con- pellers and merely insist that output equals
true and false. Here is one such method: secutive lines coming out have this cyclic pat- input. Logically (without asense of evolu-
tern of true and false values: (TTFTFF), tion), these are simple equalities.
((A,B,C)),((B,C,D)),((A.D,E)) implies Eis and a 10-logic, where the consecutive lines Is there any reason for relational logic to
false, and are (TTTFFFTFTF) in acyclic pattern. In dominate? The systems, being equivalent, can
the six-logic, for readers with the patience coexist, but note that relational logic is very
((A,B,C)), ((B,C,I))), ((A,D, E.)), ((U, VE)) to work this out, (CDABM1s1)(MNFCGH) is highly suited to the continuous ordering and
implies U, Vtrue. equivalent to C=A NAND B and in the 10- relation of isolated facts, whereas amore func-
logic, the pattern (TA. B..C..) forms C=A NOR B. tional approach cannot do this naturally.
Thus, the hierarchical structure caused by These ten lines form akind of device (or in- For example, the system associating propo-
functional approaches is not necessary. sect) with ten radially disposed legs. They are sitions with numbers can link each proposi-
based on what is know as the Theory of tion with amultiple of three, and add 0or I.
Quadratic Residues. depending on truth or falseness; adding 2could
Continuity with the old be used, when the truth of astatement has
system not yet been decided, if required.
Transformation model of the
Stripped down to bare essentials, the new
system of logic expressed as atable looks relation
Adaptation
like this For some purposes, atransformational model
is preferable. When this is the case, the fol- The strange feature of this logic system is
a lowing model can be used—thus that a cubic' network is used. For exam-
ple: define [xyzI by ((x,s,t)),((y.t,u)),((z.s.0).
F F * b ((t,s,u)) for some .s,t,u; then this network:
F T T ((a,c,n)),((a,c,1)),((b,q,n)),((n.c.p)),[qc1p)
T F T performs d=a iff bwhen a,b are inputs and
T T F in this case cis NOT a. Using c,d, as in-
a puts results in biff cXORd.
This is astrange feature to adapt to—in-
which is the function table for exclusive OR stead of rank upon rank of ordered func-
(XOR) with one line deleted. This can be tional logic, we have what appears as agraph
implemented by the following logic circuit: with two sorts of vertice or node and arank
of buffers (one way round or another). This
utilization of flexibility of options is diffi-
where all the numbers are modulo 2—that cult for people, but very easy for computers,
is, throwing out 2s and taking only the re- which can quickly print out all available
mainders, 0or I. uses of anet, whethere they can be used im-
Note the fact that a,b,c here are not allowed mediately or not.
all to be zero; we could remove this condi- Here, then, is alogic based merely on
tion by adding one more row and column to arithmetic.
the three matrices, but instead we merely note
abc <> 0. One interesting fact is that this
matrix can be square-rooted; the square root
910112.11
is
This is cumbersome, but it shows that the sim-

plest logic we are dealing with here can ac-
tually be built. In practical terms, the reason The original matrix could generate the
for using relational logic, and for perhaps Fibonacci series from (1,1)T and so can this
building such units as available ICs, is the fact one, but inverted. This square-root property
that one relational logic circuit can easily per- suggests that our à of transformations can
form more than one task, because lines are be turned into aY of transformations and,
not specifically inputs and outputs. indeed, this is possible—let all transforma-
All lines can be connected as outputs— tions operate from the same vector at the
impossible or paradoxical networks simply middle (a,b,c)T. The three matrices need We Enjoy Hearing From You.
Elektor Electronics USA is a place for
result in unstable or partially competing out- three rows and three columns since they are
readers to meet and discuss ideas, proj-
put circuits, so that the units built for this distinct in the three directions. These
ects, and challenges. When you write,
purpose should be output protected. In prac- please include aself-addressed envelope
[ _ -r _
tice, lines to have ause as inputs should be 0 1 0 0 01 1 0 0 with stamp attached with a clip if you
fed by high impedance buffers (non-invert- expect areply. If the author lives outside
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 of the US, please include two Interna-
ing) or, more simply, fed by some impedance.
1 0 0_01 0 0 0 1_ tional Postal Reply coupons (available at
Thus, all logic functions, and naturally also
your post office) instead of stamps on
oscillators (three-phase) and other derived your envelope. Because of space limi-
circuits, can be implemented with the use of can do this, each operating in turn. tations, we do reserve the right to edit
buffers and our symmetric logic element. all letters. Although we read and note all
Hence, continuity with the old system is es- letters, only those of general interest are
Buffer stages selected for publication. When respond-
tablished.
The logic outlined above does require in the ing to an article, please cite the name of
the magazine, article, letter, department,
practical implementation the use of buffer
Some higher versions of the and the page number. Address all cor-
stages, but these are used anyway. From the respondence to the Letters Depart-
logic point of view of logic rather than electron- ment, Elektor Electronics USA, Box 576,
There are infinitely many relational logics, ics, these are not easily modelled in asys- Peterborough, NH 03458.
of which ours is the simplest. The next in- tem without time. They can be called corn-

54
ECONOMY POWER SUPPLY

One instrument no
electronics hobbyist can
do without is a regulated
\\.\\ \\\\ \\\\ \\NN \\NN N N
power supply. This month
we present ano-frills
design that should be
affordable for many.
by L. Lemon
FRONT COVER
PROJECT)
U
NDOUBTEDLY the most popular class
of regulated, variable power supplies is
that with avoltage rage of up to 30 V or so,
and an output current of 2to 3ampères. The power supply is invested in the power trans- Basic operation
present supply belongs in this ever popular former and the smoothing capacitors—little
class. The fact that we have baptized it 'econ- to be done about that! However, while this The operation of the power supply is illus-
omy power supply' does not mean that it is cost consideration holds true for the present trated in Fig. 1. What is shown is aclassic
avery basic design with marginal specifica- supply, it was our aim to achieve the best series-regulated power supply. The heart of
tions. Most of you will know that the greater possible specifications from inexpensive the circuit is formed by apositive voltage
part of the money spent on a regulated components. regulator based on IC3a, T4, Ts and T6. This is
a classic voltage regulator. The negative
input of the opamp is supplied with a
sample of the output voltage via avoltage
divider. The opamp compares the voltage at
the negative input with that at the positive
input, which is held at avoltage adjustable
with P6. The opamp acts as an error itimpli-
fier, that is, it will attempt to counter i/oltage
differences between its inputs by driving the
power transistors via 14. In this way, it en-
sures astable output voltage at all load cur-
rents below the maximum.
The base-emitter junction of T4 is shunted
by the phototransistor of an optocoupler. As
soon as the current limit is actuated, the
phototransistor starts to conduct, withdraw-
ing so much base current from T4 as is
necessary to keep Is and 16 from supplying
the maximum permissible output current.
The current limit circuit measures the
output current with the aid of resistors R, in-
serted in the two supply rails. In the positive
half of the supply, 13 monitors the voltage
across R, in the positive rail. When this volt-
age is high enough for 13 to conduct, the
'current limit' LED, D4, lights, just as the
LED in the optocoupler. The latter causes the
associated phototransistor to conduct, and
the output current to be limited.
The actuation level of the current limit is
made adjustable by acurrent source based
on Ti and T2. Transistor Ti supplies acurrent
set by potentiometer P2 to the current limit
circuit in the positive half of the supply. 12
supplies the same current to the negative
Fig. 1. Block schematic diagram of the power supply. Conventional? Well, not quite half. This provides the current monitoring

Fig. 2. Circuit diagram of the economy power supply, aconventional symmetrical design based on series regulators and error amplifiers.
transistors, T3 and T4, with a bias, which

gives the current limit circuit agreater sensi-
tivity, that is, it can be actuated by relatively
small currents.
The operation of the current limit circuit
in the negative supply is identical to that in
the positive supply. Potentiometer Pi acts as
acommon control for both current limiters.
Transistor T7 monitors the negative output
current, and controls the voltage regulator
accordingly via an optocoupler. The voltage
regulator is basically the same as in the posi-
tive supply. Note, however, that the driver
transistor, Ts, and the optocoupler are con-
nected to +12 V instead of to ground. This is
necessary because the negative voltage regu-
lator is powered by apositive supply volt-
age. This unusual arrangement obviates
positive and negative auxiliary supply volt-
ages, but does raise the problem of regulat-
ing the output voltage between 0 V and
about —28 V with the aid of an opamp that
works with input voltages between 0V and
+12 V. At the output of the opamp, this is
solved by operating the driver with respect
to +12 V. The opamp input voltages are held Fig. 3. Initial test on the assembled board.

56
POWER SUPPLIES
at virtually nought volts. The positive input

COMPONENTS LIST
(the reference of the regulator) is simply tied
to ground. This means that the regulator
Resistors: 2 BD140 T3;T8
must keep the negative input at 0V via the
1 27k.12 R1 2 BD139 T4;T7
feedback of the negative output voltage.
3 11(12 R2;R8;R12 2 TIP2955 T5;T6
Since the feedback is realized with two ident-
3 41(.127 R25;R26;R28 2 TIP3055 T9;T1 0
ical resistors Rconnected between the posi-
2 6812 1W R4;R19 1 7812 IC1
tive and the negative output, the regulator
2 330S2 1W R5;R18 2 CNY17-2 IC2;1C4
will adjust itself such that the positive and
2 4712 1W R6;R17 1 TLC272 IC3
negative output voltages are equal, and ad-
5 2kS12 R3;R7;R15;R313;
justable with asingle control, P6. R31 Miscellaneous:
4 11<i28 R9;R13;R22;R24 2 3-way PCB-mount terminal K1 ;K2
Circuit description 4 0.4712 5W R10;R14;R23;R27 block; pitch 5mm
2 31«29 R11;R16 1 10-way male box header K3
The circuit diagram of the power supply, 1 ion/
- R20 1 Mains appliance socket K4;F1
Fig. 2, is anot more than a'dressed up' ver- 1 21(127 R21 with integral fuseholder;
sion of the block diagram discussed above. 2 2701(11 R29;R32 fuse: 1.25A slow (240/220 V
The mains voltage is connected to the mains) or 1.25 A slow (110/117 V
2 1001(.2 preset H P1;P5
supply via amains entrance socket, K4 (note mains)
2 101(12 preset H P3;P4
that this has an integral fuseholder), and 1 10-way female IDC header K5
1 lin. potentiometer P6
plus flatcable
from there goes to the on/off switch, Sz, and
1 2-pole, 4-contact rotary Si
the primary of the mains transformer, Tri. Capacitors:
switch
The secondary voltages (2x25 V) are rectified 2 4700µF 40V C1;C2
1 2-pole mains on/off switch S2
by abridge rectifier, 131, and smoothed by 2 10µF 63V radial C3;C4 with indicator lamp
reservoir capacitors Ci and Cz. This results 2 470pF C5;C10 1 100-pA moving-coil meter Ml,
in an unregulated voltage of about ±35 V. 1 2nF2 C6 or digital meter module
The unregulated voltage is reduced by 2 220µF 63V radial C7;C11 1 Printed-circud board 910111
about 10V by zener diode Di. This is done to 2 1nF C8;C9 1 Front-panel foil 910111-F
keep the input voltage of regulator ICi (a 1 Toroidal mains transformer Tri
7812) within safe limits. The regulator out- Semiconductors: 2)(25V @ 3.2A ,e.g., 510116 (220V) or
put voltage, 12 V, is used to power the auxi- 1 10V 1W zener diode D1 530116 (240V) from ILP (Jaytee
liary supply. 2 1N4148 D2;D3 Electronic Services)
In the current limit circuit, Pz has two 2 LED 3mm red D4;D6 1 Heat sink 0.6K/W, e.g., Fischer SK90;
diodes connected in series. This is done to 2 BAT85 D5;D7 h=100mm
1 38005000/3300 B1 4 insulating set for T5, 16, T9 and T10
prevent a'dead range' on Pz, when the thre-
shold voltage of the base-emitter junction ot (80V ply, 5A peak bridge rectifier) 1 Metal case 100>,300x180mm
BC547B Ti (Telet LC970; supplier: C-I Electronics)
Ti and Tz has to be overcome.
The power stages of the supply consist ot BC557B T2
two parallel connected transistors, Ts-T6 and

T9-Tto. Strictly speaking, one transistor
would have sufficed in each power stage, sistor affords peace of mind both in regard of sistors have two tasks: first, they distribute
since the second breakdown point is just not safe maximum ratings and the ability of the the current between the transistors; and sec-
reached when the dissipation is maximum heatsink to maintain areasonably low tem- ond, they function as current sensors R,
(maximum output current at minimum out- perature. (refer back to Fig. 1). Since the current limi-
put voltage). However, the additional tran- The emitter resistors with the power tran- ting circuit is to monitor the total current
through both power transistors, the emitters
are connected to the base of T3 and T7 respec-
tively via summing resistors.
Diodes DSand En do not appear in the
block diagram. Their function is to protect
the negative opamp inputs against negative
voltages that could cause destruction, or
switching to undefined states. The diodes
limit the negative input voltage to about
0.6 V, avalue that is safely withstood by al-
most any modern IC. Normally, the opamp
inputs will not go negative. This may hap-
pen briefly, however, when the supply is
switched on, or when it acts on sudden,
large, load variations. In these cases, the dif-
ference between the output voltage can give
rise to a negative voltage at the negative
input of the opamps. Diodes D5 and D7
clamp these negative voltages to safe levels.
To keep the cost of the instrument low, a
single meter is used for the voltage and cur-
rent read-out. The meter ranges are created
by switch Si, whose contacts are connected
to several points in the circuit. Your budget
allowing you are, of course, free to fit as
many meters as you like, with achoice be-
Fig. 4. Preparing the enclosure and the front panel before the PCB is fitted. tween analogue and digital.

comt\I\ pm\ FR st 1,
11
o g o
910111
TI 13
0
r8; SI 2 O iz,
f
es' z e 0t
ie R2_ 10
T1
1
r000
IC3 P6
0000
0{ 525 10 2
.
01 526 10 T,
c
78
C10 olio e 6
D3
'
000
1
IC 4 I
000
T7 r
ói
K3
10 9
4
; U 00
00
K1 00
o e7 00
00 4
000 I
oeio !/ 2 1
Db
— o —
rere-•_,
c
Eemtcm—ree-we''
f
cœ6cc
i7)
/0 PP2'
Fig. 5. Single-sided printed circuit board for the economy power supply.
WorldRadioHistory ELEKTOR ELECISONICS (SA DECI.:\113Elt 1991

58 POW ER SUPPLIES
TESTING A POWER SUPPLY THE DYNAMIC WAY

The most important feature of a regulated ations. Because a rectangular control signal peaks (approx. 100 µs), enables us to de-
power supply is its ability to keep the output is used, we can find a point where the volt- duce that the regulator functions properly
voltage constant in spite of load variations. age regulator loses track of the load vari- up to about 10 kHz (above 10 kHz, the re-
Unfortunately, this can never be done per- ations. sponse may be improved by adding buffer
fectly. The main stumbling blocks we en- When the load is switched on, the voltage capacitors).
counter in practice are the internal will first drop considerably, and not rise to Apart from the peaks, the scope plot also
resistance of the supply, and the speed of the previously set level until the voltage shows a small variation of the output volt-
the voltage regulator. To establish the effect regulator provides the necessary drive to age when the load is stable. This change is
of these parameters, the supply may be sub- the power transistors. Similarly, when the caused by the internal resistance of the
jected to the fairly gruesome test described load is switched off, the voltage regulator power supply. Here, the variation is about
here.
maintains the drive for the transistors a little 15 mV. Since this voltage drop is caused by
A 16-St load is switched on an off by a rec- too long, so that the output voltage rises a current of 1A, the internal resistance of
tangular control signai via a power transis- considerably. The length of the voltage the supply is 15 mil
tor. The power supply is set to an output
voltage of 16 V, so that the output curtent is
switched between 0 A and 1A. The test set-
up is shown in the circuit diagram. The oscil- 3-Jul-91
15:19:53
LeCroy
loscope plot shows the response of the
supply to these sudden, heavy, load vari-
Panel
STATUS
Memory
Save %warmer.
PANEL
Recall
1111 1+14 1111 I II
Auxiliary
Setups
z
Chan 1
X-Y mode
.5 ms 50 mV
Persistence Chan 2
mode .5 ms 10 V
Return CH1 30 mV CC
Construction and adjustment

The construction is best carried out on the
single-sided printed-circuit board shown in
Fig. 5. There is no fixed order in which the
components are mounted on to the board, as
long as you start with the eight wire links.
Keep the power transistors, Ts-T6, and T9-
Tio, and connector K2 to the last.
The case and the heatsink must be drilled
before the power transistors are soldered to
the board. When it is time to solder, have all
mounting hardware, i.e., mounting pillars,
bolts, nuts, washers and the like handy to en-
able the transistor terminals to be given the
required Z-shape and inserted into the PCB
holes. At this stage it is also possible to deter-
mine the best way of mounting the terminal
block connector, K2, which is fairly close to
the edge of the PCB and, therefore, to the
heat sink. In some cases, you may want to fit
K2 such that the connecting wires can be in-
serted from the side of C7/01. On the com-
ponent mounting plan there seems to be
little space to do this, but in most cases capa-
citors C7 and CI Iwill be smaller than drawn.
The wiring between the mains entrance
socket, mains switch Sz and the primary of
the transformer must be installed in accord-
ance with safety regulations.
Fig. 6. Internal view of the economy power supply. The wiring between connector K3 and

59
910111-F
Fig. 7. Front panel layout.
switch Si consists of connector K5 and a the supply to the maximum output voltage
length of flatcable. The connector pinning is and maximum output current. Connect the
Elektor
such that the flatcable wires can be con- multimeter as a voltmeter to the outputs.
nected to the switch contacts in the right Take the multimeter reading, and adjust Pi 110V 60Hz
order. If adigital meter is used, a3-pole type and P3 to give corresponding meter indica-
must be used for Si. The third switch section tions for the positive and the negative output No. 910111
is then used to switch the decimal point and voltage respectively. Next, short-circuit the
F= 1.25A T
the 'V' and 'A' indications on the display. In positive output with the multimeter set to
addition, you will require ashunt resistor at the current range. Adjust P4 until the indica-
the input of the digital meter. When ameter tion of the meter on the supply equals that of
Elektor
is used with a sensitivity of 200 mV, this
shunt resistor takes a value of 270 SI Also
the multimeter. Do the same for the negative
output and preset P5. 240V 50Hz
UI
note that the power supply of the digital Finally, note that the space reserved for
meter unit must float with respect to the sup- the meter on the front panel foil (Fig. 7) No. 910111
ply. In most cases, this means that abattery allows analogue as well as digital meters to
F= 630mA T
or aseparate supply is required. be fitted. The analogue meter scale printed
The power supply proper has no adjust- on the foil may be cut out and stuck over the
ment points; only the meter needs to be cali- existing meter scale. Fig. 8. Suggested rear panel labels for the
brated against an accurate multimeter. Set power supply.
LED INDICATOR FOR

TEMPERATURE LOGGER
by J Ruffell
T
HE measurement card for the in- carried out, this time is appreciably shorter:
door/outdoor thermometer* may be proof the order of 80 ms. The line is also used
vided with the additional LED indicator by the software to signal an error condition
shown in the diagram to check the opera- outwards. If, for instance, TTRANS.CFG or
tion of the software. TLOGGER.CFG is not found, or the path is
Every fifteen seconds, apulse is placed not correct, or the disc is full, pulses at afre-
via the background program TLOGGER on quency of 10 Hz are placed on it.
to line PBO, which is taken outside via con- The diagram shows how the LED is con-
nector K6. The level on this line is, of course, nected to K6 via ashort length of flatcable.
not switched irrespective, but only at the in- Power is supplied by the computer. •
stant that TLOGGER checks whether atem-
perature measurement is being carried out.
If that is so, the level on the line remains high
for about 1s(depending on the speed of the *Elektor Electronics LISA, March 1991
computer). When no measurement is being

WorldRadioHistory
60
AMPLIFICATION/ATTENUATION SELECTOR
A National Semiconductor application
A TYPE TL081 opamp and some passive amplifier with unity gain.
..components are sufficient to construct The input impedance of the circuit is about
asmall amplifier whose amplification can 50 kû. With avalue of C1as shown, the am-
be varied between +1 and -1 with apoten- plifier can handle frequencies from 30 Hz up-
tiometer—see the diagram. wards.
The input signal is applied to both inputs The circuit requires apower supply of
of the opamp: to the inverting input via C1 ±5-15 V and draws acurrent of only afew
and R1,and to the non-inverting input via mA. If such asupply is not available, it may
C1and P1. The amplification of the amplifier be produced from asingle 10-30 V supply
is R2:R 1=1. However, the level of the signal as shown in the diagram.
at the +input is determined by the position
of the wiper of P1.When the wiper is at the
centre of its travel, the two input signals can-
cel each other, so that there is no output.
When the wiper is at the 'high' end of the
potentiometer, the signal at the +input is
larger than that at the inverting input and this
is then available, amplified by 1, at the out-
put. When the wiper is at earth potential,
the opamp functions as anormal inverting
SLAVE MAINS ON-OFF CONTROL

by J. Ruffell
/THIS is an improved version of the slave ment on and off simultaneously with amas- The circuit monitors the current consumption
1 mains on-off control published in the ter unit. One particularly useful application of the master unit (connected to K2)with the
July 1990 issue of Elektor Electronics. The cir- of the control is in audio racks where the sig- aid of an optocoupler, IC 1.When P1 is set to
cuit has been substantially changed and of- nal sources (cassette deck, CD player, tape maximum sensitivity (corresponding to the
fers much better control of inductive loads. recorder, tuner, etc.) are switched on and off highest resistance value), afew milliamperes
The control switches mains-powered equip- together with the power amplifier. are sufficient for the control to switch on the
1
K K2
FI 6A3T
o o
o 01 D2 D3 o
o
>I >I >I 4x 1N5408
o
5500W
oRi
5 6 04
IICI
pi CNY17-2
Tri 100
9V/166mA
BI R3 R5 R7 R12
EEC] IC2
B40C 1500 3 IC2 T1 BC327

6
LM741 10k
2
R10
05 C1 C2 C4 R9 12V R13
06
=1 10p Bel 3300
25Vmm .7(
Ale
470p 47p 07
red
25V 25V green o K3
1N4148 C3 750n o
• 630V
- o
914072.11 ≤750W

SLAVE MAINS ON-OFF CONTROL 61
slave(s), which are connected to K3. The max-

imum sensitivity will rarely be used, however,
since allowance should be made for leakage
and quiescent currents of the master unit.
When the current consumption of the mas-
ter unit exceeds the preset trigger level, the
transistor in ICi starts to conduct, causing
the output of opamp IC2 to go low. Consequently,
transistor T1 conducts and actuates the load
(the 'slave') via relay Re l.
After the master unit has been switched
off, C2 is charged via R5. At acertain voltage
on C2, the comparator toggles and switches
off the slave via T1and Rei. This happens after
500 ms or so.
The state of the control is indicated by
two LEDs, one, D5, as an on/off indicator
for the control proper, and another, D6, for
the on-off state of the slave. The maximum
loads at the master and slave outputs are
500 W and 750 W respectively.
The control is best constructed on the printed
circuit board shown in Fig. 2. The mains con-
nections to the board are made with three 3-
way PCB terminal blocks. For safety reasons
the earth track on the board should be strength-
ened by apiece of copper wire of 2.5 mm 2
cross-sectional area or larger.
WARNING. Since the circuit carries danger-
ous voltages at anumber of points, it is es-
sential that proper electrical insulation is ap-
plied. Never work on the circuit when the
mains is connected to it. Make sure that no
part of the circuit can be touched when it is
being adjusted or used.
PARTS LIST
Resistors:
RI = 120.Q
R2, R5, RI1 = 10 kQ
R3, R10 = 11:12
R4=33 Q
R6 =68 kQ
R7 =270 la/
score R8, R9 =47 kQ
R12 =2.21d2
R13 =220 a, 1W
O 0 0 0 0 0
01 Capacitors:
Cl =470 1.t.F, 25 V
K2 K3 C2 =47 pF, 25 V
'N. '. --1= eel .2 .2 2
o 06 (N1 C3 = 150 nF, 630 V
0-1 I-0 OH P13 I-0 C4= 10 le, 25 V
C3 4G??
• T1
.2 Semiconductors:
cE 2. 0-v-0
o 0
r\J
DI-D4 = 1N5408
6,3A/T O 0
D5 =LED, red
0 0
e-
6 D6 =LED, green
07 C2 or R7 D7 = 1N4148
10 1o- y_ - 0 BI=B40C1500
0-0
o
T1 =BC327
F1
ICI =CNY17-2
0131 le .n1 IC2 =LM741
Miscellaneous:
KI-K3 =3-way PCB block, pitch 7.5 mm
Fl =6.3 A fuse with holder
KI
Trl =mains transformer 9V, 160 rnA sec.
Rel =SPST relay, 12 V, 330 n, e.g.
Û O 0 0 D5 Siemens V23127-B2-A201
o ABS enclosure 190x110x74 mm, e.g.
Retex RG4
WorldRadioHistory
62
DIGITAL (TAPE) COUNTER

a Texas Instruments application
S INCE there are still tape recorders about

that have no mechanical tape counter, the
82 4 D
.t 5
circuit shown here offers an excellent, elec- 02 R6 1 .
aaa
e
o ICI = 74HCT132
9 1N4148A
tronic add-on for these. It can, of course, also IC7 IC1a
IC2 = 74HCTOO
CNY70
be used to replace a mechanical counter. 3
Cl
1N4148 IC2a
Furthermore, it can be used for other appli- 4
6
IC2b
cations, for instance, as hoist-height indi- 5
cator for amodel building crane, or for indi-
cating the position of achisel on alathe. 11
IC1b IC2d
The input of the circuit is formed by two
D'
4 C2
optoisolators. The sequence of the pulse sig- IC2c

10
IC8
nals provided by these isolators depends on
CNY70
the direction into which acoding disc turns.
The NAND gates following the isolators pro-
duce from those signals an up pulse or a
down pulse, which enables up/down counter
IC 3 to register the position irrespective of
the direction of rotation. That position is
EI R22 821 15 D
AOWN
4
up 74HCT192
3
2 1
74LS247
A
3
R7...13
7x 1000
ri 7
6 I:
a CA
8
CA
QB mui
IC4 -
made visible via adecoder on aseven-seg- OC
6 2 4
7 2
ment display. The number of digits the counter D OD d
Li.
mim IC3 e
provides can be extended by adding more IC1c 11
5 9
D•
9 6-0 LOAD
counter/decoder/display stages to the ex- 14 1_1
CLEAR G g
tension terminals, PC I—PC 4,in the same way 10 BO CO
dP LD1
that IC 5,IC 6,LD 2 are connected to IC 3. 013 012
H011-37
The optical input signal is provided by a
4 5 74HCT192 74LS247 R14...20
coding disc that is sub-divided into anum- C6
DOWN 1.1, 7x 1000
8
15 CA CA
3 7
ber of alternate reflecting and non-reflecting 100n
A it 7 a
2 6
segments. The two optoisolators are posi- 6_12
OB
6 2
2
IC6 4
b !Mai
QC
tioned above the disc in such away that 7 6 2
D OD 8 D d
when one is directly above asegment, the
Ly•
CNY 70
ICS =•
4 Ei/k71-
0 e
11
other is exactly above the line dividing two -0 LOAD
5 Ari,
1_1).
segments. It is, of course, possible to use alight 14
CLEAR i:t d g
BO CO
barrier and acoding disc that has alternate 013 012 dg LD2
HD11-31
transparent and opaque segments. Two LEDs PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4
and apair of phototransistors can also be used. 00
14
* * 00
5V
The power supply is a5 V regulated type Cl IC2
13 (5
IC3 .1C4
15 (;)
IC5.1C6
that can deliver 250 mA. For each additional IC1d 70n 1170Cen p 70n
counter stage, 100 mA should be added to

that figure.
*see text
O
914088-11
WATER LEVEL CONTROL

by S. Kokate
I
N SOME countries, the water supply is iron. There is protection in case tank 2is empty. linked to the inverting input of three opamps,
regular at most times; in many other coun- The circuit is operated by anumber of ICi—IC 3. The non-inverting inputs of these am-
tries at times of adrought. A means of mak- sensors mounted in the tanks. Each tank con- plifiers are supplied with areference volt-
ing this less inconvenient is offered by the tains anon-corrosive or insulated pin or straight age, derived from potential dividers. Sufficient
circuit described here. It needs two water piece of stout wire, R. Tank 1has two sen- water between apin and asensor causes a
tanks: one, T2, at ground level or even un- sors, Pand Q, each consisting of asmall, non- virtual short-circuit that results in ahigh
derground and the other, Ti, in the loft or at corrosive metal disc; tank 2has one sensor, level at the inverting input of the associated
least considerably higher than the first one. S, which is identical to those in tank 1. Sensor opamp. A relay is used to switch the pump
Tank 2gets filled by apump from tank 1to P indicates when tank 1is full; Q signals and and off: its normally open contact oper-
ensure that there is sufficient water pressure. when tank 1is empty; Sindicates when tank ates the motor and its normally closed con-
The circuit shown ensures that the water in 2is empty (no water at all). tact is linked to the output of IC 2.
tank 1is kept at agiven level; if the water drops Pins R are connected via aresistor to the When tank 1is full, the inverting input of
below that level, the pump will be switched positive supply line, while the sensors are all three opamps is at ahigh level: the out-

WATER LEVEL CONTROL 63
puts of all three are then low and the relay is

not energized. When the water level in tank
1drops, the output of IC 1 goes high, but,
since the output of IC 2 is low, the relay will
remain inoperative. When, however, the water
level drops to below sensor Q, the output of
IC 2 will go high. Transistor T1is switched on
and the relay is actuated, so that the pump is
switched on and the output of IC 2 is open-
circuited. The high level at pin 6of IC I will
ensure that T1 remains switched on.
When tank 1is filled to the level of sensor
P, the resulting low level at the output of ICi
will cause the relay to be deenergized, so
that the pump is switched off.
When tank 2is empty, the output of IC 3
becomes high, which switches on T2 so that
T1does not get any base current. Consequently,
the relay cannot be energized.
The reference voltage for each of the opamps
can be preset with P1—P 3 to obtain the re-
quired switching pattern, which, of course,
depends also on the sensors used and the com-
position of the water.
Since there is adirect voltage at the sen-
sors, these must be inspected regularly. Some
advice here: the carbon electrodes from an old
battery do not dissolve in water and arte
non-corrosive.
The current drawn by the circuit is deter-
mined chiefly by the relay coil: the BC517
can switch up to 400 mA. The opamps draw
only afew milliamperes.
AUDIBLE TESTER
by L. Roerade the absence of asignal, and this increased to fier, and thus the maximum current drain, is
nearly 200 inA with astong input signal. The determined with P3.
maximum drive level to the power ampli-
THE TESTER, which is very useful for test-
ing parts of electronic circuits, consists
of an oscillator that generates a1kHz test
signal and adetector that amplifies the de-
tected signal which is then made audible by
asmall loudspeaker or buzzer. The tester
draws only asmall current so that it can be
powered by a9 V (PP3 or 6F22) battery.
Circuit ICi afunctions as arectangular-wave
generator whose frequency is determined
by the time constant R4—C 2.With values as
shown, the frequency is about 1 kHz and
this is hardly affected by variations in the
supply voltage.
The oscillator signal is fed to the circuit
on test via CI R5,potentiometer P1 and C4.
With a9 V supply, the maximum voltage at
the wiper of P1 is about 3.5 V p-p. When SI
is closed, the voltage at the output terminals
is reduced to 1/ 14 th.
The measurand is input to the detector

via sensitivity control P2.The circuit is pro-
tected against too high input voltages by R9,
D1and D2. After the signal has been buffered
by ICI„it is applied to power amplifier IC 2
via C6 and P3.The signal is raised to alevel
that enables its driving asmall loudspeaker
or buzzer.
The prototype drew acurrent of 7 mA in
WorldRadioHistory
64
APPLICATION NOTES
The contents of this article are based on information obtained from manufacturers in
the electrical and electronics industry and do not imply practical experience by
Elektor Electronics or its consultants.
MICROPROCESSOR PROGRAMMABLE UNIVERSAL ACTIVE

FILTERS
(Maxim Integrated Products Inc.)
Maxim's MAX260/261/262
series of ICs contain two
double filter sections of
which the response can be
set for each section
individually by means of a
microprocessor output
port or a microcomputer
system. This brings the
programming of roll-off
frequencies and Q factors
at the flick of aswitch
within easy reach. Handy,
too, in the laboratory, such
acomputer-controlled filter
bank!
F LTER ICs based on switched capacitors

I .have been with us for quite some time.
rheir operating principle is fairly simple:
each frequency determining capacitor is as-
sociated with an electronic switch that en-
ables the charge transfer to the capacitor to
be controlled by pulse-width modulation at
a frequency much higher than the desired
pass-band. Switched-capacitor filter ICs
usually require the desired pass-band to be
defined beforehand, which results in acer-
tain internal configuration. Next, a poten-
tiometer is added to give continuous control
of the filter frequency over acertain range.
The new family of IC filters produced by
Maxim takes this principle one step further.
Each IC in the three-member family contains
two second-order switched-capacitor active
filters, whose parameters Q, f c and fo can be
set with the aid of afew datawords supplied

by acomputer system. Virtually everything
required to do this efficiently is integrated in Fig. 1. MAX260/261/262 block diagram and pinouts.
WorldRadioHistory
MICROPROCESSOR PROGRAMMABLE UNIVERSAL ACTIVE FILTERS
65
the IC, including the capacitors. The filter

configuration is flexible since each section
has alow-pass, ahigh-pass and aband-pass
output. Each filter section can be used on its
own, but it is also possible to cascade sec-
tions to obtain higher-order filters (which
have steeper roll-off characteristics).
IC topography
The block schematic diagram of the
MAX260 /262/ 262 is shown in Fig. 1. Each
second-order filter section has its own clock
input, and individual settings for the roll-off
frequency and the Q factor. In this way, the
sections can operate independently whilst
allowing complex filter functions to be cre-
ated. An on-board oscillator is available that
may be connected to a quartz crystal or a
suitable R-C combination. A binary scaler
connected between each clock input and the
filter section prevents the duty factor of the
applied signal affecting the operation of the
filters. The MAX261 and the MAX262 also Fig. 2. Filter block diagram. The IC contains four switched-capacitor sections. Switches Si,
contain an uncommitted opamp that may be S2 and S3 allow a certain filter configuration to be set (see Fig. 3)
used to create, for instance, anotch output.
Figure 2gives the internal structure of a
MODE 1
filter. What is shown is basically astate-vari- a
able filter consisting of two integrators and a
ble
switched
capacitor
summing amplifier. Four switched-capaci- network
tor networks enable the Q factor as well as

the centre frequency,fo, of each section to be
5,
switched
programmed individually. The three swit- capacitor
ches controlled by the 'mode select' block network
allow the opamps and the summing ampli-

fier to be interconnected in many different
ways.
The ratio of the clock frequency to the set
centre frequency is so large that the clock fre-
I
switched
capacitor
network
910125-13a
quency is readily extracted from the output

MODE 2
signal, which results in a nearly ideal sec-
I
ond-order state-variable response. The ratio switched
capacitor
is not the same for all three ICs — for the network
MAX262, it is purposely set to alower value

to enable the IC to handle higher frequencies
switched
than the other two. capacitor
network
Filter mode selection

switched
Mode 1(Fig. 3a) is useful when implement- capacitor
network
ing all-pole low-pass and band-pass filters
such as Butterworth, Bessel and Chebyshev
types. It can also be used for notch filters, but
only second-order types because the relative
pole and null locations are fixed. Mode 1,
I
switched
capacitor
network
910125-13b
along with Mode 4, supports the highest

MODE 3
clock frequencies because the input summ-
l
ing amplifier is outside the filter's resonant
switched
loop. The gain of the low-pass and notch out- capacitor
network
puts is 1, while the band-pass gain at the
centre frequency,fo, equals Q.
Mode 2(Fig. 3b) is also used for all-pole low- switched
capacitor
pass and band-pass filters. The advantages network
compared to Mode 1are higher available Q

factors and lower output noise. However,
the fdk/fo ratios available in Mode 2are Ni2 switched
capacitor
times lower than with Mode 1, so awider network
overall range of section centre frequencies

may be selected when a common clock is
used.
Mode 3(Fig. 3c) is the only mode which pro-
Iswitched
capacitor
network
910125-13c
duces high-pass filters. The maximum clock Fig. 3a, 3b, 3c. Filter modes selected by programming the IC.
WorldRadioHistory
66 APPLICATION NOTES
frequency is slightly lower than with

Mode 1. d MODE 3a
Mode 3a (Fig. 3d) is an extension of Mode 3.
The uncommitted opamp in the MAX261 RH
and MAX262, or an external opamp, is used

to create a separate notch output. This is
I
achieved by summing the low-pass and switched
capacitor
high-pass outputs. Mode 3a is particularly network
suited to creating elliptical filters (with poles
and nulls).
switched -L
Mode 4(Fig. 3e) is the only mode that pro- capacitor
vides an all-pass output. It also allows all- network
pole low-pass and band-pass filters to be

created. Table 1lists the main characteristics
of the above modes.
I switched
capacitor
network
Programming the filters switched

capacitor
network
Very narrow filters can be created by cascad- 910125-13d
ing anumber of filter sections. This, how-

ever, requires the central frequency, fo, and
the quality factor, Q, to be calculated with
the aid of filter theory. Since the two filter e
sections in the MAX26x-based experimental MODE 4
circuit (to be described further on) are used
independently, the discussion can be limited
to a second-order filter, which will meet
switched I
most experimental demands. capacitor
network
The filter IC has three address lines and
two datalines. These are readily connected
to, for instance, aCentronics port on acom- IN switched
capacitor
puter. To program afilter section, eight two-
bit datawords must be written to it. The
network
6/
1
function of these bits is given in Table 2.
After programming the IC, the connection to switched
capacitor
the computer may be broken. The filter IC network
will continue to function with the pro- 910125-13e
grammed settings until its supply voltage is

removed.
Apart from the desired mode for acertain
filter configuration, the computer must sup- Fig. 3d, 3e.
ply acorresponding value for the ratiofcik/fo,
and another for the desired Q factor. The lat-
ter two parameters depend on the pro- FILTER HON1 HON2
MODE Ml, MO FUNCTIONS l
e 0 I. Ho, Hoe, (I — 0) g—tote/4) OTHER
grammed mode, and can not be caught in a 1 0, 0 LP. BR N f
,
t -1 -o -1 -1
simple rule or equation. That is why Table 3
SEE TABLE 2
SEE TABLE 3
2 0, 1 LP. BR N foli -0.5 -0/,/ -0.5 -1

lists values for N, anumber to be fed to the 3 1, 0 LR BR HP -1 -0 - Ho„, =-1
IC in order to obtain acertain frequency ratio 3A 1.0 LP. BR HP, N fe' -1
R
O.
=
R.
.--. Ho.. =-1
-0
14, FI L
given the selected mode. When using this in- R.
Ho» =-1
formation, do mind the 'notes' below the 4 1. 1 LP. BR AP -2 -20
fz 'to. Oz '0
table. Notes: to =Center Frequency Hoa r =Notch Gain as fapproaches DC
f. =Notch Frequency Hoe =Notch Gain as fapproaches f oL ./4
The ratio f cik/fo may be programmed be- HoLo =Lowpass Gain at DC Ho.o =Allpass Gain
tween about 100 and 200 for the most fre- Hoe. =Bandpass Gain at f
o fz.Oz =fand 0 of Complex Pole Pair
Ho.. =Highpass Gain as fapproaches f
oLe/4
quently used modes of the MAX260 /261.

Consequently, at aclock of 200 kHz,f0can be
set (via the computer) to a value between Table 1. Main filter characteristics (Fig. 3)
1 kHz and 2 kHz. To obtain a somewhat
larger control range, the oscillator frequency shut-down mode by programming aQ of 0 against too large input signals.
is made adjustable in our design. This is in filter A. This reduces the current drain The clock oscillator runs with an R-C
achieved with the aid of apotentiometer. from 7mA to about 0.35 mA. combination, P3-0. The potentiometer gives
The Q factor is also programmed via a aclock frequency range of about 70 kHz to
corresponding number, N, which may take a 1.5 MHz. If necessary, lower frequencies
A development circuit
value between 0and 127. This allows the ac- may be obtained by increasing the value of
tual Q to be set between 0.5 and 64 in Figure 4shows the circuit diagram of an ex- O.
Modes 1, 3and 4. The set Q also determines perimental programmable filter based on the The jumpers at the outputs of the filter
the maximum clock frequency. The MAX261 MAX261. The circuit is eminently suited to sections allow you to select aparticular filter
in the present circuit is capable of operating quick design and testing of acertain filter re- function for feeding to output connectors K4
up to 1.7 MHz in all modes at Q values smal- sponse. and Ks. It is also possible to connect two filter
ler than 8(with Q=1, 4MHz is achieved). At The inputs of the IC are fitted with two sections in series by fitting ajumper (or a
higher Qs, the maximum frequency is re- coupling capacitors, Ci and C2, and signal wire link) between points 'A' and 'B'.
duced to about 1.2 MHz. level controls, Pl and P2. Two clamp circuits, The low-pass filters at the outputs of the
The filter IC may be put into alow-power Dl-D2-RI and D3-D4-R2, protect the IC inputs circuit, 125-C8 and R7-0 o, serve to suppress
WorldRadioHistory
E1,EKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991
67
DATA BIT ADDRESS

LOCATION 1
c„,/f0 RATIO PROGRAM CODE
DO D1 A3 A2 Al AO
MAX2110/61 MAX262
FILTER A
MODE 1,3,4 MODE 2 MODE 1,3,4 MODE 2 N F5 F4 F3 F2 Fl FO
MOA MI A 0 0 0 0
FOA Fi A 0 0 1 1 100.53 71.09 40.84 28.88 0 0 0 0
F2 A F3 0 1 0 2 102.10 72.20 42.41 29.99 1 0 0 1
F4 F5A 0 1 1 3 103.67 73.31 43.98 31.10 2 0 1 0
00AA 01 A 1 0 0 4 105.24 74.42 45.55 32.21 3 0 1 1
02 A 03 A 1 0 1 5 106.81 75.53 47.12 33.32 4 1 o 0
04 A 05, 1 1 0 6 108.38 76.64 48.69 34.43 5 1 0 1
06 A 1 1 1 7 109.96 77.75 50.27 35.54 6 1 1 0
111.53 78.86 51.84 36.65 7 1 1 1
FILTER 13
11110 7997 53.41 37.76 8 1 0 0 0
MO B Mie 1 0 0 0 8
114.67 81.08 54.98 38.87 9 1 0 0 1
FO B F1 0 1 0 0 1 9
116.24 82.19 56.55 39.99 10 1 0 1 0
F2 0 F3 0 1 0 1 0 10
117.81 8130 58.12 41.10 11 1 0 1 1
F4 0 F5 0 1 0 1 1 11
119.38 84.42 59.69 42.21 12 1 1 0 0
000 01e 1 1 0 0 12
120.95 85.53 61.26 43.32 13 1 1 0 1
02e 036 1 1 0 1 13
122.52 86.64 62.83 44.43 14 1 1 1 0
04 0 05 0 1 1 1 0 14
124.09 87.75 64.40 45.54 15 1 1 1 1
06 0 1 1 1 1 15
125.66 88.86 6597 46.65 16 1 0 0 0
Note: Writing 0 into 00 A-06 A (address locations 4-7) on
127.23 89.97 67.54 47.76 17 1 0 0 1
Filter A activates shutdown mode. BOTH filter sections 1
128.81 91.80 69.12 48.87 18 0 1 0
deactivate. 92.19 70.69 49.98 19 1 0 1 1
130.38
13195 93.30 72.26 51.10 20 1 1 0 0
133.52 94.41 73.83 52.20 21 1 1 0 1
135.08 95.52 75.40 53.31 22 1 1 1 0
Table 2. Filter parameter address locations.
136.66 96.63 76.97 54.43 23 1 1 1 1
138.23 97.74 78.53 55.54 24 1 1 0 0 0

1
the clock frequency. For best results, these 139.80
141.37
98.86
99.97
80.11
81.68
56.65
57.76
25
26
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1 0
filters should have aroll-off frequency which 142.94 101e9 8125 58.87 27 1 1 0 1 1
144.51 102.89 84.82 59.98 28 1 1 1 0 0
is geared to the set clock frequency. How- 146.08 103.30 8639 61 e9 29 1 1 1 0 1
147.65 104.41 8796 62.20 30 1 1 1 1 0
ever, in view of the universal character of the 149.23 105.52 8954 63.31 31 1 1 1 1 1
present application, a fixed roll-off fre- 150.80 106.63 91.11 64.42 32 1 0 0 0
quency of just higher than 20 kHz is used 152.37
153.98
107.74
108.85
92.68
94.25
65.53 33
34
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
66.64
here. 15551 109.96 95.82 67.75 35 1 0 1 1
157.08 111e7 97.39 sees 36 1 1 0 0
The IC is linked to the computer via a 158.65 112.18 98.96 6998 37 1 1 0 1
160.22 113.29 100.53 71e9 38 1 1 1 0
Centronics connector. A resistor array is 161.79 114.41 102.10 72.20 39 1 1 1 1
used to ensure fixed logic levels at the IC in- 163.36 11552 102.67 73.31 40 1 1 0 0 0
164.93 105.24 74.42 41 1 1 0 0 1
puts when the computer is not connected. 166.50
116.63
117.74 106.81 75.53 42 1 1 0 1 0
For simplicity's sake, the circuit is powered 168.08 118.85 108.38 76.64 43 1 1 0 1 1
169.65 11996 109.96 77.75 44 1 1 1 0 0
by an asymmetrical supply. This requires an 171.22 121.07 111.53 78.86 45 1 1 1 0 1
172.79 122.18 11310 7997 46 1 1 1 1 0
additional potential of half the supply volt- 174.36 123.29 114.66 81,08 47 1 1 1 1 1
age to be created for the MAX261. This is 175.93 124.40 116.24 82.19 48 1 1 0 0 0
177.50 125.51 117.81 49 1 1
achieved with components R3, R4 and Cs. 179.07 126.62 119.38
83.30
84.41 50 1 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
The supply voltage is stabilized by a 5-V 180.64 127.73 120.95 85.53 51 1 1 0 1 1
182.21 128.84 122.52 86.64 52 1 1 1 0 0
regulator Type 7805. The current drain of the 183.78 129.96 124.09 87.75 53 1 1 1 0 1
185.35 131.07 125.66 88.86 54 1 1 1 1 0
circuit is smaller than 20 mA. 186.92 132.18 127.23 8997 55 1 1 1 1 1
188.49 133.29 128.81 91.08 56 1 1 1 0 0 0

190.07 134 40 130 38 92 19 57 1 I 1 0 0 1
Practical use 191.64
193.21
135.51
136.62
131.95
133.52
93.30
94.41
58
59
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
194.78 137.73 135.09 95.52 60 1 1 1 1 0 0
The experimental programmable filter is 196.35 138.84 136.66 96.63 61 1 1 1 1 0 1
197.92 139.95 138.23 97.74 62 1 1 1 1 1 0
best constructed on the printed circuit board 199.49 141.06 139.80 98.85 63 1 1 1 1 1 1
shown in Fig. 5. The wiring is reduced to a Not« 1) For the MAX260/61, f c,„,/ o = (64 e N)w12 in Mode 1, 3, and 4, where N varies from 0 to 63.
2) For the MAX262, f c,/f0 = (26 e N)Ir/2 in Mode 1, 3, and 4, where N varies 0 to 63.
minimum because all connectors are 3) In Mode 2, all f
cLB/f0 ratios are divided by Nr2. The functions are then:
mounted on to the board. The completed MAX260/61 1, L0 /10 = 1.11072 (64 e N), MAX262 f eLB /fo = 111072 (26 * N)
PCB is fitted into asmall ABS enclosure from

Pactec of dimensions 146x92x27 mm (ap-
prox.). The input supply voltage is best fur- Table 3. Central frequency programming.
nished by asmall mains adaptor with 9V to
12 V d.c. output.
For an initial test, connect the control
input of the filter to the Centronics output of
aPC, and the input(s) to asignal generator.
The output(s) is (are) connected to ameasur-
ing instrument, e.g., an oscilloscope. The
maximum input voltage with the level con-
trols fully open depends on the desired
mode, the selected output, and the set Q fac-
tor (see Table 1). The maximum output volt-
age is about 1.5 V., at the supply voltage
used here.
The short BASIC program listed in Fig. 6
gives ready control over the filter section set-
tings. First, select the desired mode. In most
cases, this will be Mode 1if a low-pass or
band-pass filter is desired, or Mode 3if you
want ahigh-pass filter.
Next, enter the corresponding number
for fo (centre frequency) and Q (quality fac-
tor). Use Tables 3and 4to look up the num-
WorldRadioHistory
68 APPLICATION NOTES
IC2
7...20V
Resistors:
K6,1
7805
0 5V
2 11(12 R1;R2
°
cj
7805
:On .r 2 41(127 R3:R4

o C12 C13 2 21(122 R5;R7
7ge 10011 2
1
1001(12
33012
R6;R8
R9
R10 C7
1 101(12 E-way SIL R10
8,0k
I
2 501(12 preset ri Pl P2
68p
1 100k12 preset 1
4 P3
P3
9 12
100k
0 CLK B CLK A
WR OP IN
18
Capacitors:
DO OSC OUT
Dl CLK OUT
8 2 330nF 01;02
AU OP OUT
2 10µF 16V 03;05
Al
O
10 20 H 3 100nF 04;06;013
21,
2 HP B C9 K4 B
21
O 43 BP B
1 68pF 07
svo 05V
22
00 LP B 970n
11—. 0 ICI
2 3nF3 08;C -
10
1N4148 1N4148
00 2 470nF 09;C11
o R DI I DO
MAX 261
e
FIFA C11 K5 A
5IN A 1 100uF 35V radial 012
O0
0 0
BEM BP A
LP A
E113 11
470n
23
O0 IN B
Semiconductors:
O0
O0
02A 04
4 IN4148 D1-D4
194148 iN4148
O 0
1 LED red 5mm D5
SVC)
O0
36 18 1 MAX26 1 !C1
CO C1
1 7805 102
A K2 Cl p, 3n3 3n3
Miscellaneous:
33011 50k
1 36-way PCB-mount angled K1
13 K3 C2 p2
Centronics socket
C3 Ra r
l i CS
4 PCB-mount RCA or K2-K5

33011 50k
phono socket
1E)
16v 16v
910125-14 1 3-mm dia. PCB-nount K6

adaptor socket
1 Printed circuit board 910125
Fig. 4. Although fairly simple, the experimental circuit based on the MAX262 offers many
interesting possibilities.
Fig. 5. Printed-circuit board designed for the programmable filter.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECUINIBER 1991
69
bers N that yield the desired parameter

PROGRAMMED 0 PROGRAM CODE PROGRAMMED 0 PROGRAM CODE
values, observing the available range (be-
MODE 1,3,4 MODE 2 N 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 MODE 1,3,4 MODE 2 N 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 tween 0and 63 for N(fo), and between 0and
0.500" 0.707' 0* 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.00 141 64 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 127 for N(Q)). The computer builds the re-
0.504 0.713 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1.02 144 65 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
0508 0.718 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 103 146 66 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 sulting clatawords and sends them to the fil-
0512 0.724 3 0 1.05 148 67 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0.516 0730 4 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0 1.07 151 68 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
ter circuit. You may want to extend the
0.520 0.736 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1.08 153 69 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 program by incorporating the equations
0525 0.742 6 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1.10 156 70 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
0.529 0.748 7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 112 159 71 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 below Tables 3and 4 in order to be able to
0533 0.754 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1.14 1.62 72 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 work without the conversion (N-) tables, and
0538 0.761 9 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 116 165 73 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
0542 0.767 10 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1.19 1.68 74 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 program the frequency ratio and the quality
0.547 0774 11 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 121 171
174
75 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
factor direct.
0352 0.780 12 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 123 76 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0.556 0.787 13 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 125 1.77 77 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Finally, a few programming hints for
0.561 0.794 14 0 0 -0 1 1 1 0 1.28 181 78 1 0 0 1 1 1 0
0.566 0601 15 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1.31 185 79 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 commonly used filter types. A Butterworth
0.571 0608 16 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 133 189 80 1 0 0 0 0 0 filter is implemented by programming aQ of
0.577 0615 17 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1.36 1.93 81 1 0 0 0 0 1
0.582 0.823 18 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1.39 1.97 82 1 0 0 0 1 0 0.707, in which case the -3-dB roll-off fre-
0587 0.830 19 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 142 201 83 1 0 0 0 1 1
quency equals fo. A Bessel characteristic is
0.593 0.838 20 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1.45 2Ce 84 1 0 0 1 0 0
0398 0.846 21 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1.49 210 85 1 0 0 1 0 1 obtained with Q set to 0.5, whenfo equals the
0.604 0854 22 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 152 2.16 86 1 0 0 1 1 0
0609 0.862 23 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 156 2.21 87 1 0 0 1 1 1 -6-dB roll-off frequency. A Chebyshev-like
1
0e15 0870 24 0 0 1 0 0 0 -. i.-
643
- 2.26 88 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 response is possible by entering aQ of 1. In
0.621 0.879 25 0 0 1 0 0 1 1.64 2.32 89 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
0.627 0.887 26 0 0 1 0 1 0 1e8 2,40 90 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 that case, fo is the resonance point of the
1.73 2.45 91 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
0.634 0.896 27 0 0 1 0 1 1
1.78 2.51 92 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
small peak which occurs near the roll-off fre-
0.640 0905 28 0 0 1 1 0 0
0646 0.914 29 0 0 1 1 0 1 163 2.59 93 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 quency with this type of filter. This peak
0653 0.924 30 0 0 1 1 1 0 1.88 2.66 94 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
0.660 0.933 31 0 0 1 1 1 1 194 2.74 95 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 becomes larger when higher Q values are
0.667 0943 32 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 ZOO 2.83 96 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 programmed. However, the resultant filter
0e74 0.953 33 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 2.06 2.92 97 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
0e81 0.963 34 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 213 202 98 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 characteristics are rarely used or required.•
0.688 0973 35 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 2.21 3.12 99 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
0696 0984 36 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 2.29 3.23 100 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
0.703 0.995 37 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 2.37 3.35 101 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 Source:
0.711 101 38 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 246 3.48 102 1 0 0 1 1 0
0719 102 39 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 2.56 3.62 103 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 Maxim Integrated Circuits Data Book 1989,
0.727 103 40 0 1 0 0 0 0 267 3.77 104 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 pages 10-1 to 10-24.
0.736 104 41 0 1 0 0 0 1 2.78 3.96 105 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
0.744 105 42 0 1 0 0 1 0 291 4.11 106 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
0.753 1.06 43 0 1 0 0 1 1 305 4.31 107 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
0.762 1.08 44 0 1 0 1 0 0 3.20 4.53 108 1 0 1 1 0 0
0.771 1.09 45 0 1 0 1 0 1 3.37 4.76 109 1 0 1 1 0 1
0.780 110 46 0 1 0 1 1 0 3.56 5.03 110 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
0.790 1.12 47 0 1 0 1 1 1 3.76 522 111 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Maxim Integrated Products Inc. • 120 San
0.800 1.13 48 0 1 0 0 0 0 4.00 5e6 112 1 1 0 0 0 0 Gabriel Drive • Sunnyvale • CA 94086 •
0.810 1.15 49 0 1 0 0 0 1 4.27 603 113 1 1 0 0 0 1
0.821 116 50 0 1 0 0 1 0 4.57 646 114 1 1 0 0 1 0 U.S.A. Telephone: (480) 737 7600. Fax: (480)
1 115 1 1 0 0 1 1
0.831 1.18
119
51 0 1 0
0
0
1
1
0
4.92
5.33
6.96
7.54 116 1 1 0 1 0 0
737 7914.
0.842 52 0 1 0
0853 121 53 0 1 0 1 0 1 5.82 8.23 117 1 1 0 1 0 1
0.865 122 54 0 1 0 1 1 0 6,40 9.05 118 1 1 0 1 1 0
0.877 1.24 55 0 1 0 1 1 1 7.11 101 119 1 1 0 1 1 1 Maxim UK Ltd. • 21C Horseshoe Park •
0689 126 56 0 1 1 0 0 0 8.00 11.3 120 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Pangbourne •Reading RG8 7JW •England.
0.901 127 57 0 1 1 0 0 1 914 12.9 121 1 1 1 1 0 0 1
0.914 1.29 58 0 1 1 0 1 0 10.7 15.1 122 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 Telephone: (07357) 5255. Fax: (07357) 5257.
0.928 131 59 0 1 1 0 1 1 128 18.1 123 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
0.941 133 60 0 1 1 1 0 0 16.0 22.6 124 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
0955 125 61 0 1 1 1 0 1 21.3 30.2 125 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 UK distributors: Dialogue Distribution Ltd.
0.969 1.37 62 0 1 1 1 1 0 32.0 453 126 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
0985 139 63 0 1 1 1 , 1 64.0 905 127 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (0276 682001); 2001 Electronic Components
(0438 742001); Thame Components Ltd. (084
4214561).
Nota: 4) •Writing all Os into 00A-06A on Filter A activates alow power shutdown mode. BOTH filter sections are deactivated
Therefore this 0 value is only achievable n filter B.
5) In Modes 1, 3, and 4, 0 =64/(128-N)
6) In Mode 2, the listed 0 values are those of Mode 1multiplied by ‘/i. Then 0 =90.51/(128-N)
Table 4. GI factor programming.
100 ABS'" FILTER A " : GOSUB 150 : REM GET DATA FOR SECTION A
110 ADD = 0 : GOSUB 220 : REM WRITE DATA TO THE PRINTER PORT
120 AB$=" FILTER 13 " : GOSUB 150 : REM GET DATA FOR SECTION B
130 ADD = 32 : GOSUB 220 : REM WRITE DATA TO THE PRINTER PORT
135 PRINT
140 GOTO 100
150 PRINT " MODE (1..4; SEE TABLE 1) : "; ABS; : INPUT M
160 IF M<1 OR M>4 THEN 150
170 PRINT "CLOCK RATIO (0..63, N OF TABLE 3) "; ABS; : INPUT F
180 IF F<0 OR F>63 THEN 170
190 PRINT "Q (0..127, N OF TABLE 4) "; ABS; : INPUT Q
200 IF Q<0 OR Q>127 THEN 190 ELSE PRINT
210 RETURN
220 LPRINT CHR5(ADD+M-1); : ADD=ADD+4
230 FOR I=1 TO 3
240 X=(ADD + (F - 4.INT(F/4))) : LPRINT cHR5(X);
250 F=INT (F/4) : ADD = ADD + 4
260 NEXT I
Fig. 6. Use this BASIC program along with
270 FOR I=1 TO 4
280 X=(ADD (Q - 4.INT(Q/4))) : LPRINT CHRS(X);
the information in Tables 3and 4to program
290 Q=INT(Q/4) : ADD = ADD + 4 the filter sections. Note that the centre fre-
300 NEXT I quency and the Qfactor are not programmed
310 RETURN 910125.15
direct but as corresponding values of avari-
able, N.

70
VOLTAGE REGULATOR FOR CARS

by R. Lucassen
I
N OLDER cars, the battery charging volt-
age is controlled mechanically. The regu-
lator consists of arelay that switches the sta-
tor windings of the alternator on and off.
This arrangement is prone to breakdown,
inaccurate regulation and sensitivity to load
variations.
An electronic alternative as shown has
the advantages of not containing any mov-
ing parts and of providing much more accu-
rate regulation. Moreover, the voltage is mea-
sured at the battery terminals, so that losses
in the wiring are not included in the mea-
surement.
The regulator, ICI,is essentially adevice
that continuously compares the battery volt-
age with areference potential. This com-
parator drives apower transistor that switches
the excitation of the alternator.
Terminal Zl is connected to the + termi-
nal of the battery; Z2 to the ignition switch;
and Z3 to the stator winding of the alterna-
tor.
The battery voltage is reduced to about
5Vby potential divider R1—R2—P 1and applied
to the non-inverting input of Schmitt trigger
ICi. The inverting input of this opamp is at a
reference potential of 5 V provided by regu-
lator IC 2.Power transistor T1 is switched by
the output of ICi and transistors T2 andT 3.
Diode D2 functions as an indicator, while D1 The regulator is calibrated by connecting the power supply output is reduced slowly,
is afree-wheeling diode. Capacitor C6 atten- a12 V lamp or 15 L, 10 W resistor between the lamp should come on again at 13.9 V.
uates the pulse generated when T1is switched Z3 and earth and avariable power supply and The regulator is best built in asmall alu-
on, so that far fewer harmonics are gener- multimeter, set to 15 V, between Z1 and earth. minium case that also serves as heat sink for
ated and interference on medium-wave radio Set the power supply output to 14.3 V and T1.The case can be made water-tight with a
is suppressed. adjust P1 until the lamp just goes out. When suitable (hardening) silicone paste.
FAST SWITCHING GATE

by A. Rigby
S
WITCHING transistors are usually driven (inverted) collector signal without diode, diode, the collector returns to the high-level
into saturation, which has an adverse ef- and signal 3is the collector signal with the state much.more rapidly.
fect on the switching speed. This effect is diode added. It is evident that, owing to the
eliminated, or nearly so, by the use of Schottky
diodes at the inputs. It is equally possible to
add adiode to atransistor (across its base-
collector junction) as shown in the diagram
to increase its switching speed.
When the transistor is driven into con-
duction, its base current will soon be limited
because the diode has alower transfer po-
tential than the base-collector junction, so that
part of the current will flow through the
diode. When the transistor is switched off, it
will therefore require less time to reach the
non-conducting state. The effect is seen clearly
in the photograph. Signal 1is the input sig-
nal at afrequency of 166 kHz. Signal 2is the
WorldRadioHistory
UNIVERSAL 64-BIT OUTPUT
by D. Lorenz
S
INCE the proposed circuit makes use of In that way, the six least significant bits form When it is required to set one bit and reset
the Centronics interface, it is suitable for the number of the output bit to be addressed the others rapidly (for instance, by arun-
virtually all types of computer: even older (0-63). ning light), data bits 6and 7can both be
types with aseven-bit Centronics interface, Whether the addressed output is high or made high, whereupon the wanted bit is ad-
although in their case the possibility of giv- low depends on data bit 6. Since drivers ICi—IC 8 dressed with the other six bits.
ing an overall reset is not available. invert, the logic level at the output is inverted Most loads can be driven directly by the
The data from the interface are clocked in with respect to bit 6. The driver ICs can switch driver ICs, as long as the levels at the output
IC 18 with the strobe signal. The three least sig- up to 500 mA per output. do not exceed 50 V and 500 mA. If it is re-
nificant bits are applied directly to the three All outputs are reset (the open-collector quired to switch the mains, the outputs can
address inputs of eight-bit addressable latches outputs of the drivers become high-impedance) be expanded with asolid-state relay. •
IC 9—IC 16 .These latches are addressed by the when data bit 7is high and data bit 6is low.
next three data bits via address decoder IC 17 . The state of the three address bits is irrelevant.
S S 'S
KI
I T I
K2 K3 KO KS K6 K7 K8
0 01 10
T1 12 11 11 1)511111 1'
01 1°1j2 13 14 j4 1.
7Ill 1jt ° 2j3 1111)Sill j7 64
1 1°112 11 1)4if ill j7 1'
2 1°1j2 1.
3j4 Ill 7 11'313 141'51111'
7° e
' sv 1°1121'
' 3j4 111 îl j01 sv IT, 1)2j3 j4 j3 111 j7 j0i
g IS 17 10 15 IA I] 12 11(53 I. 17 IS IS 14 13 12 11 g 10 17 10 15 14 12 12 It 'V 14 17 10 15 14 13 12 II 'V IS 17 IS IS 14 13 17 14 15 14 13 12 11 0 IS 17 Id IS 14 13 12 110 IS 17 14 IS 14 13 12 II
15 18 ra 18 1
5 13
. 15 13 13 18 13 ei 13 15 IS 18 13 16 18 18 18 15 18 18 13 15 18 1te rt> ra 101 1.3 18 18 SS 1 15 13 13 1318181am lararsqlsera 13 GIs raeratara Z
21,0 IC, .eo IC2 0 IC3 Ica ÎLe 11 0 IC7 " 0 we
ULN2803 VSE ULN2803 VEd5, ULN2803 VEE ULN2803 SEE 1:3 U1.1
117803 VEO 0 ice
ULN2803 VEE e.- ULN2803 VES L ULN2803 vet
0.0 2 O0010259 :902_251 .0 2 2 3 0 2 2 .99 10959 1 re 2 3 9 2 5 2 9 _ 9 9 1 9 2 5 2

2 •
1
3
2
• • S 7 • e • 4
to 11 12 13 14 te 10 11 13 10 11 12 13 10 It 12 14 10 12 13 14 IS
a 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 IS • 10 11 13 14 IS
8ô ô 3 8 Ô 8 588 3886 868888 86 85886886 8 5 3 3 8 ô 8 888 3'5 8 3 3 3 ô 85 8 3 8 Ô
ICS ICIO ICII IC12 IC13 ICIO ICIS IC16
4099 4099 4099 4099 0099 4099 4099 0099
AO AI 42 W0 005T AO 41 42 13 13 RST oo Al 42 WO 0 1141 AO AI 42 woo SST AO AI A2 WD DST AO Al A2 WO AST A041 42 13 ,RST A001 42 WO PST
5 5 7 4 3 2 • 3 3 • • 11 4
69
o 19
ci 4 13 12 11 10
o o "
oo "
L
01 Ices 05
02 02 o o 22
GI C 7 03 03 o "
70 o. IS
OCT;
7411C7138 0 0 22
Os 00 25
1 12
0 EMU •o "
—0 0 "
0 0 27
5V,o o "
1C9...1C16 ICI? IC18 0 0-22 ml•
11 -.0 0-e P4 V
R2 R3
•24c:n o
0..12
0j2
—0 0.-"
—0 Otte
914103.11
STATIC D.C. D.C. CONVERTER

by A.B. Tiwana
A TYPE 555 timer and some passive com- Output data for Uh,= 15 V
ponents can provide asmall converter
Load (0) (lout (V) /out (mA) lj (mA) Efficiency (%)
to provide anegative output of 12 V at a
few milliamperes.
The 555 is connected as an astable with a 14.3 15 o
rate of 125 kHz. Network C1-D 2-0 5-D3forms 15 k I
2.7 0.85 17.8 4
acascade circuit that supplies anegative di- 1k 10.5 10.5 53.8 14
rect voltage. Since in the design it was required 680 10 14.7 65.5 15
that neither a transformer nor acoil was 400 9 22.5 85.4 16
used, the efficiency of the converter is not high: 330 7.5 22.7 105 11
not more than 16% at an output current of
WorldRadioHistory
STATIC D.C.-D.C. CONVERTER
20 mA. However, in battery-powered equip-

ment requiring anegative supply at only a
few mA, that is no hardship. Note, however,
that even unloaded, the converter draws a 9...15V 02 D3
1614001X
current of about 15 mA. 4
The output voltage has aripple of about

2111
_,
C1
0.6 V p-p, which can be suppressed with the 220p

R1
25V
aid of aresistor-zener diode network or alow- IC1
drop regulator at the output. 555
1N4001
7 25V 7n
7.
C4 Ci 02 C6 C5
mim ulm 22p
25V
=11000
7n2 M"
• 0-(:)-
1N4001
914105-11
RELAY FUSE
by R. Kuhn
S
IMPLE battery chargers and power sup-
plies are not normally provided with acur-
rent limiter. In many cases, however, it would
be advantageous if the unit were proof against
short-circuits. An electro-mechanical fuse
which serves that function and which can be
added to the unit is shown in the diagram.
There are two variations, one for power sup-
plies (a) and the other for battery chargers
(b). The circuit will be described on the basis
of (a).
When power is switched on, the relay gets
ashort energizing pulse of current via C1.Since
the relay contact then changes over, the relay
remains energized. When ashort-circuit oc-
curs at the output terminals of the power
supply, the relay is deenergized and the con-
nection between input and output is broken.
The relay is re-energized by anew pulse of circuit is off. the relay can be energized, via C3-R 4,by-
current via C2after the short-circuit has been The diagram for battery chargers differs pressing S2 briefly.
removed and S1 is pressed briefly. Capacitor in one respect from that described: on power- The value of bias resistors R2 and R3 de-
C2also prevents an overload if Si were pressed on, the relay is not energized via acapacitor, pends on the LED used and the supply volt-
while the short-circuit persists. The capaci- but by the battery on charge via D4.In case age. The relay voltage must, of course, also
tor is discharged via R1 when S1 is opened. the battery is so flat that it can no longer be in accord with the supply voltage. •
Diode D1 (biased via R2)shows when the supply sufficient current to actuate the relay,
OVERLOAD INDICATOR
by W. Teder
T
HE overload indicator consists of awin- Capacitor C2 is charged fairly rapidly via D1 when the signal is asymmetrical.
dow comparator that measures the mag- (or D2)and R5, after which it discharges slowly Because of the symmetrical power supply
nitude of an a.f. signal. Two of the opamps via R6,R9 and the base-emitter junction of and design of the indicator, the reference
contained in an TL072 are supplied with a I. Capacitor C1also contributes to the longer voltage for both opamps can be set with one
reference voltage by potential divider lighting of the LED. potentiometer.
R1-R 2-R 3-P 1.The outputs of the opamps When the level of the signal at the input The circuit draws acurrent of 5-6 mA
drive T1via diodes D1 and D2 (that function is high enough, ICi a is toggled by the posi- when the LED is off. When an overload peak
as half-wave rectifier), which in turn actu- tive half periods of the signal and IC 16 by is indicated, the LED draws an additional
ates D3.Network R5-R6-C 2 ensures that the the negative halves. In this way, apeak above 20 mA. With values as shown, the reference
LED lights even during short signal peaks. the maximum level will be indicated even voltage can be set roughly between 0.9 V
WorldRadioHistory
OVERLOAD INDICATOR el
and 5.5 V.
The circuit can be connected to the out-
put of apower amplifier, but potential divider
R7—R 8 then needs to be adapted and pro-
tected by diodes to the supply lines. •
PARTS LIST
Resistors:
R1, R3, R8, R9 = 10 k
-12
R2 = 1.81(12
R4 = 1.5 kl2
R5 =- 1kl-2
R6, R7 = 100 Id/
Pl = 10 k12 preset
Capacitors:
Cl =10µF, 35 V
C2 = 1pF, 35 V
C3, C4 = 100 nF
Semiconductors:
D1, D2= 1N4148
D3 = LED, red
T1 = BC547B
IC1 = TL072 or TL082
00110
o+ - oo
c
e(D
04 2r : o
elq
2-n) 6-
r) t
e cqn 3 1
:
}43 6-
HORSE SIMULATOR
by G. Lausches-Dress
H
ERE is away of faithfully reproducing The patterns for driving the LEDs are pro- done, S2 must be pressed briefly before the
the movements of ahorse: with aro- vided by EPROM IC 4,whose hex dump in next pattern is supplied to the LEDs.
tary switch that enables selection of step, the table shows the relevant addresses and as- When correct addresses are generated, a
trot, gallop to the right, gallop to the left, sociated data. Addressing is carried out with reset pulse is passed to the counter by IC3a.
and backward. The manner in which the S3 a and counter ICi. Oscillator IC 3c ensures The power-up reset is provided by C2 and one
horse puts down its hoofs is indicated clearly that successive addresses are generated au- of the resistors of array R10.
by LEDs. The simulator forms, therefore, a tomatically. The speed with which the horse The circuit is operated by a6 Vbattery. An
versatile demonstration model for instructors moves can be set with P1.The oscillator can separate on/off switch is not required because
and learner riders. also be switched off by closing SI.If that is that function is already provided by S3b. In
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECTEMBER 1991
74 HORSE SIMULATOR
operation, the circuit draws acurrent of only

35 mA. label 1. EPROM-Listing.
The simulator can be built on apiece of
00000: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 85 84 92 90 A2 22 2A 09
prototyping (vero) board. The only important
00010: 84 00 21 00 84 00 21 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
thing during the construction is to ensure that
00020: 01 45 44 54 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
the LEDs are configured as shown, that is, two
00030: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
rows of four LEDs each with D1 at the top 00040: 80 A2 22 2A 08 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
left and D5 at the bottom left. The head of 00050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
the horse is then at the right and its tail at 00060: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
the left. 00070: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00080: 5A 12 96 48 69 5A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00090: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000A0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000160: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00000: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000DO: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000E0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000FO: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
WorldRadioHistory
DIGITAL 555
by K. Walters
A FTER many years, there is finally adig-

ital of the well-known Type 555
timer IC: the HCT5555. The traditional 555 can
4,5...5,5V be used as astable or monostable, with the tim-
ing determined by an RC network. Crystal
64 SO I S1 S2 S3 control is not possible and when the time
12 constant is long, accuracy goes by the way.
62 R3 7 e 69 The HCT5555 is intended purely as a
5k à
100n
9 o monostable; if operation as an astable is re-
quired, anumber of external components
3 10 11 2 13 must be added—see diagram. The timing is
STC TC So SI Sa IS,
arranged, however, by asepara te integral os-
CP cillator and programmable divider. Owing
24.5TAGECOUNTER
CO to the greater number of facilities, the new
14 2s` device is not housed in an 8-pin case like
o the 555, but in a16-pin package.
\S4
POWER •OP
The chip has two trigger inputs: one for
15
RESET
first transitions (A) and one for last transitions
(B). These inputs can be interlinked: the mono
time, determined by the oscillator and the
4
1
10110STASSECIRCUITR
, set scaling factor, then starts at each and
every transition of the input signal. When one
of the inputs is actuated, output Q pes high.
o
6 RTRAITII
There is acomplementary output Q.
Some of the new terminals are:
HCT5555
• MR (pin 15)is the Master Reset;
• retriggerable (pin 16), which determines
whether the IC reacts to trigger pulses
when the mono time has not yet lapsed;
• OSC(illator) CON(trol) (pin 14) via which
the integral oscillatgor can be stopped.
• pins 1, 2, and 3, are used for the oscillator,
select inputs divisors while pins 10-13 determine the scaling
factor—see table.
S3 S2 Si SO binary decimal A possible application of the new device
is the timer as shown in the diagram that in-
2
dicates when, for instance, NiCd batteries have
H 22 4 been on charge for 14 hours. The LED then
goes out (or just comes on if the Z? output is
H 23 8 used). The oscillator is set to 333 Hz with
L L H H 24 16 (R =1.84 1d2). Leave all switches open or omit
them altogether.
L H L L 32 The supply voltage depends on the type
of IC used: the HCT version needs 4.5-5.5 V,
L H L H 26 64
whereas the HC version can opera te from
L H H L 27 128 2-6 V. The IC draws about 0.5 mA.
L H H H 28 256
H L L L 117 131 072
H L L H 2 18 262144
H L H L 2 19 524 288
H L H H 220 1048 576
H H L L 221 2097 152
H H L H 222 4 194 304
H H H L 223 8388 608
H H H H 224 16 777 216
WorldRadioHistory
EI,EKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991
76
DIGITAL FUNCTION GENERATOR —PART 3

by T. Giffard
DOPULATING the four boards should not that soldering is carried out neatly. IC sock- play must be fitted in asuitable socket that
present any problems. As usual, care must ets, when used, should be high-quality types is mounted alittle above the board. The ICs
be taken to ensure that, where appropriate, with gold-plated contacts. should be soldered, not fitted in asocket.
the polarity of components is observed and On the display board, the 7-segment dis- The connectors with protection collars must
S.°
•: 100mA T
MI) •4'4°-=
141-.10
:71
R02 o J
o R04
1451
R 2
R.
D:1
DO 14 Re
C.=‘,
«Me
/10
0
48
1447 •VI C)It MO,
0- 001- 0
1:113
o oollocao
couI•5a ,o
CI 1
, 710
La.., 'WO ,;1: otil ,
EMI • 00042 000 , 000 J 000
000 2 000 , 000 000 10
VW.
/154 0 000t , 000H000
F
ood* bollo Eeeno
l
eci
01=110
90 re,
•\\\\\.\ \ \k\'`•\.\\
9•
1*1
0110.0 00
te
ceo
cucue
00D3210
:au, ,0110 2ce-

0-14-01°
ioe n n
00
0M 0 0 cu
..1 .fli'li
: al/r en
d Wan,
illi.1 11.' eiZ
Ce
0 e. 2 00Cc',U00110 0 4 .
deal. 0(max.
,01- [1-5
0 ,T, - C11_11 n e2
l )
1 :
o,,0-+4-0000--MM--0020
o,,0-+4-0
1.4-0:0
0 - M --0020
-0022
r. 1 : 0
-0 «f: 0-
o 7-°
.0 cieli° .4..„ c.
° ..41,
einge ole
0200-1.4-0
.. 0-1,1-0 020 e--04-cooz , 0(=0
........ ..
c,see..110
011r4IT
ECCI
er41- 81 028
«MO
C16901100
cr)
TOT
Fig. 24. Wiring diagram of the digital function generator.
WorldRadioHistory
DIGITAL FUNCTION GENERATOR PART 3 El
evant points on the digital section board. between the various boards and front panel
Connect an oscilloscope to pin 6of ICi d and controls: consult the overall wiring diagram
adjust C2 until the oscillator in IC 1generates in Fig. 24.
asignal of 40 kHz. The frequency of the sig-
nal at pin 3of IC 4should then be 160 Hz. Next, Calibration
adjust the core of Li so that the VCO oper-
ates correctly at both minimum and maximum Connect amultimeter at pin 6of IC34, switch
drive voltage. on the generator, leave if for afew minutes,
Connect the display board to the digital set the frequency to 1000 Hz, and then ad-
section board and press Si (DOWN) until just Pi for zero reading on the multimeter.
the lowest display position (1000) has been Connect an oscilloscope to pin 7of IC 42 and
reached. Then, with the oscilloscope con- adjust Pg until the rectangular signal is sym-
nected at the VCO output, pin 6of IC 5,ad- metrical with respect to the base line on the
just Li for afrequency on the oscilloscope of oscilloscope.
910077- 3-12
2.56 MHz. The level at pin 13 of IC 4 should Connect amultimeter across R163 and an
lie between 0.3 V and 5.7 V. oscilloscope to output socket K7.Set Sg to
Check the function of the various switches triangular wave, Pg to maximum and P7to the
and insert the jump leads as required in ac- centre of its travel. Next, P6 (amplitude of
Fig. 25. Construction of C37. cordance with the instructions in Part 1. the input signal to IC 41 )and P9 (regulating
time) must be adjusted, but here acompro-
mise must be made. The aim is to keep the
Mechanical construction
be fitted at the track side of the board. Do time the generator requires to stabilize after
not fit the three LEDs until the board has The boards for the digital section, the rect- achange of frequency short, yet long enough
been fastened to the front panel of the case. angular/triangular converter and the sine at low frequencies as mentioned earlier.
The printed-circuit boards for the digital wave converter must be screwed together with Connect amultimeter to pin 1of IC 42 and
section, the rectangular/triangular waveform the aid of suitable spacers. Next, make the con- adjust P5 till the multimeter reads zero.
converter, and the sine wave converter are nections in flatcable between K2,K5 and Kg Set S5 to rectangular wave and connect
inter-joined into athree-layer construction. and the power supply connection in suitable an oscilloscope to output socket K7.When
Any connecting wires to the front panel con- cirircuit wire to Kg on the sine wave con- the capacitance of C137 is correct, atrue rect-
trols should be soldered to the relevant pins verter board and to K9 on the rtectangu- angular wave will appear on the screen. If
on the boards before these are joined together. lar/ triangular converter board. the waveform has rounded corners, the ca-
Use normal insulated circuit wire and make Then, make the various holes in the en- pacitance is too large, whereas if it shows over-
the connections rather longer than eventually closure: for the front panel, use aphotocopy shoot, the capacitance is too small. These ef-
required. This does not apply to the connec- of the front panel foil as template (do not use fects are shown in Fig. 25. If the capacitance
tions to output level control P3and to the BNC Fig. 11, which is not the right size). Do not is too small, C137 must be remade; when it is
sockets, which should be in screened audio forget the four holes for fastening the dis- too large, it may be shortened millimetre by
cable: the screen should be left unconnected play board: use aphotocopy of Fig. 13 as millimetre with sharp side-cutting pliers until
at the front panel. This method of building template. the waveform is correct. Take care not to
is necessary, because functional tests will be Fit the mains transformers on the bottom damage the enamel insulation. In some cases,
carried out before the overall construction is panel of the enclosure, and the mains entry it may be found that the capacitance of the
begun. and on/off switch to the rear panel. track on the board is sufficient and C137 is
Connect asuitable 9 V supply to the rel- Finally, make all electrical connections not required at all.
PULSE SHAPER
by T. Giffard
T
HE diagram shows how the four gates apulse for every edge of the input signal: the delayed signal at pin 12. Because of the
contained in a4077 may be used to build the pulse width is determined by the inter- XNOR function of ICi d,any level difference
acircuit that doubles the frequency of asignal delay of gates ICi a—ICi c.
To that end, the between the two is translated into alevel
nal applied to it. In other words, it generates original signal at pin 13 is compared with change at the output of ICid.
The quiescent output level at pin 11 is set
by connecting the ± input of ICi a to ground
or to the +ve supply rail. If it is taken to
ground, ICi d delivers azero level followed by
positive pulses for each of the edges of the
input signal. If it is linked to the +ve supply
rail, ICi d outputs ahigh level followed by neg-
ative pulses for each of the edges of the input
signal.
Instead of a4077, a4030 or 4070 may be
used, in spite of the fact that these have XOR
instead of XNOR gates. Only the pulse width
of the output signal will be slightly different
owing to the changed transfer time in the gates.
The current drawn by the circuit depends
on the signal frequency: at very low frequencies,
it is virtually nil.
WorldRadioHistory
DESIGN IDEAS
The contents of this column are based solely on information supplied by
the author and do not imply practical experience by Elektor Electronics
6-digit coded a.c. power switch
by K.A. Nigim, B.Sc., Ph.D., MIEEE
1-"\ IGITALLY coded switches are useful switch to change its current state, and in series with it. The capacitor discharges
Land have many applications: for the in- • auto-reset the circuit in readiness for the slowly through the resistor shunting it every
dividual who does not want to carry aheavy second command. time the switch is released, thus eliminating
bundle of keys for his home or his business The circuit, whose diagram is given in switch bounce effects.
premises; in industry, remote or coded switched Fig. 1, is built around four Type 4013BE When the first digit has been entered cor-
power devices are also appreciated. CMOS dual D-type bistable (flip-flop) ICs, rectly, ahigh level is applied to pins 10 and
The 6-digit coded power switch described aType 4069B inverter IC, aType MOC3063 11 of IC I,which results in achange from
in this article can be used to switch a.c. loads optoisolator and aType BTA 26-600B triac. low to high at pin 12 of this IC. That is the
of up to 25 A ON and OFF directly. Moreover, initializing pulse and the aim is to use this to
the output signal from the electronic cir- Coding section command the power switch to change its
cuitry can be used to interface with many The push-button keyboard is connected to the state. Therefore, the pulse is fed directly to
alarm and control systems. main circuit board via a12-way PCB termi- the data input (pin 5) of IC 2,waiting for the
The six digits are keyed in one at atime, nal connector, allowing an easy and quick way second digit to be entered to the clock input
in the correct sequence, on astandard 4x3 to change the proper number. After the wanted (pin 3).
telephone-type keyboard. In case of awrong six digits have been chosen (here, 012457), The data is transferred to the output port
code being input, asignal is available to ac- the remainder, except the one for manual reset, (pin 1), which in turn is connected directly
tuate an alarm circuit or buzzer. When that are tied to the dummy switch terminal. to the data input of IC 2b(pin 9) waiting for
happens, the system can be disarmed with a The circuit is powered by a9-12 V reg- the third digit to be entered to pin 11.
secret reset button that may be any number ulated d.c.source. The common terminal of This process continues until all six digits
on the keyboard. the keyboard is connected to the positive have been keyed in, one at atime, in the cor-
Assuming acorrect code is input, asig- rail. Whenever aswitch is pressed, ahigh level rect sequence. The pulse has then moved from
nal is transmitted to potential is applied rapidly to the appropri- the first bistable (flip-flop) to the latch part
• alatch circuit that commands the power ate input and charges the capacitor connected of IC4a .It is possible to add as many digits
Fig. 1. Circuit diagram of the 6-digit coded a.c. power switch.

DF:SION IDEAS 79
to the code as wanted merely by increasing by T1;the delay is the time constant of net- Fig. 2to make it suitable for use with large
the number of bistables: two digits per IC. work 3-phase powered industrial loads.
When awrong digit is keyed in, the state The slave relay. Re l.is energized or de-
of pin 2of IC Iis changed instantly and ahigh Latch and triac driver energized depending on the state of the latch
or low level output is available for use with After the correct code has been entered. the port (pin 1) of IC 4„. When the output signal
an alarm circuit or asimple buzzer. The cir- output pulse will disappear as soon as the auto- is high. the relay coil is energized and power
cuit is reset with the secret switch, here Sio. reset signal is applied. To drive the power is supplied to the coil of master relay Re,. The
To reset the circuit automatically every switch, the output (pin 1) of abistable or three contacts of that relay then close and
time the correct code is entered, the reset latch in IC 4„will stay on or off until asec- supply power to the 3-phase load. When the
line is given a20 ms delay pulse, generated ond signal is generated by the same code. A output signal is low, the slave relay is deen-
green LED, D. will light to indicate asuc- ergized and breaks the supply to the master
cessful entry and the latch state. relay. whose contacts thereupon open and
It was found that every time the power remove the power from the load.
supply is switched on, afalse trigger could
be intiated by the latch and, therefore, the reset Construction
input (pin 4) of IC 4„is disabled for an in- Construction of the switch unit is straight-
stant by adelayed high signal via IC 5b. The forward. Connect the common line of the key-
delay is determined by R19—C 10 . board to the positive supply rail. Set the re-
The output of the latch is buffered and con- quired code, reset and dummy digits. Insert
nected to the zero-crossing optoisolator. The all resistors and capacitors. Insert IC Iand test
input current to IC6 is limited to 15 mA by the operation of the reset, dummy inputs and
R,2. The use of azero-crossing isolator mini- the first digit. When any dummy switch is
mizes the electromagnetic interference nor- pressed. the output of pin 2of IC I should
mally associated with switching power de- change state. Proceed with inputting the cor-
vices and isolates the electronics from the rect first digit and examine the existence of
mains supply. the initializing pulse at pin 12 of IC I.When
The a.c. load is connected to the mains all is well, insert the remainder of the ICs
via asuitable load-rated triac mounted on and follow the pulse every time the next
an appropriate heat sink. To drive aload of digit is keyed in. An auto-resetting pulse
up to 25 A, atriac Type BTA 26-600B orequiv- must be initiated at the end of the process.
alent can be used mounted on a2.4-3.3 K/W Varying the value of R19 will change the
Fig. 2. Slave-master relay configuration heat sink. Suppressor network 12, 5—C 11 is reset time. The green LED (D2) will change
for use with large industrial systems. included for loads with apoor power factor state after asuccessful entry.
(≤0.6). The triac must be mounted well away
from the main logic board to avoid potentially Caution
fatal electric shocks. Great care should be taken when wiring the
PARTS LIST
Although the circuit described has been power switch, since it carries mains voltage.
designed primarily for driving single-phase During testing, connect a40-1(X) W bulb in
Resistors:
a.c. loads, it can be modified by adding the place of the load: this should change state
R1, R3, R5, R7, R9, All, R13,
R15 = 22 k12, 0.5 W
slave-master relay configuration shown in every time the correct code is entered. •
R2, R4, R6, R8, R10, R12, R14
R16 = 220 k12
R17, R26 = 3.3 k12
R18, R20 =10 k12
NORMAN H. CROWHURST
R19, R21 = 1.5 ki2
1913-1991
R22 = 1 k12
R23, R24 = 330 12 Iam profoundly saddened to report that Nor- tional Council of Teachers of Mathematics, and
man H. Crowhurst died on March 7, 1991 after Professional Engineers of Oregon.
R25 = 39 12,, 3 W
abrief illness. He was 77. Born November 3, He worked as editor at several British and US
1913 in Southend-on-Sea, England, he earned publishing houses both on staff and as acon-
Capacitors: degrees at Streatham Hill College and at sultant. He also spent two years working at Fair-
C1-08 = 2.2 nF, ceramic Goldsmith's College, S.E. London Technical Col- child Recording Equipment Company.
09, 010 = 22 uF, 16 V, electrolytic lege, where he was later asenior lecturer. Mr. Mr. Crowhurst was best known to electronics
C11 = 0.1 1tF, 400 V, metallized Crowhurst's career began at Johnson 8z Phillips buffs, and especially audiophiles during the
polypropylene Ltd. In 1935 he became Chief Engineer at Tan- 1950s and '60s, as an author on audio theory and
noy, Ltd. where he remained for ten years. construction. He developed many unique an-
He and his wife emigrated to the US in 1953. swers to problems, such as astereo power am-
Semiconductors:
He was honored with aFellowship by the Audio plifier which sported only one pair of output
IC1-1C4 = 4013 BE
Engineering Society in 1959. He and Mrs. Crow- tubes but two transformers. He had an unusually
105 = 4069 BE hurst became naturalized citizens on Nov. 17, clear writing style and an exceptional ability to
I06 = MOO 3063 1960. explain difficult theoretical concepts in terms
T1, T2 = BC109 Norman Crowhurst was certainly one of the beginners could understand. He had aremark-
D1, D3 = 1N4001 most prolific of authors in the audio field, hav- able number of admirers among his readers who
D2 = LED. green ing contributed to 32 commercial publications credited him with being the first author to stim-
and to many professional journals. He once ulate their appreciation for audio and electronics.
Tril = BTA 26-600B
claimed to have written over 2,000 articles and In mid-October of 1990 the bicycle he was
papers and some 50 books. He held anumber riding was struck by apassing car, in his adopted
Miscellaneous: of patents. home town of Dallas, OR. Medical examination
Keyboard = standard 34 He was an associate member of the British IEE, revealed little or no obvious damage but he failed
12-way PCB connector for keyboard Senior member of British Sound Recording to recover completely. He became ill in late
Rel = miniature relay, 12 V, 400 S2 Association, amember and fellow (1959) of the February and was bedridden for much of each
coil; 3 A contacts AES ;and amember of SMPTE, IEEE, ASE, Na- day. His death came suddenly from heart failure.
Re2 = specified by the load
WorldRadioHistory
80
ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL

by Douglas Clarkson
I T IS one thing to be remembered for a

single clever invention, quite another to
the 'harmonic telegraph', asystem for load-
ing asingle telepgraph line with multiple
vide help to deserving organizations and
individuals. A large amount of funding, for
have made worthwhile contributions in a channels of communications, where each example, was provided for educating the
broad range of disciplines. The overwhelming channel had aharmonic frequency that could deaf.
importance of Bell's invention of the artic- be sent independently over asingle wire. Some of the most touching photographs
ulate telephone overshadows many of his While the commercial advantage of increasing in the Bell archives are those of Bell with
other contributions to the education of the the data throughput on existing telegraph Helen Keller, who was blind and deaf from
deaf, aeronautics, telegraphy and marine en- lines was significant, it was left to Bell to an early age. This is where the humanity of
gineering. It is obvious that he was driven pursue his vision of the usefulness of the tele- the man can be most visibly discerned. In
by strong humanitarian instincts to use the phone privately. fact, reading of the intensity that such mat-
emerging technology for the benefits of so- Bell first succeeded in transmitting oral ters were given over 100 years ago, the
ciety in general. sounds in Boston on 2June 1875 after dis- question begs to be asked: "Are we doing
Events in his personal life highlighted his covering that plucking reeds on the harmonic enough today?". In all, funding of around
awareness of the problems created by physi- telegraph could induce an undulating cur- $450,000 was channelled into the educa-
cal handicaps. Bell was born in Edinburgh rent which would cause the receiving reeds tion of the deaf during his lifetime.
in 1847 and his mother suffered asevere hear- to vibrate audibly. Bell refined this system Another significant technical develop-
ing impairment that gave him an insight in January 1876 when he wrote the patent ment was the audiometer, adevice used for
into the problems of communication thus application to include avariable resistance the assessment of hearing impairment. After
created. His father, Andrew Melville Bell, device (microphone) in the transmit section. winning the prestigious Volta Prize in 1880,
was aprominent teacher of the deaf who, The patents was filed on 14 February and the Bell helped set up the Volta Laboratory,
in 1862, published aprogressive treatise system was successfully demonstrated on 10 which succeeded in developing Edison's
on 'visible speech'—a method of teaching March. The world was then at his feet. phonograph into asuccessful commercial
deaf individuals to vocalize and not use After the development of the telephone, product (called gramophone).
sign language. Bell found much of his time taken up with His interest in various fields was in some
In Scotland, Alexander Graham Bell's protecting his series of patents. In all, around instances prompted by personal tragedy.
health had never been good and his younger 600 challenges were made. By today's stan- Following the death of his infant son from
brothers had died at an early age of respi- dards, Bell was fortunate to have won ase- arespiratory complaint, he developed an `ar-
ratory problems. A subsequent move of his ries of legal arguments raised by major tele- tificial lung', forerunner of the iron lung ven-
family in 1870 to Canada and then to Boston graph companies, such as Western Union, tilator. He was also aware of the possibili-
in the USA succeeded in restoring his well- seeking to develop their own implementa- ties of the use of radium for the treatment
being, though his health would from time tions of the telephone. No doubt, the re- of cancer as early as 1903. After the loss of
to time suffer from excessive overwork. spectful appearance of Bell helped in se- the Titanic, he experimented with early
Being the son and grandson of speech curing of what was in effect amonopoly of forms of the sonar system.
therapists, Bell was fascinated by all as- all telephone communication in North America. Bell was later to return to Canada amid
pects of speech relating to education and The tale of the commercial exploitation the rugged scenery of Cape Breton Island
training of the deaf. In 1874 he developed of the telephone is at least as important as where at Baddeck he built his beloved house
the 'photoautograph'—a device that incor- the technical development of the product, `Beinn Breagh'. It was here that Bell under-
porated ahuman ear and produced avisi- though this is seldom touched upon. The gen- took investigations into diverse fields, such
ble indication of sounds on smoked glass. eral principle that the financial guardians as aeronautics, marine engineering and even
With this apparatus, sounds constructed by of the Bell system followed was that at each the breeding of sheep. Bell's wife Mabel,
ateacher could be copied by adeaf pupil. stage of its growth the company was not to whom he met as one of his deaf pupils in
Unfortunately, the device provided insuffi- be constrained, particularly as regards capi- 1873, took an active interest in his various
ciently sensitive for practical use. Modern talization. It was determined, for instance, projects. Indeed, as amajor shareholder in
technology has since implemented the idea that the State of New York provided the the Bell Telephone System, she was amajor
in diverse ways with the use of, for exam- most liberal policies for effective financ- source of funding, especially for aviation
ple, frequency analysis and microprocessor- ing of the company. projects.
based displays. At each stage in the rapid expansion of Mabel, in fact, suggested the formation
Bell's most productive period dates from the Bell system, there was always the dan- of the Aerial Experiment Association. Efforts
1871 when he began teaching at Sarah Fuller's ger that its very success would bring about in flight development were rewarded by
school in Boston by day and experiment- its downfall. Bell, however, was not adi- the flight in 1909 of the Silver Dart—the first
ing in the fields of electricity and acoustics rect player in commercial wheeling and powered flight in Canada. Investigations
by night. In 1873, he gained access to the dealing and left that up to individuals like of this group led to the independent devel-
research laboratories of the University of Gardiner Hubbard, his father-in-law. One opment of the aileron—essential for stable,
Boston following his appointment there as of the main problems of insufficient capital controlled flight. Marine engineering held
Professor of Vocal Physiology. Up to the funding arose from Hubbard's insistence that his interest in later years, resulting in the
emergence of the telephone in 1876, how- the telephone equipment should be rented development of the HD-4 hydrofoil, which
ever, he had to supplement his small in- and not purchased outright. This was char- in 1919 achieved arecord speed of 70 m.p.h.
come by taking private classes as ateacher acteristic of Hubbard's company that man- in the Bay of Baddeck.
of the deaf. ufactured and leased sewing machines. Bell was ever ready to give encourage-
It is quite clear that success with the tele- With his financial position now assured, ment to others directly involved in scien-
phone could have come much sooner if Bell Bell's role became one of awealthy phil- tific experimentation. He provided funds,
had been allowed to follow his own intuition. anthropist who was able to to devote time for example, for the Michelson-Morley ex-
His sponsors were more concerned with to what interested him personally and pro- periment to detect the presence of the ether.
WorldRadioHistory
ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL 81
Bell was also largely responsible for rais- Readers interested in the history of ner in a Cleveland firm that manu-
ing the esteem of the National Geographic communications may find it intrigu- factured telegraphic instruments.
Magazine to that of aglobal publication ing to learn that A.G. Bell's patent ap- Gray and his partner, Enos Barton.
following the death of its founder, Gardiner plication made it by afew hours, be- transformed the company into America's
Hubbard, in 1891. cause later on 14 February 1876 a leading maker of electrical apparatus:
Setting aside the hugely important in- second patent for the telephone was the Western Electric Manufacturing
vention of the telephone, Alexander Graham lodged by Elisha Gray. The applica- Company, which eventually became
Bell should be remembered largely for demon- tions were virtually identical, de- Western Electric, the sole supplier
strating in his various activities that tech- scribing the electrical transmission of telegraphic equipment to Western
nology should be developed and imple- and reception of human speech by Union.
mented for the ultimate benefit and wel- variations in the resistance of the It is a curious fact that most ex-
fare of the individual. There can be no doubt, transmitter (microphone). perts in telegraphy, including Gray,
however, that the tremendous advances in Elisha Gray (1835-1901) was a misjudged the importance of the tele-
world-wide communications that continue professional inventor whose first patent phone, whereas Bell had always be-
to develop, and which have their origin in (granted in 1867) was for a self-ad- lieved that the telephone would even-
his work, are a major factor in removing justing telegraph relay. This proved tually be of far greater importance
artificial barriers of nationality, culture and to be of interest to the Western Union than the telegraph. History has proved
political systems. In this regard, therefore, Telegraph Company and so earned him right.
Alexander Graham Bell is largely respon- Gray enough money to become apart- (Editor)
sible for beginning the evolution of a'global
ELECTRONIC POWER-ON DELAY

by G. Peltz
R4—0 5. The level of the pulse is limited by D8

T
HE power supply for the delay circuit is S1 is closed, that high (12 V) signal is ap-
derived directly from the mains by abridge plied to the gate of T1,an n-channel VMOS to asafe value. When anew count cycle is
rectifier, D1-1)4.The rectifier must be able to FET. This transistor then conducts, which started, the IC is, therefore, always in its zero
handle acurrent of up to 1 A. For safety rea- causes the relay to be energized. state.
sons, resistor R1 ensures that capacitor C1 is If, as shown in the diagram, all contacts Diode D10 is afree-wheeling device to
discharged rapidly when the mains is switched of S1 are open, the gate of T1 is permanently suppress voltage peaks that are caused by
off. The resistor should, therefore, be rated connected to the positive supply rail. That the relay coil when the current through it is
at 250 V a.c. or 400 V d.c. means that as soon as the supply is switched switched off.
The direct voltage output of the rectifier on, the relay is energized. The current drawn by the circuit is deter-
is held steady at 24 V by zener diodes D6 When T1 is on, the clock input of IC 1 is mined mainly by the value of C1:in the dia-
and D7. The use of two zener diodes gives a low via D9,so that the counter is disabled. gram it amounts to about 30 mA.
stable voltage of 12 V for ICi. The rectgifier The delays that can be selected with the Caution must be exercised because the
output is smoothed by C2 and C3. DIP switch are shown in the table. The DIP circuit is connected directly to the mains.
Timing of the circuit is based on the mains switch may for convenience's sake be re- The circuit must, therefore, be tested with
frequency: the clock signal is rectified by D5 placed by abinary-coded decimal (thumb- the aid of an isolating transformer. Furthermore,
and then taken from the junction R2—R 3 at a wheel) switch. it should be built into an enclosure that makes
level of about 11 V from where it is applied Immediately after the supply is switched it impossible for mains-carrying parts to be
to pin 10 of ICI.After 2-10 clock pulses, out- on, assuming that T1 does not begin to con- touched.
put Q11 goes high. If contact 2of DIP switch duct, the IC is reset by apulse generated by
DELAY TIMES
Switches S1 Time (s)
1 3 4
0 0 0 0 0.0
0 0 0 1 5.1
0 0 1 0 10.2
0 0 I I 15.4
0 1 0 0 20.5
0 1 0 1 25.6
0 I 1 0 30.7
0 1 1 I 35.8
1 0 0 0 41.0
I 0 0 I 46.1
1 0 1 0 51.2
1 0 1 1 56.3
1 I 0 0 61.4
1 1 0 1 66.6
1 I I 0 71.7
I 1 1 1 76.8
WorldRadioHistory
82
A WORLD OF COMPUTERS
by C.C. Whitehead
I
T MAY surprise many people to learn that computer, such as, for instance, awashing plays alarge part in other organic brains.
computers have been with us since the machine, the logic and the clock are inher- Information processed in the basic com-
dawn of history—or even before! It is, how- ent in the arrangement of its components. puter may be in either analogue or digital form.
ever, only in the second half of the present There is astriking similarity between a In the `logic unit', however, it is always dealt
century that ordinary people have had them fully developed inorganic computer, that is, with in its digital form. There are only two
brought to their notice. Because of recent pub- machine, and afully developed organic com- answers to every question: yes or no, resem-
licity (among others on BBC television), the puter—the human brain. There are, how- bling aswitch that is on or off as shown in
name Babbage may stand out. But let us go ever, also several important differences be- Fig. 2. The problem represented by the switches
back to the beginning. tween them: some of these are clearly under- in that illustration—which may be trans-
Most people who have to do with com- stood, but little is understood of others. lated into analogue form at alater stage—
puters would casually describe them as 'think- One of the well-understood differences exists in the memory and logic units in the
ing machines', which would be good enough. is the 'clock rate' in terms of the number of form of apattern as shown in Fig. 3.
That brings us to consider the term 'thinking'. pulses per second. In the human brain, that It is here that the similarity between the
Immediately comes to mind the term 'intel- rate is about 16 pulses per second (although living and non-living computer stands out.
ligence'. What is intelligence? This could lead it varies in different individuals), but in the In the living human brain, there are untold
to agreat deal of controversy. Some people millions of these tiny switches, as neurolo-
say that the term 'military intelligence' is a gists will testify, very probably more than exist
contradiction in terms. But in that connection, The only thing we know with absolute in any inorganic computer. In the most highly
intelligence has adifferent meaning, best certainty about the universe in which we developed computers, they exist not only in
interpreted as 'information', upon which live is that it changes. the logic unit but in the memory as well, and
real intelligence can be brought to bear. Karl Marx this, of course, applies to the living brain.
Now we are faced with the problem of There is another important fact about all
defining intelligence. This again will cause computers, and that is that they have to be pro-
controversy, but in this article it will have inorganic computer, it may be amillion times grammed, that is, told what problem they have
the broadest definition so as to cover all pos- faster. This enables calculations to be car- to solve and how they must proceed in doing
sible cases. ried out that would be imposible in the human so. How this is done is well known to any-
The definition might be 'the ability of an brain on account of the time involved. The one who uses an inorganic computer. But how
individual to react favourably to his/her en- clock controls the speed of operation. does it apply to the living brain? The answer
vironment—that is, from the point of view A little-understood difference is emotion, is that it lies in what we call 'education', which
of the individual concerned'. about which we do not know nearly as much is said to derive from the Latin for `bringing
If we accept this definition, we realize as we would like, and only insofar as it ap- out', although it is quite obviously aprocess
that intelligence is inherent not only in human pertains to the human brain. It probably also of 'putting in'. Now you see why governments
beings, but in all living creatures and even
machines. And this is where the inorganic
The organic computer generally
computer, of which we hear so much, comes
has the ability to select its inputs
in. INPUTS (Analogue)
from the environment. In the case
This brings us back to the matter of in-
I
of an organic computer, the inputs
formation, and how it is to be transmitted. are nerve-trunks.
Using technical terms, we say that it is usu- input "wiring" of circuitry
ally transmitted in either or both of two

forms: analogue and digital. Analogue is the Information may be stored in many
form in which it is usually presented to our memories in the case of an
Translating Unit
Analogue to Digital
senses, whereas digital is the form in which inorganic computer, but the human
it is normally employed in certain units in brain has only two memories.
all computers. Memory em
2 ory
t.
As the computer machine has been de- t.
veloped, it has come more and more to re- The output wiring of circuitry in an
inorganic computer is analogous
semble the living computer—particularly the
to nerve-trunks in the organic
human brain, but with one or two important Logic Unit
computer.
differences—which we will discuss later. "Thinking" is done here
From this, it may be realized that com-

puters exist in amultitude of forms, from Bodily functions in the organic
•
the simplest machine and living creature to computer are equivalent to
Translating Unit
Digital to Analogue
the latest product of technology and the human machine and chemical processes
machine. in an inorganic computer.
Many people, particularly those with re-
Output 'wiring" of circuitry
ligious views, cannot accept the idea that physi-
cal laws appertain to living creatures. Although In an organic computer, the clock
the inescapable fact is that they do, there are rate is generally 16 pulses per *wyv •
several aspects to be taken into account. To second, but in inorganic Bodily functions
CLOCK
(Organic computer)
understand these, we have to consider the computers it may be many millions
of pulses per second.
basic form of acomputer—see Fig. 1. Although gro ron ir
this is one of the many forms that acom-

puter may take, the drawing shows all the
essential elements. In the simplest form of Fig.1. Basic form of a computer.
WorldRadioHistory
A WORLD OF COMPUTERS 83
extinct owing to the fact that they didn't have

enough intelligence to survive or did they
have intelligence and did not use it?
The dominant creature in the world today—
man—is in imminent danger of extinction if
he does not use his intelligence. To use that
intelligence, we must look at the world as it
is today.
The comment of Karl Marx quoted above
is apposite. In the world as we see it today,
that change is very rapid. Changes that in
the not too distant past would have taken a
hundred years to come about now happen in
aperiod of less than ten years.
It is the economic system brought about
by politics that decides what sort of life we
shall live or, in simple terms, how we will gain
our livelihood.
In today's technology, the computer plays
an important role. It is more than just ama-
chine. The highest state of development of
the computer shows astartling analogy with
the human brain, at least insofar as brain
function is known.
There are two basic principles used in
the design of acomputer. Any computer may
employ either or both principles. In the ear-
liest automatic machines and computers, the
Fig. 2. Computers are, basically, assemblies of switches, each of which represents a
'analogue' principle was used.
'yes' or 'no'. In this drawing there are 84 switch contacts, whose pattern is shown in
A source of electrical power is applied to
Fig. 3. It does not require much mathematical insight to see that even 84 contacts
provide an astronomical number of possible patterns. Imagine then the complexity amachine to perform acertain task. The re-
of the human brain that has millions of switch contacts. sulting output in terms of electrical power is
reversed in phase and applied to the input in
are so concerned with 'education'! common with the original input—negative
• • • Another well-developed form of inor- feedback—as illustrated in Fig. 4. This de-
• • • ganic computer is the 'automatic factory', vice is know as aservo system. In the case
where the total output of the computer is of an inorganic system, its design involves a
• • • •
translated into analogue terms to make the high standard of mathematical ability.
• •
machine work. In living creatures, there are The organic system, for instance, the human
numerous analogue units. For example, in the body, has amultitude of such servo systems
human organism, the process of translating that control the movement of muscles and
the output of the logic unit into analogue terms other body functions.
• • • • would appear to take place in the cerebel- An important difference between the in-
e • lum and the independent nervous system to organic computer and the human brain is, as
control such functions as digestion, excretion, stated before, emotion, about which, apart
• • • and the supply of hormones. from its overt effects, we know little. It in-
• • • Now, let's look at it from another angle, volves self-consciousness, which is most
that which directly concerns human con- apparent in human beings and the higher-order
• • sciousness and the nature of human think- apes.
• • s •
ing. It is important to think carefully about The science that embraces computers,
the real world in which we are living. Did calculators and robots is called cybernetics,
Fig. 3. See caption of figure 2. the dominant animals in the past become which means `steermanship'. Thus, machines
that can steer themselves towards adesired
goal. Many such machines have been in-
vented over the past two centuries at least, but
Motor effort e.g. Robot, only to perform one, or at most afew, sim-
Mechanical motor, Muscles, ple tasks, like many of our household gadgets.
Electrical motor, Required
INPUT
output
One section of acomplete computer, the
Chemical process,
All specific processes one that that is most analogous to the think-
under human control. ing part of the human brain—the cerebral cor-
tex—works on the digital principle. This is
the logic unit.
Other sections of the computer work on
the analogue principle and still others use both.
"negative feedback" in
In the organic computer, these would appear
electrical and electro-
mechanical processes
to be located in the hypothalamus, cerebel-
otherwise a human being lum and autonomous nervous system. It ap-
pears that the memories use the digital sys-
tem located in the hypothalamus, since they
obviously exist even in lowly forms of ani-
Fig. 4. In some processes, such as the performing of simple tasks by amachine, the mal life.
'feedback' control is exercised by ahuman being: this is called 'management'. The hormone system, controlling the chem
WorldRadioHistory
84 GENERAL INTEREST
istry of the blood and the beating of the heart happened in his or her childhood, but can- task to be performed and the way in which it
(which has its own servo-system) appears to not remember something that occurred yes- is to be performed, the religious person will
be controlled by the pituitary gland in the terday. aver that the programming is carried out by
hypothalamus. The digestive and excretary In order that it can function, the com- God or his counterpart, the Devil, with the
systems are controlled by the autonomous puter must be fed with information and in- connivance of family and acquaintances.
nervous system in the trunk; it is separate from structions, for which it has anumber of 'in- The agnostic or atheist will insist that pro-
the main nervous system, but partly under puts'. The human brain is fed by the five senses: gramming is nothing more than the effect of
its control. sight, hearing, touch, smell and kinanthesia. the environment—physical, political and
The most important part of both the or- These inputs enable both types of computer economic. The physical facts are obvious and
ganic and inorganic computer is the memo- to keep in touch with their environment. The not necessarily antagonistic to the religious
ries—the vital core of the whole system. organic computer has the ability to select some point of view. The political fact is that govern-
There may be many memories in an inorganic of its inputs from the environment; the inor- ments are keenly concerned with the pro-
computer system, but the human brain ap- ganic computer, however, must be programmed gramming, that is, education. And the pro-
pears to have two: the long-term memory by human beings. cess always concerns the economy.
and the short-term memory. They perform Now, 'programming' is the tricky part of If this article makes it appear that the
separate functions. An older person, whose this dialogue, since this is where the differ- whole universe is acomputer, the question
short-term memory may be failing, can nor- ent points of view come in. Since program- arises: "Who is the programmer?" II
mally recall with some clarity incidents that ming involves instructions in regard to the
RS232 FOR SHARP POCKET COMPUTERS

by S. Schmid
Pmany atricky job, owing to the small

ROGRAMMING pocket computers is nor-
keys and the small memory. The pocket com-

puters from Sharp, which can be programmed
in BASIC, have an interface that can be con-
nected to aspecial cassette interface. The sig-
nals at that interface are very similar to those
of an RS232 interface, but they are inverted
and have different logic levels. It would, of
course, be tremendous if the pocket com-
puter could be linked to larger computer via
this interface, because the writing, changing
and storing of the software could then be
done much more conveniently.
It only requires asmall circuit—see dia-
gram—to make that possible. The single 5V
supply voltage is converted into ±10 V in
ICI.With these voltages, the buffers in ICi
can convert the logic signals of the pocket com-
puter into RS232 levels. Inversion of the lev-
els is effected by four inverters in ICi.
The circuit draws acurrent of only 30 mA,
so that it can be supplied from the larger
computer.
The connector to link the interface to the
pocket computer presents alittle inconve-
nience, because its pitch (1.27) is rather un-
usual. Connectors with that pitch are normally
too long for this application: the only solu-
tion is to cut one to size!
The circuit hasbeen tested with aXON/XOFF
protocol, 2400 baud, even parity, 8data bits
and astop bit. At higher speeds, small prob-
lems arose, but that need not always be the
case, depending on the software.
The interface of the Sharp pocket com-
puter is set with
OPEN" COM:2400, E, 8,1, A, L, &H1A, X,
N": CLOSE. a

85
PROTECTION AGAINST DIRECT VOLTAGE

by W. Teder
A MPLIFIERS that have no capacitor at their can destroy the drive units. The circuit shown power supply: this minimizes any work on
..output may, in case of adefect, apply a can prevent such acatastrophy. the amplifier(s). This supply must, however,
direct voltage to the loudspeakers and this It is best to give the circuit aseparate be switched synchronously with that to the
amplifier(s), since on power-on, T1 ensures
that the relay (which switches the loudspeaker
inputs) is energized after some delay. The
delay is determined by the time-constant
R3C3.
Assuming that the amplifier operates cor-
rectly, its output signal at point bis linked to
point a, and thence to the loudspeaker(s),
via the relay contact. Owing to the time con-
stant R3—C 3,bipolar capacitor C1-C 2 cannot
be charged by the a.c. signal at point b. If, how-
ever, adefect causes adirect voltage at that
point, the capacitors will be charged via R2.
Depending on the polarity of the direct volt-
age, either T2 or T3will be switched on, which
removes the base current from T4 and this
results in the deenergizing of the relay: the
amplifier output is then removed from the
loudspeaker(s).
The supply to the protection circuit must
be neither regulated nor smoothed. True, C4
provides some smoothing, but the impor-
tant thing is that after the amplifier has been
switched off, this capacitor is discharged
more rapidly than the smoothing capacitors
in the amplifier power supply. This ensures
that the relay is deenergized before the am-
plifier can produce aclick in the loudspeaker(s).
Depending on the relay, the current drawn
by the circuit is about 50 mA. II
PARTS LIST
Resistors:
RI = 22 IQ
R2 = 1MO
R3 = 220 k1.2
R4, R6 = 10 kel
R5, R7 = 390 kS2
R8 = 470 Çà
Capacitors:
Cl, C2 =47 µF, 50 V
C3 = 47 µF, 40 V
C4 = 100 pF, 25 V
Semiconductors:
D1, D2 = 1N4148
D3 = 1N4001
D4 = LED
TI, T2 = BC550C
13 = BC560C
T4 = BC517
Miscellaneous:
Rel = 12 V relay, e.g.
Siemens V23217-A0002-A101
WorldRadioHistory
86
INTELLIGENT POWER SWITCH

by J. Ruffell
1 TEXAS Instruments' TPIC2404 is amono-

lithic, high-voltage, high-current, quadru-
*see text ple switch especially designed for driving pe-
ripheral loads, such as relays, solenoids, mo-
tors, lamps, and other high-voltage, high-cur-
rent loads from low-level logic. It can switch
currents of up to 1 A without any problem;
the current may be increased to 4 A by con-
4 12
necting four outputs in parallel. As shown
rr
R1...4
K1
4x 10k
K2 in Fig. 2, the outputs are of the open-collec-
9.24V
tor type.
o
re
5
11 o
Connected in acircuit as shown in Fig. 1,
00 o
2
1A 07 •
2 6 8
o
the chip may conveniently be used to in-
01 0 2A
3 10 crease the power handling of the Centronics
02 o 3A
r.\03
4 14
4A
K3 analogue-to-digital and digital-to-analogue
o
21 ir 3 o 1Y converter published in the May 1990 issue
22 5V 5 of Elektor Electronics. Note that the FAULT out-
Yle
o 2Y o
o IC1 3Y
13
o 2
3Y put of the IC is connected to input Il of the
o 19 • *TPIC2404 4Y o 4Y converter. This enables the TPIC2404 to in-
20
o
15 dicate the following fault conditions.
• Too high supply voltage (>25.5 V).
914091-11
• Thermal overload.
• Output short circuit.
• Loads not connected (only if outputs are
inactive).
2
The software regularly monitors the level
on line Il and will indicate afault condition.
The TPIC2404 must be fitted on to asmall
OVERVOLTAGE
ENABLE
SHUTDOWN
s heat sink: 8 cm 2 (1.5 in 2). When the chip is

used with the converter, R31 on the converter
board must be disconnected.
OVERTEMPERATUDE
SHUTDOWN •I 1.1 AMP
MAX LIMIT
MAIM
The switch draws acunent of about 100 mA
rh
when all outputs are active.
1.5 AMP
DOE ATE RATUR
MAX LIMIT
SNU DOWN
1.5 AMP
OVERTFAIPENATUDE
MAX LIMIT
INUTDONON • 12 3. 4 CLAMP
•Y
14
4A
OVERrEPAK.TURE 1 5 AMP
SHUTDOWN AX LIMIT
914091-12
CMOS DIMMER
A Siemens application
S IEMENs' Type SLB0586A IC enables the

..)simple construction of a dimmer with
touch control. Used in conjunction with aType
bulbs of 10-400 without any problem. A KO itH,
5 A inductor is needed to suppress the switch-
mains voltage via R11, C4 and D4 and these
are applied to pin 4of the IC.
ing noise. The supply voltage is obtained by means
TIC206D triac, it allows the dimming of light Synchronizing pulses are derived from the of R2, C2, D1, D2 and C3, and lies about 5.3 V

87
below the mains voltage. The touch key used

to operate the IC is connected to pin 5via two
4.7 Mû resistors, R5 and R6, to guarantee
the safety of the user.
Since dimmers are often built into an ex-
isting circuit, there is frequently aneed for op-
eration from two different locations. Conse-
quently, the diagram shows an additional
push-button switch that may be situated
well away from the touch key.
The diagram also shows three jump leads,
which are intended for selecting one of three
modes in which the IC can work. When jump
lead B is used, the light is always switched
on at the last used level, whereas when A or
C are used, the light comes on at minimum
brightness. When Bor C are used, the dim-
ming direction reverses every time dimming
is used; this is not the case when jump lead
A is used.
When the touch key is touched briefly, that
is, for 50-400 ms, the light is switched on or
off; if it is touched for alonger period, the dim-
ming cycle is started.
REF 200
A Burr-Brown application
B
URR-BROWN's REF200 provides in one
US-pin DIL package two independent cur- 1 REF 200 2
rent sources, either of which can supply 100 µA, a
Mirror 7
,1high 12 high Substrate in
r
-
and a1:1 current mirror. The pinout of the 1 1

1
device is shown in Fig. 1. Note that there 100pA
1 1
are no pins for connecting asupply voltage. 1
L _ _ __j 'out
The correct operation of the current sources
is, however, guaranteed when the potential
r— -1
across the source is not less than 2.5 V. The 1 i
I Out i
average drift with temperature is only
i MIRRORin
1
25 p.p.m. /K. The output impedance is not less I I

I corn
I
than 100 Mil. The operating voltage must not L j
exceed 40 V. 2 3 4
The two sources and the mirror make pos- to 12 L
OW Mirror
common
Mirror
out
sible anumber of configurations, some of 914120-11
which are shown in Fig. 2. That in Fig. 2a is 100mA
a50 µA current source whose output voltage

may vary between 0and the positive supply
voltage minus 2.5 V. In Fig. 2b, all parts of 4-
3009A
the IC form afloating 300 µA current source.

Finally, Fig. 2c shows abidirectional 100 µA 914120-12a
source.
1009A
914120-12c
914120,121)
WorldRadioHistory
88
WIDEBAND ANTENNA AMPLIFIER

This simple to build antenna booster offers again of some 20 dB
over afrequency range that covers the VHF FM radio band and the
whole of the UHF TV band.
an ELV design
A N antenna amplifier is useful in cases plug of the mains adaptor is inserted into the
here reception of aVHF or UHF sta- socket on the phantom supply unit, which
tion is marginal, or where several radios or takes care of the d.c. decoupling at the input
TV sets share asingle antenna. In the latter of the TV set.
case, the loss introduced by a'splitter' has to
be overcome with some additional gain.
Since an antenna amplifier raises noise as
The circuit
well as signals within its pass-band, it is es- The circuit diagram of the antenna amplifier
sential that it be mounted as close as possible is given in Fig. 2. The RF signal supplied by
to the antenna, where its beneficial effect is the antenna arrives at the input of aType
greatest. NE5205 RF integrated amplifier via input
The antenna amplifier described here is socket BU4 and coupling capacitor C3. The
designed such that it can be connected to the NE5205 raises the signal ten times, which
antenna via avery short cable, without the corresponds to avoltage gain of 20 dB. The
need of aseparate power supply being fitted output signal of the IC is fed to the input of
close by on the roof top. the TV set via capacitor C4, socket BUs, the
The amplifier is powered via the output Fig. 1. Pass -
band of the amplifier. downlead cable and the phantom supply
coax cable. This arrangement is called a unit. Inductor L2 blocks the RF signal, and so
phantom supply. Figure 1gives an indica- voltage for the phantom unit must lie be- provides ad.c. path for the positive supply
tion of the RF performance that may be ex- tween 5V and 8V d.c., and is best provided voltage on the signal connection of BUs.
pected from the amplifier. It is seen that a by asmall mains adaptor. When an unregu- Likewise, capacitor C4 blocks the d.c. supply
gain of about 20 dB is achieved at frequen- lated adaptor is used, care should be taken to voltage at the output of the amplifier IC. The
cies between 40 MHz and 860 MHz. keep the output voltage below 7V. Given IC supply voltage is decoupled for RF as well
that the current consumption of the antenna as lower frequencies by aparallel combina-
amplifier is afew milliamps only, this may tion of an SMA (surface-mount assembly) ca-
Use and function
mean that the output voltage switch must be pacitor, C6, and an electrolytic capacitor, Cs.
The antenna amplifier is inserted between set to 4.5 V, which usually gives ano-load The operation of the phantom supply
two coax connectors in the existing cable output voltage of between 6.5 V and 7 V. unit is apparent from Fig. 3. The output sig-
near the antenna. The connection is broken, Make sure that the tip of the 3.5-mm jack nal of the antenna amplifier arrives at socket
and the coax plug at the side of the antenna plug is the positive supply. The 3.5-mm jack BU2, and is fed through to BU3 via coupling
is inserted into the input socket of the an-
tenna amplifier. The amplifier output socket
is connected to the plug fitted on the down-
lead cable, i.e., the coax cable that leads to the
TV set. That is all there is to the basic instal-
lation of the amplifier.
Once installed, the amplifier provides a
gain of 20 dB, which is ample to prevent a
fairly long downlead cable or other attenua-
ting devices (including splitter boxes and
connectors) degrading the signal-to-noise
that exists at the antenna terminals — the up-
shot is that you have abetter signal/noise
ratio at the end of the downlead cable, i.e., at
the input of your TV set.
The amplifier is phantom-powered, that
is, it receives its supply voltage via the
downlead cable, obviating the need of separ-
ate (low-power d.c.) wiring. The phantom
supply for the amplifier is inserted into the
cable at the antenna input of the TV set. The
antenna plug is pulled out of the TV antenna
input, and plugged into the input of the
phantom supply unit. Next, the output plug
of the phantom supply unit is plugged into
the antenna socket on the TV set. The supply Fig. 2. Circuit diagram of the masthead amplifier.
WorldRadioHistory
WIDEBAND ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 89
capacitor C2. The output connector, BU3, is

plugged into the antenna input on the TV
set. Inductor Li prevents RF signals being
short-circuited by the power supply, and
feeds the direct voltage applied to BUl (the
supply input socket) to the core of the coax
cable. In this way, the RF signal is superim-
posed on the direct supply voltage of the am-
plifier. This supply voltage can not arrive at
the antenna input of the TV set because it is
blocked by capacitor C8.
Construction
Provided you have some experience in
working with miniature circuits, the con-
struction of the antenna amplifier is straight- Fig. 3. Phantom supply unit.
forward.
Start the construction by positioning and inductor L2 at the component side, taking the PCB, and solder one of the long sides to
soldering the three SMA capacitors at the care not to create short-circuits. the metal case, at about 4 mm from the
track side of the amplifier board. Next, The strip of sheet metal supplied with the underside of the case. Next, clamp the case
mount ICt at the component side, and solder kit is bent around the PCB edges to form the into its final shape, and solder the ends of the
its terminals at the track side. Finally, mount amplifier case. Next, the input socket and the metal plate where they join. Secure the PCB
output plug are fitted to the short sides, and in the case by soldering it all around to the
soldered at the inside of the 'case'. metal plate. Likewise seal the input and out-
Push the amplifier PCB into the case, put connector by soldering at the outside of
such that the side with the IC on it rests the enclosure. The 6-mm hole in one of the
against the pins of the coax connectors. Align long sides of the enclosure must also be
sealed by soldering.
Connect the centre pins of the coax con-
nectors on the amplifier to the copper tracks
at the other side of the board by inserting
short pieces of silver-plated wire (supplied
with the kit) into the respective holes, and
soldering at the track side and the connector
pin.
The phantom supply does not require a
separate circuit board. The input and output
coax connectors are fitted on to the metal
sheet enclosure as with the amplifier. Here,
Fig. 5. Component side view of the com- however, the 6-mm hole in one of the long
pleted amplifier board. sides is used to mount the 3.5-mm jack
socket for the d.c. supply voltage. The centre
pins of the coax connector are connected by
capacitor Cz. The centre pin of the input coax
connector is connected to the centre pin of
Fig. 4. PCB design for the RF amplifier. the supply socket via inductor Lt. Next,
solder the ground connection of the supply
socket to the inside of the enclosure. Finally,
COMPONENTS LIST fit decoupling capacitor Ci across the supply
socket terminals.
Carefully check the construction of the
Content of kit supplied by ELV
amplifier and the phantom supply unit be-
fore you run ashort test on them. Next, seal
Capacitors:
the enclosures completely by fitting the
1 820pF C2 cover plates, and soldering these securely to
3 lOnF SMA C3;C4;C6 Fig. 6. Track side view of the amplifier the enclosures.
1 22nF ceramic Cl board before it is soldered to the inside of the
enclosure.
1 100µF 16V radial C5
A complete kit of parts for the wide-
Semiconductors: band antenna amplifier described
1 NE5205 IC1 here is available from the designers'
head office and worldwide distribution
Miscellaneous:
centre:
2 20nH inductor Li ;L2
ELV GmbH
1 3.5-mm jack socket BUl
P.O. Box 1000
2 Coax socket, chassis mount BU2;BU4
D-2950 Leer
2 Coax plug, chassis mount BU3;BU5
GERMANY
2 sheet metal enclosure
70mm silver-plated wire
Telephone: +49 491-60080
1 Printed circuit board
Fig. 7. Completed phantom supply unit.
Facsimile: +49 491-72030
WorldRadioHistory
90
HEATH GC-1000
"MOST ACCURATE CLOCK"
Reviewed by William Sommerwerck
Whenever the GC-1000 has not correctly

y
OUR digital wristwatch is probably ac-
curate to 15 seconds amonth. But what decoded the time within the preceding 24
good is that accuracy if you don't have the hours, it dims the tenths-of-seconds digit in
exact time by which to set the watch? One the display. This is awarning that WWV re-
way to find it out is to tune to WWV (WWVH ception has deteriorated or become unstable.
in Hawaii) and set your watch "at the sound
of the tone." If you don't own ashortwave mine). A switch on the left turns the display
Even more accuracy on and off.
receiver, you can get aRadio Shack Talking
Clock to receive WWV at 5, 10, or 15MHz. To improve the accuracy of the displayed It may seem odd to have adisplay switch.
The voice and the beep are not the only time further, the GC-1000 includes compen- After all, if you don't wish to look at the
WWV time signals. Digital time data is also sation for propagation delay. You can set the GC-1000, you can tuck it away. The reason
buried in WWV's subcarriers. The GC-1000 distance from WWV up to 3,750 miles, in is that the GC-1000 draws a lot of power
decodes and displays that data. 250-mile increments. when the display is on. The power supply
Another available correction is for "UTC1," has abase voltage of 12V, while the display
which appears to be acompensation for the board runs at 5; the regulator must dissipate
How it works variation (about 1%) in orbital speed of the 7V at 600mA. If you intend to leave the
At its heart, the GC-1000 is aconventional earth. This is important to navigators, since display on, be sure the GC-1000 is in awell-
crystal-controlled digital clock. A 3.6MHz this variation causes aslight change in the ventilated area.
crystal oscillator, its timebase, drives the time at which the sun is directly overhead. The GC-1000 includes a speaker so you
display continuously. The uncorrected accu- (The resulting positional error is about 0.3 can hear the time announcements and once-
racy of the crystal is 1Oppm (parts per mil- of amile at the equator.) per-second beeps. A knob on the back sets
lion). That's alittle better than ±0.9 seconds Switching on UTC1 correction causes the the volume or shuts the sound off. An inter-
per day—hardly "most-accurate." displayed time and the announced time to nal jumper can be set so the audio is muted
The accuracy comes from WWV. Once fall out of synch by about àhalf second. At whenever the Hi-Spec light is not lit (the type
each minute, WWV transmits the correct the end of 1989, when aleap second was of imaginative touch that distinguishes a
time in BCD (binary-coded decimal) form, added, Iturned on UTC1 compensation and superior product).
along with synchronizing pulses. The watched to see what happened. The extra
GC-1000 decodes the time and updates the second reversed the phase of the synch er- Computer interface
display. If, for example, the correct time is ror. The once-per-second blip had been
12:42 AM, the GC-1000 forces the display to ahead of the display; it was now behind it. An RS-232 interface is available as an option
that time. The internal timebase runs the One convenient feature is the provision for for the kit. (It's standard with the assembled
display until the next WWV time is decoded. daylight-savings time. When the DST switch version.) You can set the baud rate and num-
Of course, the clock cannot know whether is on, the GC-1000 recognizes WWV's ber of stop bits, but not the parity or number
it has decoded the BCD data correctly. Noise daylight-savings time code and advances the of data bits. (This shouldn't cause aproblem,
could add or obliterate adata bit, and the logic display one hour. because most computers' serial ports are fully
circuits would be none the wiser. configurable.)
To reduce the chance of making amistake, The interface transmits the time as astring
Display of ASCII characters in the following format:
the GC-1000 keeps arunning track of the de-
coded times. When two successive times are The display uses large (% 6") LEDs and is easy
one minute apart and are consistent with the to read (even for myopic, astigmatic eyes like HH:MM:SS.S PM MM/DD/YY
currently displayed time, the GC-1000 as-
sumes these times were read correctly. The
displayed time is then updated and the green HEATH GC-1000 SPECIFICATIONS
Hi-Spec light on the front panel is turned on.
The Hi-Spec light goes off after about 10 min- Description: Crystal-controlled clock synched to WWV time code uncalibrated accuracy lOppm; displayed
time within 10mS when Hi-Spec light is lit.
utes, unless the time is again correctly
decoded. Features: Seven-digit display: hours, minutes, seconds, tenths of seconds; automatic scan of WWV 5, 10,
Heath claims the display is accurate to and 15MHz signals; 12/24-hour local-time display, or UTC; autoswitch to Daylight Savings Time; UTC-1 com-
pensation; channel lockout for unreceivable frequencies; propagation delay compensation (0-3,750 rriles in
within 10mS when the Hi-Spec light is on.' 250-mile steps).
The light is off if no recent updatings have
Power: 120 (240V AC), 50/60Hz at 100mA (50mA), or 12V DC at 750mA (150mA with display turned off).
occurred, and the clock will drift until the
next updating. Accessories: whip antenna; RG-174 antenna cable and connectors; DC power cable and plug.
How much it drifts depends on the accu-
Options: GCA-1000-1 RS-232 interface, $50 (plus shipping).
racy of the crystal. The GC-1000 can improve GCA-1000-3 computer interface software (IBM PC only), $50 (plus shipping).
the crystal's accuracy, however. Whenever GCA-1000-4 technical manual, $25 (plus shipping).
the decoded time differs from the crystal's GCA-1000-5 outdoor antenna, $100 (plus shipping).
time by more than 5mS, the clock trims the Price: GC-1000-H kit, $250 (plus shipping); GCW-1000-H assembled (includes RS-232 interface), $380
crystal frequency—by way of the varactor — (plus shipping).
to compensate. 2
WorldRadioHistory
91
(The AM/PM indication is replaced with quickly if you shut out frequencies that
spaces if the clock is set for 24-hour mode.) TABLE 1
aren't well-received.
You can set the interface to send the time MICROSOFT GUICKBASIC 4.5 PROGRAM
continuously or only when the RTS (request OPEN "MACLK" FOR INPUT AS #42
Software
to send) line is strobed. clock$ = 1NPUT$(24, #42)
CLOSE #42 The $50 software package is pricey, but it
The optional software (described later) is PRINT clock$
for the IBM PC and compatibles. However, delivers the goods. 6 You get three programs,
any computer with a serial port, and soft- plus full assembly-language source code. Un-
ware to control it, can read the time from Of course, you can correct this with an fortunately for Macintosh or NeXT owners,
the GC-1000. adapter. But you should fix the problem by Heath supplies only IBM software.
replacing the Heath-supplied 25-pin male MACLOCK.COM reads the GC-1000 and
connector with afemale connector. Be sure sets the system clock. You would normally
Documentation to wire the data line to pin 3 instead of 2. call MACLOCK from AUTOEXEC.BAT, to
You'll also need to move the RTS (request reset the time (and date) when you reboot.
The instruction manual, schematics, and pic-
to send) line over to pin 4. You can also call it at any time from the com-
torials meet Heath's usual high standards of
mand line to update the system clock.
completeness and accuracy. The theory of
The year in the GC-1000's output—which
operation section is also typical Heath—badly Calibration
can be between 1983 and 1998—is set by
written and poorly organized. The author Follow the instructions exactly for the four DIP switches on the RS-232 interface
doesn't know much about electronics 3 and calibration, and you should be dead-on the board. It's inconvenient to open the cabinet
less about astronomy. For example, he or she first time. each December 31st, but MACLOCK pro-
confuses the normal change in earth's veloci- I've owned the GC-1000 for 18 months, vides asolution—which also takes care of the
ty as it circles the sun with the wobble of and the calibration seems to hold. The clock next century. Set the DIP switches for aleap
the earth's axis and the irregular changes in always locks on to the time code in the year (1984, 1988, 1992, or 1996), then specify
the length of the year. morning, after lock is lost at night. However, the current year on MACLOCK' scommand
The manual is particularly unclear on the on one occasion Ilost AC power for several line. This way you must edit only abatch
meaning and use of UTC1 correction. (The hours. At power-up, the clock refused to lock file. Itested it for 2001, and it worked.
author obviously doesn't understand it.) Un- on, even after half a day. Irepeated the MACLKDVD.SYS is asystem driver loaded
fortunately, my copy of Reference Data for calibration, and the clock locked on within by CONFIG.SYS. Your own software can
Radio Engineers is 15 years old; WWV did not a few minutes. then call MACLKDVD to read the time. The
incorporate this correction at that time. Idon't know why this occurred. However, programs in Tables Iand 2, one in Microsoft
the calibration trimmers (R434 and 444) are QuickBASIC 4.5 and the other in Microsoft
cheap, unsealed carbon pots. Ireplaced them QuickPascal 1.0, show how this works.
Assembly with sealed, plastic-film trimpots. (Cermet SHOWCLK.COM displays a graphical
Heath rates the GC-1000 as a"level 2" proj- should be okay, too.) They have less back- representation of the GC-1000's front panel
ect—moderately complex. No tight mechan- lash and are probably more stable. on the screen. Even the status LEDs blink.
ical work is required, but you must solder It's cute, but if you have Windows 3.0 (and
fine wires to connector pins, which takes a Locking on these days, who doesn't?), you already have
light touch. Only the large number of parts the digital-clock utility program.
For obvious reasons, the GC-1000 has no
might be intimidating. A self-assured begin-
power switch. When you first plug it in, the
ner shouldn't have any trouble. Conclusion
time-display LEDs are off; only the tenths-
Iambled through assembly in about 15
of-a-second decimal point is lit. You'll see the Heath occasionally comes up with a bril-
hours. (A fast worker might knock it off on
scan LEDs lighting, in turn, as the receiver liantly designed, truly innovative product.
asingle long Saturday.) Despite my leisure-
moves from 5to 10 to 15MHz, and then starts The GC-1000 is one of them. If you have
ly pace, Istill managed to put one of the
over. even the least desire to own the "Most-
board connectors on backwards.
Don't expect to get the exact time imme- Accurate Clock," buy it. You won't be
The GC-1000 worked correctly when I
diately. The GC-1000 must find a clean disappointed.
turned it on, except for one of the LEDs. I
WWV broadcast, then read the correct time
found the problem—an unsoldered joint—
in about two minutes. three times in arow. This can take from four
minutes to several hours. In Seattle, the best REFERENCES
reception is during daylight; the GC-1000 1. The display's resolution is only 0.1 sec-
Assembly hints and tips quickly loses lock at sunset. ond, so this spec must refer to how accu-
You may find that one frequency gives rately tenths-of-seconds are updated.
The kit includes four M3 x8mm self-tapping
consistently better reception than the others. 2. Heath does not specify the ultimate ac-
screws (key F2) that hold the regulator heat-
(In Seattle, it's 15MHz.) Three DIP switches curacy of the timebase, only that the accu-
sink to the board and attach asmall PC board on the bottom control which frequencies are racy will improve after the GC-1000 has
to the top of the heatsink. They're made of scanned. The GC-1000 will lock on more warmed up and has had several days to trim
soft metal and shear off when screwed into
the crystal.
the heatsink. Buy steel screws and save your-
3. I'm an electrical engineer and aprofes-
self alot of trouble. 4 (I had to remove two
TABLE 2 sional technical writer. I have room to
broken screws with Vise-Grips.) "Tap" the
MICROSOFT GUICKPASCAL 1.0 PROGRAM criticize.
heatsink with the screws before installing it
PROGRAM ReadClock; 4. Other Heathkits—such as the ET-1000
or the PC board. VAR clockfile :TEXT;
Circuit Trainer—use the same soft screws.
The GCA-1000-1 RS-232 interface is non- time :STRING124];
BEGIN You have been warned.
standard. It's wired as DTE (data terminal Assign (clockfile, 'MACLK'); 5. Want proof? Ibought a Kurta IS/ONE
equipment) and uses amale connector. Since ReSet (clockfile);
(clockfile, time):
tablet. Its IBM interface has a female con-
the GC-1000 is a controlled device (like a ReadLn
WriteLn (time); nector and is wired DCE.
modem or aprinter), it should be wired as Close (clockfile); 6. Heath should offer the interface and the
DCE (data communication equipment) and END.
software as a single $50 package.
have a female connectons
WorldRadioHistory
92
valuable working tool for mathematicians,

BULLOCK ON BOXES
By Robert M. Bullock III NEW BOOKS computer scientists, researchers, and grad-
uate students interested in combinatorics,
with Robert White combinatorial algorithms, cryptography, in-
ISBN 0-9624191-5-X course book by many technical colleges) and formation compression and transmission,
74 pages—illustrated to the serious enthusiast. and mathematical applications in engineer-
Price $10.95 plus postage (softcover) Butterworth-Heinemann ing fields.
Since 1980, Bob Bullock has been writing ar- 80 Montvale Ave. Springer-Verlag
ticles on vented-box loudspeaker systems for Stoneham, MA 02180 175 Fifth Ave.
Speaker Builder. These articles, known for New York, NY 10010
their scope and clarity, have now been col-
lected into Bullock on Boxes.
The book is an easy-to-read guide to design-
ENCYCLOPEDIA OF ELECTRONIC AUDIO ANTHOLOGY VOLUME 4
ing and building vented-box systems based
CIRCUITS—VOLUME 3 Compiled by C.G McProud
on Thiele/Small models. In addition to the
By Rudolf F. Graf ISBN 0-9624191-9-2
background theory and descriptions of the
ISBN 0-8306-7348-2 Price $16.95 (softcover)
models, it carefully covers much related in-
832 pages—illustrated This book is areprint of acollection by the
formation drawn from numerous resources.
Price $60 (hardcover) founder/editor of Audio Engineering, and was
Computer modeling, as demonstrated by the
Encyclopedia of Electronic Circuits Vol. 3 is first published in 1958. Articles were selected
author's BOXRESPONSE and BOXMODEL
not arevision of the earlier two volumes, but from the pages of what had then become
programs, is also explained in clear detail.
offers hundreds of new electronic circuits Audio magazine. It is the fourth of the six vol-
A professor of applied mathematics at Mi-
from awide variety of sources, from Moto- umes in the series.
ami University (Ohio) and along time hands-
rola, Texas Instruments, and other world-re- Apart from transistors and amplifiers, the
on speaker buff, the author brings an un-
nowned leaders of the electronics industry book also covers anumber of tube circuits.
paralleled breadth of experience to Bullock
to magazines such as Popular Electronics, Elec- This is especially apposite today when vac-
on Boxes. Fully indexed and referenced, with
tronics International Today, Elekor Electronics, uum tube technology is being rediscovered
glossary, bibliography, and more than 100 il-
and others. and offered by a host of manufacturers in
lustrations, the work is apractical handbook
The book is extremely well organized and what is termed "the high end" of audio.
and lasting reference indispensable to every
easy to use: any subject contained in the Also included are "How to Plan Your Hi-
serious speaker builder.
100+ chapters, from "Active Antennas" Fi System," 12 amplifiers and preamplifiers,
Old Colony Sound Lab
through "Digital-to-Analog Converters" to an introduction to solid-state techniques, six
PO Box 243
"Window Detectors," can be found in sec- loudspeaker designs, and some designs for
Peterborough, NH 03458-0243
onds. Apart from avery useful, comprehen- tape amplifiers for stereo tape playback: a
sive Sources Index, there is an excellent, very new technology in those days.
highly detailed Subject Index covering no This fourth collection reflects the matur-
PRINCIPLES fewer than 36 pages. ing of home sound systems, the appearance
OF TRANSISTOR CIRCUITS Encyclopedia of Electronic Circuits Vol. 3is of stereo, and the beginnings of an evolution
Seventh Edition areference guide for anyone needing quick toward solid-state devices. It provides aclear
By S.W. Amos answers to specific design problems. It should and authoritative picture of audio as acraft
ISBN 0-408-04851-4 be on the bookshelves of any college or uni- in the late 1950s.
351 pages versity library and, indeed, of anyone inter- Audio Amateur Publications
Price $39.95 (softcover) ested in electronics. 305 Union St.
Although the use of integrated circuits has Tab Books (A Division of McGraw-Hill) PO Box 576
become all encompassing since the previous Blue Ridge Summit, PA 17294-0850 Peterborough, NH 03458-0576
edition of this book, there is still arole for
discrete transistors, particularly where appre-
ciable power output or high-voltage opera-
tion is required. Discrete transistors are also Mail Call
likely to be used in experimental work and SEQUENCES When writing to AAP, please indicate on the
Edited by Renato M. Capocelli outside of your envelope the appropriate de-
in the early stages of design of electronic
partment to which the letter should be di-
equipment. ISBN 3-540-97186-6 rected—circulation, advertising, editorial,
Like its predecessors, this book deals in de- 549 pages graphics, Old Colony. Or if it should go to a
tail with the design of amplifiers, receivers, Price $49.50 specific person—the publisher or one of the con-
tributing editors. Or indicate if it is an article
and digital circuits that use discrete compo- This volume contains all the papers presented submission, aletter, an order ... something to
nents, but the text has been updated through- at the 1988 Advanced International Work- help us determine who should receive the let-
out. Some dated material has been removed, shop on Sequences: Combinatorics, Com- ter. Also, please indicate the appropriate mag-
azine on the envelope—Speaker Builder, Audio
while anumber of old circuit diagrams have pression and Transmission, which brought
Amateur, Glass Audio, or Elektor Electronics USA.
been replaced by modern ones. together for aweek computer scientists, lead- Please also include an SASE if you expect a
A number of useful appendices provide in- ing mathematicians, and experts in various reply or two international postal reply coupons
(available at your post office) if your correspon-
formation on transistor manufacturer and allied fields.
dence must be sent overseas. Your cooperation
parameters. The work provides an up-to-date view of will help ensure that your order is processed
The work should be of great interest to the the status of anumber of relevant topics in quickly, your manuscript is reviewed in a
student of electronics/electrical engineering theoretical computer science and suggests di- timely fashion, your letter is forwarded to the
appropriate person, and so forth. We thank you.
(it has already been adopted as astandard rections for future research. It constitutes a
WorldRadioHistory
TELL OUR ADVERTISERS YOU SAW THEIR AD IN ELEKTOR.
93
MAKE CIRCUIT BOARDS THE NEW EASY WAY

THE LATEST ISSUE OF
IS NOT
E
LEKTOR FAR OFF!
E
LECTRONICS
WITH TEC-200 FILM
JUST 3 EASY STEPS:
• Copy circuit on TEC-200 film using any • Iron film on to copper clad board
USA IT CAN BE FOUND
AT THESE LOCATIONS:
plain paper copier or laser printer • Peel off filrn and etch
Tri-Tek HSC Electronic Supply Tapco Engineering
SATISFACTION GUARANTEED 1639 4-th St NE
901-1 N 23rd Ave 11 4837 Amber Lane
convenient 81/
2 x 11 size
Phoenix, AZ Sacramento, CA Cedar Rapids, IA
5-Sheets for $3.95 10-Sheets only $5.95
add $1.50 postage NY res, add sales tax Gateway Electronics HSC Electronic Supply BIM Electronics
9222 Chesapeake Dr 3500 Ryder St 4204 Overland Rd
The MEADOWLAKE Corp.
Dept E, P.O. Box 497, Northpon, NY 11768 San Diego, CA Santa Clara, CA Boise, ID
Henry Radio Gateway Electronics Gateway Electronics

2050 S Bundy Dr 2525 N Federal Blvd 8123 Page Blvd
Los Angeles, CA Denver, CO St Louis, MO
MOUTH
Powell's Technical Books
WORD OF 33 NW Park
Portland, OR
Cody Books Ltd.
Helps us grow, means a stronger publication 1122 Fir Ave
that can do more of the things that need doing Blaine, WA
RP Electronic Co
in the pursuit of better electronic systems. If 2113 W 4th Ave
you have friends, associates, relatives or even Vancouver, BC
CANADA
enemies who share your enthusiasm for
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS tell us their names
If you prefer
and addresses, and we will send the word
home delivery
along. THANKS use the handy
subscription card
enclosed.
RECOMMENDED SOURCES FOR
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA
EUROPEAN PARTS
Borbely Audio ELV France

Erno Borbely BP 40
Melchior Fanger Strasse 34A F-57480 Sierck-les-Bains
Each binder holds 11 issues with wires
8031 Neu-Gilching France
so you don't have to punch holes Germany Tel 33-82-83-72-13
in your magazines. Tel 49-8105-5291 Fax 33-88-83-81-80

Fax 49-8105-24805 (24H)
High quality, book binder cloth
Technomatic
construction. The logo is stamped in gold Meek It Electronics Technohouse
Rob Planken 486 Church Lane
Payelmensgracht 35A London NW9 8UF
2515 BL Den Haag United Kingdom
The Netherlands Tel 44-081-205-9558
Tel 31-70-809554 Fax 44-081-205-0190
Fax 31-70-391L9707
Bull Electrical
C-IElectronics 250 Portland Road
PO Box 22089 Hove
6360 AB Nuth Sussex BN3 5QT
Shipping: Postpaid in US. The Netherlands United Kingdom
Canada and Caribbean, please add $4 for one, $2 Fax 31-48-841877 Tel 44-0873-203500
for each additional binder. Fax 44-0873-23077
Overseas, please add $4 per binder.

Note: Although some numbers above may seem
to be too long/short, they are correct as shown.
USA residents need to preface calls with "011".

94
SINGLE-CHIP MAINS SUPPLY

A Harris application
H ARRIS's Type HV-2405E IC, connected therefore, also at mains potential. Great care it: touching certain parts is potentially lethal!
with afew external components as shown should thus be exercised when working on
in the diagram, enables the direct derivation
of aregulated 5-24 Vd.c. supply from a100-260 V
a.c. mains supply. The peak output current F1 R1 5W
of the device is 50 mA. loon
The chip contains apre-regulator that ar- 63mA R2
ranges the charging of C2, a•fairly large ca- o
o P1
pacitance, at the onset of each period of the 5W 25k
mains voltage. The charging continues until
the potential across the capacitor has reached
a level that is roughly the wanted output
plus 6V.
When that state is reached, C, provides the
voltage necessary for the series regulator )
I" IC1
5 -24V
also contained in the IC. The output of this
100 -260VRms HV4205E
Imax = 5 °mA
regulator can beset between 5V and 24 V with

Uout = 5 +—
1
P000
Pi,and is available at pin 6.
The load current will discharge C2 to some 1 13 2
extent, but the pre-regulator ensures that ad-

Cl C2 C3 C4 C5
equate recharging takes place during every Balm 01 mma 4u7
period of the mains supply. 35V
47730V 47075V - 70p 701..
WARNING. Since the circuit and its out- • -0®
put is connected electrically to the mains, 914113-11
any apparatus connected to the circuit is,
I ELECTRONICS SCENE I
FULL-FEATURED TINY E/EEPROM PROGRAMMER WITH
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BUILT-IN ERASER
The Micro-440 from Blue Earth Research Engineers and hobbyists can now program
is asingle board controller designed for in- their own E/EEPROMs with the stand-alone
dustrial control, data acquisition, home auto- Model 9850 personal programmer with a
mation, and OEM applications. It is based built-in UV eraser (Model 9850UV) from
on a 12MHz Intel 83C51FB microcontroller American Reliance. Each model can pro-
and can be programmed from aterminal or gram 2716 to 27513 EPROMs and 2804 to
PC for remote stand-alone or local interac- 28256 EEPROMs. They can operate alone or
tive operation. On-chip software allows the through a remote PC hook-up. Serial inter-
device to be programmed in BASIC or 8051 face is RC-232C, DB-25F, and data rates are
assembly language. 150-19200 baud. It includes programming
The Micro-440 costs $199 in single quanti- algorithms and data-file formats. Personal
ties, and OEM versions start at $99 in 1,000s. programmers incorporate a 16 x 1 LCD,
For more information, contact Tom Bach- 28-pin ZIF socket, and 64KB of data RAM.
I
mann, Blue Earth Research, 310 Belle Ave., ADAPTERS SUPPORT NEWEST They operate on 110/220 VAC [10%, 50-
Mankato, MN 56001, (507) 387-4001, FAX 8051 FAMILY 60Hz. The Model 9850 E/EEPROM Program-
(507) 387-4008. Logical Systems, builder of adapters since mer costs $395 and the Model 9850UV with
1987, offers an expanded line of test and the built-in eraser is $445.
development adapters for the 8051 that per- Contact American Reliance Inc., 9952 E.
I 1992 EQUIPMENT BUYER'S GUIDE form device programming, in-circuit emula- Baldwin Place, El Monte, CA 91731, (818)
FROM CQ tion, prototyping, and debugging. 575-5100, FAX (818) 575-0801.
CQ Communications, Inc. offers the 1992 The PA51-44 ($115) takes 44-pin PLCCs
Equipment Buyer's Guide, full of equipment and programs them in the 40-pin DIP foot-
listings compiled and cross referenced for print. The PA52-QFP ($179) takes 44-pin
Ham users. It covers HF through UHF rigs, QFPs and programs them in the 40-pin DIP
specialized mode equipment, tuners, ac- footprint. The DA51-DP ($160) plugs into a
cessories to computers, and other related PLCC production socket and takes the 40-pin
software. It also includes details on the new DIP device in its ZIF socket. The DA44-44-
No-Code Amateur License, tutorials, and DP ($160) takes the 44-pin PLCC device and
tips. plugs into a PLCC production socket.
The new edition costs $6.95 postpaid from OEM inquiries welcome. Contact Logical
CQ Bookstore, 15 Main St., Greenville, NH Systems Corp., PO Box 6184, Syracuse, NY
03048, (800) 457-7373, in NH: (603) 878- 13217-6184, (315) 478-0722, FAX (315)
1441, FAX (603) 878-1951. 475-8460.

95
HEAR EVERY SOUND

OVER 1 MILE AWAY!
Simply attach the VT -75 microtransmitter to any 3V
•
P.P.4
4 :A f.
:to 12V battery and you can hear every sound in an
11
rei entire house over 1 mile away! Super-sensitive cir-
cuit on a single chip even picks up footsteps from
across a large room. Tunable from 80 to 130 MHZ.
Tone and Code Finder
Hear everything on any FM radio or wideband scanner tuned to the "secret" fre-
quency you select. Unlimited uses for security, baby monitor, remote mic, etc.
Not a toy. The VT -75 meets many U.S. Gov't Military Specs and with Pricing
100mW RF output, it is the smallest, most powerful miniature transmitter you
Tone Only . . $189.95
can buy. Easily assembled even by a youngster in only 5 minutes and performs
so well that It is the only miniature transmitter available anywhere that comes Tone 8 Digital $299.95
with a full unconditional moneyback guarantee! Complete kit includes Tone w/Memory $239.95
VT -75 microtransmitter chip, miniature microphone, 9V battery connector and Tone 8 Digital
instructions -$49.95 +$1.50 S&H or save- buy 2 for $45.00 each with free w/Memory $339.95
S&H! Call toll free or send money order, Visa, or MC acc't number for im-
mediate shipping by U.S. Mail. COD's add $4. Checks allow 21 days.
BOX 607
DECO BEDFORD HILLS, NY
The Tone/Code Finder is composed of ahigh speed display
unit mounted to a scanning receiver. Its purpose is to in-
INDUSTRIES • 10507
1-800-759-5553 (U.S. ONL Y)ALL OTHER 914-232-3878
stantly find and display all CTCSS and DIGITAL codes, in-
cluding split channel and inverted codes.
30 DAY On board memory retains all hit and time information which
KELVIN PRO 400 MONEY BACK is then transferred to aprinter via aRS 232 port upon com-
GUARANTEE! mand. Time is stored in seconds and hits in units. In the
$69 95
LC TEST event of power loss. the FINDER will maintain memory for
FREQUENCY COUNTER CCNTINJITY7E8TEAB2331
TO 33/AHZ IDF_AL FOR DIODE CFECK up to three weeks.
TROUI3LE SHOOTING TRANSISTOR hFE TEST
AGOG VOLTAGE RANGES LED TEST WIITY mooed°
AC CC CURRENT RANGES CISPLAY -312 ace LCD Signal processing is accomplished by an eight pole filter
5FREOUENCY PANGES ACCURACY •05% configured as a low pass with a cutoff of 234 Hz. The
5C.APACITANCE RANGES IA4PEDANCE - unto.
superior filter characteristics eliminates chopping and false
PROTECTIVE CARRY CASE I.. PRO 400 2 YEAR
Stock No. 990094 89.95 en WARRANTY reading.
BEST BUY NEW S.d..!! Measurements Division

FLUKE 79 with Capacitance $169
ED
AUTOMATED INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS CORP.
FLUKE 87 True Aus '269 141 GRANITE ST P0 BOX 70
BATESBURG. S.0 29006
NEW! SCOPE METER PO SERIES
(803)532.9256 FAX(803)532.9258
HAND HELD. SO MHz. DUAL CHANNEL
FLUKE 93 ScopelAitur '1096
FLUKE 95 ScopeNeWr 11395
taz
FLUKE 97 FULLY LOADED -- $1695

Fir9 KELVIN EleLtromes VISA AUTHORIZED
DEALER
1100 71- auctold A,e Plainwte, NY 11804
(516) 349-7620 •1(800) 645-9212 • FAX (516) 349-7830
P-C-B ARTWORK MADE EASY

Create and Revise PCB's in a Flash
*HERC, CGA, EGA, VGA, SUPER-VGA

*HELP SCREENS
*EXTREMELY USER FRIENDLY
*AUTO GROUND PLANES
*DOT- MATRIX, LASER and PLOTTER ART
Connect Muscle Wires to abattery or other
power source and watch them contract in *GERBER and EXCELLON OUTPUT
length! Remove power, and they relax and *CREATE YOUR OWN FILMS with 1X ART
are ready for millions more cycles. *LIBRARIES
Muscle Wires let you create direct linear
*DOWNLOAD DEMOS from 24 hr. BBS!
action without heavy gears, coils, or motors.
REQUIREMENTS: IBM PC or Compatible, 384 K RAM
Use them in robots, models, planes, railroads
DOS 3.0 or later. IBM compatible printers, HP Laser
-anywhere you need small, strong motion.
Get our new 96 page Book and Muscle Wire PCBoards -layout program 99.00
Sample Kit -it has everything you need to (PCBoards HP or HI PEN PLOTTER DRIVER 49.00)
get moving today! Toll free:
800-374-5764
Visa, MC, check, MO
Mondo-tronics
2476 Verna Court
San Leandro, CA 94577
Phone: 510-351-5930
Fax: 510-351-6955
WorldRadioHistory
cit,D Tina
ELECTRONICS
THE HAGUE HOLLAND
EUROPE'S
HOTTEST KITS
NOW AVAILABLE
IN
NORTH AMERICA!
IBM PC SERVICE CARD PLOTTER MARK-II

This card was developed for assi- completely reworked version: see Elektor Electronics March 1990.
stance in the field of service,
development and test. The card is
used as o bus-extension to reach the
• Max. width 50 cm.
measurement points very easy. It is • All mechanical parts supplied ready-drilled, filed and tapped, so get
also possible to change cards without oing at once.
having a "hanging computer". • Complete kit, including 2stepper motors, 3pen lift solenoids, HPGL software
Ready Assembled Module
on disk (IBM), stepper motor control board
$145 loo.loo $275
IC TESTER FOR IBM-PC- COLOUR TEST PATTERN GENERATOR MICROPROCESSOR-CONTROLLED

XT/AT FREQUENCY METER
A PAL-compatible colour video source that
With the ELV IC tester logic func- supplies a number of test patterns for A professional grade multi-purpose fre-
tion tests can be carried out on aligning television sets. quency meter, designed by Elektor Elec-
tronics, that can be build by many at
nearly all CMOS and TTL stan-
A test pattern generator is virtually indispens- affordable cost. Described in Elektor Elec-
dard components, accommo-
able for troubleshooting in television sets tronics December 1984, January & February
dated in DIL packages up to 20 because it supplies a video signal that is 1985. U665B-based prescaler.
pin. The tester is designed as an known to be stable, and thus easily
insertion card for IBM-PC-XT/AT displayed and synchronized on an • Frequency meter:
and compatibles. A small ZIF test oscilloscope. 0.01 Hz to 1.2 Ghz.
socket PCB is connected via a is Pulse duration meter:
Inc. case and front 100.111$175
flat band cable. Over 500 stan- 0.1 to 100 s.
derd components can be tes- • Pulse counter:
ted using the accompanying 0to 10 9 pulses
comprehensive test software.
• Period meter:
10 ns to 100 ns
Complete Kit including Textool • Sensitivity:
sokket, connectors, sockets, Flat Input A: 10 mV rr„, (Z = 2MU);
band cable, PCB, Software. • Input B: TTL or CMOS compatible
=25 ka);
Ready Assembled Module • Input C: prescaler input:
10 mV rms (Z in =50 se
NI Auto-ranging and completely menu-
driven.
• 6or 7digit accuracy.
ELEKTOR P.C. i/o card

Kit includes power supply,
$200 •
220 007 $175 prescaler and enclosure 100.112 $300
97
BASIC COMPUTER S-VHS/CVBS-TO-RGB CONVERTER

With Intel 8052AH-BASIC
100.117 4-
$180
ELECTRONICS
THE HAGUE HOLLAND

• A uie
ANALOG MODULE Following last month's introduction into the

eps 880162 100.113 $80 main characteristics of the Super-VHS system, AVAILABLE FROM:
we close off the article with details of a
DIGITAL MODULE practical converter circuit that allows an S- OLD COLONY
eps 880163 100 114 $55 VHS-VRC or camcorder to be connected to
the RGB inputs of a colour TV or monitor. The SOUND LAB
ADRESSDECODER circuit presented here forms a state-of-the-art
eps 880159 100 115 $45 opproacn to all-analogue picture standard PO Box 243, Dept E91
Peterborough, NH 03458 USA
conversion, and is based on the latest in IC
24-Hour Lines:
technology available for this purpose
Tel. (603) 924-6371 FAX (603) 924-9467
220.039$150 • Check, money order, MCNISA

accepted.
• Please allow 6-8 weeks for delivery.
• SHIPPING: Airmail shipping to USA
included in price. Others: Please
inquire.
• CUSTOMS: USA residents may be
required to pay 5-10% customs
duty. Others may vary
MULTIFUNCTION MEASUREMENT MICROPROCESSOR-CONTROLLED

MAIN FEATURES
CARDS FOR PCs TELEPHONE EXCHANGE
•8 Internal lines
• Iexternal line
The high-performance insertion card de- The telephone exchange presented here •memory for 10 numbers
scribed in this article allows your IBM PC-XT, allows up to eight pulse-dialling telephone •Internal through connections
PC-AT or 100 % compatible to measure direct sets to be connected, and has an option for •versatile computer control
•automatic hold tor external line
voltage at 12-bit accuracy, as well as fre- connecting calls to or from an external •simple-to-extend
quency and a host of other parameters (trunk) telephone line. The unit is controlled •can be interfaced to o PC
related to pulse-shaped signals. The accu- by the popular 8052-based BASIC computer •selective external call
acceptance
racy and versatility afforded by the card are we introduced a few years ago. •shortcut dial codes tor external
of a level associated with much more ex- number
pensive, industrially rated products. The 220.057 $190 •works with pulse-dialling tele-
phone sets
menu-driven control software developed for •one optima relay for extra
this exciting project allows you to keep tabs Switching function
on up to eight voltages quasi-simultaneously,
while up to eight remaining inputs can be
used for time-related measurements includ-
ing frequency, duty factor and pulse dur-
ation, not forgetting the event counter.
Connected to the sensors and timing de- MAIN SPECIFICATIONS
vices of your choice, this card turns a PC
•Mode: Single
into a powerful central controller in a com- one adjustable power supply
plex measurement and control system. with current an voltage
controls
Output 0 -40 Vat0- 5A
220.040$225
•Mode: independent
two identical, electrically
separated, power supplies
Outputs
2)(0- 40 Vat 2.0 -5A
•Mode: Tracking
SPECIAL PARTS SERVICE -two indentical, series connec-
ted, power supplies
- Outputs ±0 ±40 V at 0 -5A
We are the no. 1suppliers of hard-to-find O -80 Vat 0 -5A
-Voltage and current of slave
components for Elektor Electronics pro- 400-WATT LABORATORY POWER follow master
jects.Always contact us first if you see an SUPPLY •Mode: parallel
unfamiliar component. Items include -two identical, parallel con-
analogue & digital Cs (HCT, SMD), preci- nected. power supplies
sion resistors (1%, 0,1%), capacitors Here is on all-purpose d.c. power supply for -Outputs 06 -39 4V at 0 -10 A
(MKT/styroflex), inductors (Neosid, Toko), symmetrical as well as asymmetrical use, •Maximum output voltage:
transducers, enclosures (Telet, OKW) and and capable of supplying high output cur- O -40 V (at lull food)
quartz crystals. rents and voltages. An all-analogue design 48 V (no load)

based on discrete parts only, this 400-watt •Maximum output current:: 5A
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, PSU deserves a prominent place on your •Rippie: 10 mV (no load)
PLEASE SEND A BUSINESS-SIZE work bench. 50 mV (at full load)
•Voltage difference in
SASE TO OLD COLONY SOUND LAB tracking mode 50 mV
(ADDRESS ABOVE), ATTN: MEEK IT.
ex. case 220.036 $525
WorldRadioHistory
98
CUMULATIVE INDEX 1991

Notation:
[article title] [month] — [page number]
DESIGN IDEAS
Example: [9 — 41] = September 1991, page 41. 6-digit coded AC power switch 12 —78
8-channel audio/video switch (Philips Components) 3 —28
Audio spectrum shift techniques 10 — 16
Advanced input stage for left/right rev counter 1— 52
APPLICATION NOTES Keyboard circuit 9 —46
Versatile pulse-width modulator 5 —48
Amplification/attenuation selector 12 — 60
CMOS dimmer 12 — 86
DC-to-DC converter (SGS Thomson MicroElectronics) 5 —44
Digital tape counter 12 — 62
ELECTROPHONICS
Microprocessor programmable universal active filters 12 — 64 Asymmetrical-to-symmetrical converter 9 —31
REF 200 12 — 87 MIDI programme changer 4 — 14
Remote control ICs MV500 and MV601 (Plessey MIDI-to-CV interface 2 — 53
Semiconductors) 9 — 34 MIDI-to-CV interface some additional notes 3 35
Single-chip power line supply 12 — 94
Switch-mode voltage regulators LM2575/LM2577
(National Semiconductor) 10 — 59
GENERAL INTEREST
50 Hz band-stop filter 7/8 — 70
AUDIO & HI-FI Auto power on-off for bicycle speedometer 12 —46
Automatic blower fan control for cars 12 —26
Automatic power-off for audio equipment 7/8 — 11 Automatic cycle lights 7/8 —49
Class A power amplifier (1) 11 —37 BCD rotary switch 12 — 36
Class A power amplifier (2) 12 —40 Bedside light timer 12 — 48
The complete preamplifier (1) 1— 44 Bounce-free switch 7/8 —49
The complete preamplifier (2) 3 — 18 Central heating controller (1) 2 38
The digital compact cassette 10 — 56 Central heating controller (2) 3 —51
Electronic power-on delay 12 —81 A cheap, efficient, strategic fire alarm 9 —48
Headphone amplifier 3 —48 The cipher machine 11 —46
On-off delay for valve amplifiers 12 —48 Computer-controlled weather station (1) 3 — 14
Overload indicator 12 — 72 Computer-controlled weather station (2) 10 —28
Peak indicator for loudspeakers 9 — 14 Connect-4 12 —22
Power-on delay 12 — 30 Darkness-sensitive switch 7/8 —55
Preamplifier for moving-coil pick-up 4 — 18 Digital 555 12 75
Preamplifier for moving-magnet pick-up 5 —54 Dimmer for halogen lights 4 — 54
Protection against direct voltage 12 — 85 Disco running lights 12 —47
Electronic exposure timer 3 —31
Electronic reversing circuit for model trains 7/8 —44
AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS Fast switching gate 12 — 70
Fault signalling circuit 7/8 — 47
Car battery monitor 7/8 — 62 Four-terminal networks (1) 10 — 46
Central car locking control 9 — 16 Four-terminal networks (2) 11 —42
Windscreen wash/wipe circuit 7/8 —57 Gentle halogen-light switch 12 — 37
Intelligent power switch 12 — 86
House telephone 7/8 —54
Horse simulator 12 — 73
COMPUTERS & MICROPROCESSORS Laser (1) 5-27
1-Mbit adapter for EPROM programmer 7/8 —40 Laser (2) 6 — 50
8-bit I/O interface for Atari ST 4 28 Laser (3) 7/8 — 82
8031 single-board computer 1 54 LED indicator for temperature logger 12 —51
80C32/8052AH-BASIC single-board computer 5 17 Light switch with TV remote control 6 — 54
8088 single-board computer 7/8 78 Momentary action push-button 7/8 — 74
Angled bus extension card for PCs 7/8 46 Musical Christmas present 12 — 14
Change-over switch for C64 control port 7/8 50 One-shot solid-state relay timer 7/8 — 76
Communication buses 7/8 53 PC-ECAP circuit simulator 3 —61
Digital Research DOS 5.0 brings back your memory 4 31 Product modelling 11 — 32
Intel/Tektronix-to-hexdump converter for PCs 4 36 Programmable LED indicator 7/8 — 65
Keyboard change-over switch 7/8 52 Pulse generator with one 4066 7/8 —42
Microprocessor supply regulator 7/8 64 Rectifier calculations 5 —40
Mouse/joystick switch for Amiga 12 28 Review of the Heath GC-1000 clock 12 — 90
Multifunction I/O for PCs 7/8 23 Safe solid-state relay 12 —21
Multifunction measurement card for PCs (1) 1 14 Sequential control 7/8 —61
Multifunction measurement card for PCs (2) 2 14 Slave flash trigger 7/8 — 67
PC interrupt handler 7/8 72 Slave power line on-off control mark 12 — 60
Plotter driver 9 53 Solid-state light-sensitive switch 7/8 — 40
Real-time clock for Atari ST 6 60 Speed control for large d.c. motors 5 — 14
Relay card for universal I/O interface 11 54 Stepper motor board (1) 6 — 63
RS232 for Sharp pocket computers 12 29 Stepper motor board (2) 7/8 — 87
Serial video card 2 48 Switch for central heating pump 7/8 — 52
A simple watchdog circuit 11 45 Switching clock from parking timer 12 —51
Universal I/O interface for IBM PCs 5 24 Switch-off for battery supply 7/8 — 55
Upgrade for MCS BASIC-52 V. 1.1 (1) 10 14 Teeth-cleaning timer 7/8 —75
Upgrade for MCS BASIC-52 V. 1.1 (2) 11 50 Telephone buzzer as switch 12 —47
Video enhancement for Acorn Archimedes 7/8 43 Telephone extension 7/8 —58
ZAP51: an 87C51 programmer 9 39 Temperature-compensated current source 7/8 —59

99
Timecode interface for slide controller (1) 7/8 — 14

Timecode interface for slide controller (2) 9 — 18
SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY
Time delay with one 555 7/8 —51 A simple and adaptable logic 12 52
Universal power-on delay 12 — 35 Augmented A-matrices 5 —42
Universal time switch 12 — 16 A review of coding theory 10 —42
Universal timer 7/8 —68 Understanding the EDIF standard 9 50
Variable time switch 12 —45
Variegated LED 7/8 —63
Video camera timer 12 —50
Voltage-controlled current source 7/8 —44 TEST & MEASUREMENT
Voltage regulator for cars 12 — 70
50-MHz 8-bit DAC 10 —26
VOX actuator for baby alarm 12 — 34
Audible tester 12 —63
Water level control 12 — 62
Binary logarithmic ladder network 7/8 —68
Would you be an inventor? 7/8 — 36
Conductance meter 5 46
Decadic voltage dividers 2 —26
Digital function generator (1) 10 — 34
Digital function generator (2) 11 —22
INTERMEDIATE PROJECTS Digital function generator (3) 12 —76
Digital LED voltmeter 7/8 —47
2-metre band converter 3 — 37 Digital phase meter 6 —32
Battery tester 5 — 32 HCT crystal oscillator 12 37
Build the Opticalock (1) 9-42 High current HFE tester 2 56
Build the Opticalock (2) 10 — 23 LED VU meter 7/8 —62
Light transmitter/receiver 6 —43 Logic analyser (1) 1 38
Modern LED clock 7/8 — 20 Logic analyser (2) 2 28
Simple function generator 2 —42 Logic analyser (3) 4 —22
Surf generator 4 — 51 Logic analyser (4) 6 —20
Timer for central-heating systems 11 — 52 Logic analyser (5) 7/8 —96
Measurement techniques (3) 1—20
Measurement techniques (4) 2 —23
Measurement techniques (5) 3 — 24
POWER SUPPLIES & BATTERY CHARGERS Measurement techniques (6) 9 —29
Measurement techniques (7) 10 —32
9V NiCd batter charger 12 —50 Measurement techniques (8) 11 — 14
Automatic battery charger I 7/8 —56 Measuring electrolytic capacitors 7/8 —54
Automatic battery charger II 7/8 —75 PC-controlled semiconductor tester (1) 3 —42
Battery charger 7/8 —41 PC-controlled semiconductor tester (2) 4 —44
Battery tester 12 — 36 Precision rectifier for digital voltmeters 7/8 —42
Dissipation limiter 11 — 19 Pulse shaper 12 —77
Economy power supply 12 — 54 Remote temperature module for digital multimeters 7/8 — 39
Presettable shunt regulator 7/8 —53 Semiconductor tester 7/8 —43
Relay fuse 12 — 72 A simply elegant LCR bridge 1— 23
Static DC-DC converter 12 —71 Sine wave converter 12 — 30
Super voltage regulator 7/8 —74 SWR meter for 1.5 — 70 MHz 1—58
Universal NiCd battery charger 6 — 14 Temperature measurement techniques 12 —31
Variable a.c. power supply 6 —46 Triggered sawtooth generator 7/8 — 66
Universal test probe 7/8 — 67
Wattmeter 4 — 32
Wien bridge with asymmetrical supply 7/8 —50
RADIO, TELEVISION & COMMUNICATIONS
6-metre band transverter 4 —38
23/24 cm FM ATV receiver (review) I—42
CORRECTIONS & UPDATES
24-bit full-colour video digitizer 11 — 16
Alexander Graham Bell 12 — 80 6-metre band transverter 6 —49
AM broadcast receiver 10 — 52 400-watt laboratory power supply 1—62
AM/FM receiver 4 — 59 80C32/8052 single-board computer 9 —28
Audio spectrum shift techniques 10 — 16 Augmented A-matrices 9 —28
Error detection and correction 1— 34 Digital phase meter 9 —28
Experimental quadriform ferrite T/R antenna 11 —57 Dimmer for halogen lights 6 —49
Fibre optics (1) 9-24 Electronic exposure timer 9 —28
Fibre optics (2) 10 — 49 EPROM simulator 1—62
Field strength meter 7/8 —70 Hard disk monitor 1—62
FSK/RTTY decoder for PCs 12 — 18 Interval control for camcorders 1— 64
Optical fibre communication 2 — 34 Medium-power AF amplifier 1— 62
PC-controlled Videotext decoder (2) 1—28 Microprocessor-controlled telephone exchange 1—62
Phones in the air 2 —20 MIDI programme changer 9 — 28
The QTC loop antenna 6 —40 Multifunction measurement card for PCs 6 —49
Radar detector 3 — 58 Programmer for the 8751 1—62
S-meter for short-wave receivers 7/8 — 59 RDS decoder 6 —49
Synchronization separator 7/8 — 60 Sequential control 9 —28
Video A-D and D-A converter (1) 5 —36 S-VHS/CVBS-to-RGB converter 1—62
Video A-D and D-A converter (2) 6 —27 S-VHS/CVBS-to-RGB converter 6 —49
Video digitizer 7/8 — 29 Slide potentiometers in the video mixer-an update 1—57
Wideband active rod antenna 5 —49 Universal NiCd battery charger 9 —28
Wideband antenna amplifier 12 —88 Wattmeter 9 —28

100
ORDER FORM
TELEPHONE CHARGE ORDERS
READERS SERVICES (603) 924-6371, 92445213
All orders, except for subscriptions, should be

OLD COLONY SOUND LAB
PO BOO 243
PETERBOROUGH, NH 03458
Answering machine before 9 a.m.,
FAX: (603) 924-9487, 24 boors
sent to Old Colony Sound Lab: by mail to PO
Box 243, Peterborough NH 03458-0243; Visa/ CUSTOMER ADDRESS SHIPPING ADDRESS IF DIFFERENT
MasterCard charge orders by FAX to (603)
924-9467 (24 hours) or by voice 8-4 weekdays NAME NAME
to (603) 924-6526 or 6371. Please use the form
opposite for all orders. All prices are postpaid STREET 8 NO COMPANY
to customers in the fifty states except for books.
Please add $2.00 for the first book and 756 CITY STATE ZIP STREET 8 NO
for each additional book ordered. Cana-
dians, please add $4.50 US for the first MAGIC NUMBER (FROM SUBSCRIPTION LABEL) CITY STATE ZIP
book, and 756 for each addMonal one. Out-
side North America, please add 20%. Cana- PAYMENT METHOD FOR CHARGE CARD ORDERS UNDER $10, PLEASE ADD $2
dians may expect Canadian duty charges on
shipments of any items except books and H CHECK H MONEY ORDER Li MASTERCARD JI VISA
subscriptions.
SUBSCRIPTIONS CARD NUMBER EXPIRES /
Subscriptions can be provided anywhere in the
AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE DAYTIME PHONE
United States and its territories as well as
Canada by sending mail subscriptions to Elektor
Electronics USA, PO Box 876, Peterborough NH Qty. Part Number and Description Price Total
03458-0876. Visa/MasterCard orders may be
telephoned directly to (603) 924-9464 between
8 and 4 on business days and to our machine
recorders at other hours and on weekends.
Orders may be FAXed at any time to (603)
924-9467. US subscription rates: $28 for one
year (11 issues); $50 for 2years. Canadian rate:
$38.80 for one year. Student rate to full-time,
registered students, $15 per year (photocopy of
student ID required)
PAST ISSUES
Back issues of the British Elektor from July/
August 1987 onward are available from World-
wide Subscription Service Ltd., Unit 4, Gibbs
Reed Farm, Pashley Road, Ticehurst INS 7HE,
England, United Kingdom. Single copies are
$4.50 surface mail, $7.50 airmail. Back issues
of Elektor Electronics USA from October 1990 on-
ward (except 2/91) are available from Old Col-
ony for $4 postpaid. $6 for July/August or De-
cember double issues. CALL OR WRITE FOR YOUR FREE OLD COLONY CATALOG!
PAST ARTICLES
SUBTOTAL
Photocopies of articles from the British Elektor Please supply the following: For PCBs, front panel foils, EPROMs, and cas-
from January 1979 onward are available from Old
Colony Sound Lab for $5 each (multi-part articles:
settes, state the part number and description; for books, state the full title; for SHIPPING
$5 per part); $6 in Canada. Indexes are available. photocopies of artic)es, state full name of the article and month and year of
Send astamped (50e), self-addressed business- publication. Please use block capitals.TOTAL
size envelope to Old Colony, at the address
above, for EACH YEAR desired. Acomplete set
of indexes for 1979-90 is available for $7 50 Variable AC PSU 900104-F 28.00 6/91 Stepper motor board 6011 14.00 6/91 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
postpaid. Also available postpaid: Universal battery 900134-F 11.00 6/91 (1) (1 x 16L8)
PROJECT No. Price
Digital model train (13 parts) $15.00 charger Connect 4 6081 26.00 12/91 S
Milliohmmeter 910004-F 28.00 12/90 (1 x 27C64)
TECHNICAL QUERIES JULY/AUGUST 1991
Wattmeter 910011-F 16.50 4/91 8751 programmer 7061 70.50 11/90
Although we are always prepared to assist Multifunction I/O for PCs 910029 41.50
Digital phase 910045-F 20.00 6/91 (1 x 8751)
readers in solving difficulties they may ex- B/W video digitizer 910053 38.50
meter
perience with projects that have appeared in Stepper motor board (2) 910054-2 48.50
Timecode 910055-F 15.00 9/91 DISKETTES
Elektor Electronics USA, we regret that these power driver board
interface PROJECT No. Price Issue LED voltmeter 914005 9.50
cannot, under any circumstances, be dealt with
Digital fund, gen. 910077-F 18.00 10/91 Wien bridge 914007 7.00
by telephone or FAX
Economy PSU 910111-F 18.00 12/91 Digital model train 109 11.50 2-5,7/89- Angled bus extension 914030 20.50
COMPONENTS 4/90 card for PCs
EPROMSIPALS/MICROCONTROLLERS
Components for projects appearing in Elektor Logic analyzer for III 20.00 10/89 Sync separator 914077 7.50
Electronics USA are usually available from ap- PROJECT No. Price Issue
Atari ST (b/w only)
propriate advertisers in this magazine. If you 10/89 SEPTEMBER 1991
Computer-controlled 113 20.00
have difficulty finding parts, please send aself- Multifunction 561 17.50 2/91 Timecode interface
Teletext decoder
addressed postcard listing the parts you desire measurement card for slide control
Plotter driver (Lewetz) 117 11.50 5-6/88
and we will attempt to locate a source. If dif- for PCs main board 910055 41.50
MIDI control unit 570 20.00 6-7/90 FAX interface, IBM PCs 119 14.00 6/90 display board 87291-9A 7.00
ficulties in the supply of components are en-
visaged, asource will normally be advised in the (1 x 27C64) RAM extension for 123 10.00 7/89 Asymm-symm converter 910072 9.50
article. Digital model train 572 33.50 2-5,7/4890
19 - BBC-0
(1 x 2764) OCTOBER 1991
BOOKS EPROM simulator 129 11.50 12/89
PC-controlled weather 900124-2 6.50
Darkroom clock 583 18.50 2/90
The following Elektor books are currently avail- RS-232 splitter 1411 11.50 4/90 station (2)
(1 x 27128)
able from Old Colony Sound: Centronics ADC/DAC 1421 11.50 5/90 Digital function generator
Slave indication 700 30.00 3/88
301 Circuits $12.50 Transistor 1431 13.00 5/90 main board 910077-1 37.00
unit for (T S.
302 Circuits $12.50 characteristic plot- display board 910077-2 21.50
(1 x 8748H)
303 Circuits $15.95 ting (Atari ST b/w) Audio spectrum shift 910105 17.50
EPROM emulator 701 30.00 12/89
Data Sheet Book 2 $16.50 ROM-copy for BASIC 1441 13.00 9/90 encoder/decoder
(1 x 8748H)
Databook 3 . $17.95 Microcontroller- 702 95.00 5,6,9/88 1461 13.00 2/91
Multif unction NOVEMBER 1991
Databook 4 $17.95 driven power supply measurement card Relay card for universal 910038 22.00
Microprocessor Data Book $17.90 (1 x 8751) for PCs I/O interface
SHELF BOXES Autonomous I/O 704 95.00 12/88 8751 programmer 1471 13.00 11/90 910071 7.50
Dissipation limiter
Blue heavy-duty Elektor vinyl shelf box controller (1 x8751) PT100 thermometer 1481 13.00 11/90 Digital function generator
(holds 6 issues) $6.00 Video mixer (1 x2764) 5861 20.00 1-4/90 sine converter 910077-3 25.50
Logic analyzer
Four-sensor 5921 20.00 6/90 FITT converter 910077-4 23.00
FRONT PANEL FOILS software, incl. GAL
sunshine recorder IBM 1491 33.00 6/91 Class-A power
PROJECT No. Price issue (1 x 27128) amplifier (1) 880092-1 16.90
Atari 1501 33.00 6/91
S H P-controlled 5941 26.00 10/90 880092-2 15.40
Plotter driver19.00 1541 9/91
Video mixer 87304-F 33.00 1-4/90 telephone exchange Timer for CH systems UPBS-2 6.50
(Siltsma)
The complete 890169-F 15.00 3/91 (1 x 27128)
preamplifier PC-controlled weather 1551 13.00 3/91 DECEMBER 1991
MIDI program 5961 26.00 4/91
All solid-state 890170-F1 33.50 12/89 changer (1 x 2764) station (1) Class-A power amplifier (2) 880092-3 12.80
preamplifier 890170-F2 18.50 1/90 Logic analyzer 5971 14.00 1-2,4/91 PC-controlled weather 1561 13.00 10/91 880092-4 12.90
LF/HF signal 890183-F 18.50 12/89 (IBM interface) station (2) Economy power supply 910111 16.00
tracer (1 x PAL 16L8) I/O interface for Atari 1571 13.00 4/91 HP programmable filters 910125 11.50
0 meter 900031-F 23.00 4/90 MIDI-to-CV interface 5981 26.00 2/91 4/91 Amiga mouse/joystick 914078 7.00
Tek/Intel file converter 1581 13.00
Budget sweep/ 900040-F 20.00 5/90 Multifunction I/O 5991 14.00 7-8/91 switch
B/W video digitizer 1591 19.00 7-8/91
function generator for PCs A musical Christmas 910157 5.50
Timecode interface 1611 13.00 9/91
High current 900078-F 28.00 2/91 (1 x PAL 16L8) present
hFE tester Amiga mouse/ 6001 14.00 12/91 RTC for Atari ST 1621 13.00 6/91 Safe solid-state relay 914008 6.50
400W lab 900082-F 35.00 10-11/90 joystick switch 24-bit color extension 1631 19.00 11/91 Slave mains on/off 914072 11.00
power supply (1 x GAL 16V8) for video digitizer control Mark-2
WorldRadioHistory
101
TERMS OF BUSINESS
PRICING Allow two to three weeks for delivery. Please inquire ity and specifications set forth. We make no represen-
Prices, except as noted, include shipping in the con- about appropriate funds for special handling (UPS tations. We accept no responsibility whatever for fur-
tinental USA. The minimum order is $10. A $2 ser- next day or second day). UPS requires astreet ad- ther use by the customer. We accept no monetary
vice charge will be added to orders of less than S10. dress. If you cannot receive UPS delivery, please in- liability in excess of the original cost or replacement
Prices are subject to change as our costs change. WE clude an extra $2 for insured service via Parcel Post. of the material if originally defective or damaged in
RESERVE THE RIGHT TO MAKE PRICE CHANGES We cannot accept responsibility for safety or delivery transit.
WITHOUT NOTICE. of uninsured Parcel Post shipments. Absolutely no
COD shipments. COPYRIGHT
TELEPHONE ORDERS All drawings, photographs, articles, printed circuit
BOOKS, RECORDINGS, CDs, and SOFTWARE
Telephone orders are welcome between the hours of boards, EPROMs, software, and cassettes published
The shipping/handling charge for the US is $2.00, plus
9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. EDT, Monday-Friday. Orders in our books or magazines (other than in third-party
75C each additional item. In Canada, please add $4.50 advertisements) are copyright and may not be repro-
for parts are to be made on the ORDER FORM pro-
for the first item, 75e each additional. No returns.
vided. Payment for telephone orders is by MC/VISA duced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
According to the Connecticut Dept. of Revenue Ser-
only. Our TELEPHONE ORDER NUMBER IS (603) including photocopying and recording, in whole or
vices, Regulation #27, Section 12-426-27, in order to in part, without the prior permission of Elektor Elec-
924-6371 or 924-6526. Our answering machine for sell software to residents of Connecticut, we must
MCNISA orders during non-business hours is (603) tronics USA in writing. Such written permission must
register with the department as well as collect taxes
924-6371. FAX: (603) 924-9467 (24 hours). also be obtained before any part of these publications
for the state from the purchaser. We regret to inform is stored in a retrieval system of any nature.
our customers that we will not sell software to anyone Notwithstanding the above, printed circuit boards
PAYMENT
from Connecticut, as it will prove to be too costly and
All remittances MUST BE IN US FUNDS DRAWN may be produced for private and personal use without
burdensome.
ON A US BANK. Payment for telephone orders must prior permission.
be made by MasterCard or VISA. Mail order payment OVERSEAS ORDERS
may be made by MC/VISA, money order, cashier's For orders to be shipped outside North America, add LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
check or personal check. If payment is made by per- 20% to the total order to cover shipping. Elektor Electronics USA shall not be liable in contract,
sonal check, allow up to 2weeks for clearance before tort, or otherwise, for any loss or damage suffered
RETURNS
order is shipped. Should check be returned for any by the purchaser whatsoever or howsoever arising
If you wish to return all or part of an order for any
reason, there will be a $10 charge. out of, or in connection with, the supply of goods or
reason, please call or write first. If we are in error,
services by Elektor Electronics USA other than to sup-
correction will be made promptly, without charge.
SHIPPING ply goods as described, or at the option of Elektor h7ec-
Unless noted, freight is prepaid by Old Colony. WARRANTY tronics USA, to refund the purchaser any money paid
All orders shipped USPS first class mail or by UPS. We warrant that all items sold conform to the qual- in respect of the goods.
BOOKS FROM ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA

301 CIRCUITS plication. Far from it, as witness the familiar type MC146818A real-time clock and the type
This book follows the theme of the first in this series, 300 Circuits (now out of print). It con- MC684,5 cathode-ray tube controller. It deserves a pace on the bookshelf of anyone con-
tains over 300 assorted circuits first published in the 1979, 1980, 1981 summer issues of cerned with the design, maintenance and servicing of microprocessor-controlled electronic
&Why' Electronics. equipment.
The circuits range from the simple to the more complex and are described and explained ISBN 0-905705-30-0
in straightforward language. The book is acomprehensive source of ideas and construction BKAA15 Price $17.95
projects for anyone interested in electronics.
ISBN 0-905705-12-2 MICROPROCESSOR DATA BOOK
BKAA11 Price $12.50 This book has come about because of a need by Elektor Electronics engineers, technicians,
and editorial staff of a ready reference work on the most important micruprotebsurb. This
302 CIRCUITS implies that it does not only contain information on the latest devices, such as the transputer,
The popularity of this book is shown by its having been reprinted no fewer than three times. but also on older, well-established types, such as the Z80 and the 6800.
It offers aselection of the most interesting articles from the 1982, 1983, 1984 summer issues A general description, hardware block schematic, software structure, DC characteristics,
of Elektor Electronics. and instruction sets are given for over 70 microprocessors. To prevent the book from becom-
In it you will find circuits for audio and video; car, cycle, and motorcycle; home and garden; ing unwieldy (and to keep costs down), timing diagrams and AC characteristics have, however,
receivers and aerials; hobbies and games; measuring and testing; oscillators and generators; been omitted. The detailed information on all manufacturers mentioned will, however, enable
current sources and power supplies; microcomputers and music electronics; and amiscellany any additional information to be obtained quite readihi.
of other interesting subjects. Included in the book are, among others, the 68000 series; the 6502 family; the Z80, 8080,
ISBN 0-905705-25-4 and 8085; Intel's 8086, 80186, 80188, 80286, and 80386; the NS32>00( series, and the IN-
13KAA12 Price $12.50 MOS transputers.
ISBN 0-905705-28-9
303 CIRCUITS BKAA18 Price $17.90
Like its predecessors, 303 CIRCUITS offers a comprehensive collection of practical ideas,
concepts, and developments in the gamut of electronics. Unlike its predecessors, the book DATABOOK 4: PERIPHERAL CHIPS II
is arranged in 11 subject sections to make it easier for the reader to find that long-sought circuit. This final volume in Elektor Electronics' Microprocessor Data Book series deals with general
In well over 300 pages, the book offers 32 Audio and Hi-Fi projects; 14 circuits for Car peripheral chips that, at least as far as their type-coding is concerned, do not belong to a
and Bicycles; 43 Computer & Microprocessor circuits; 11 Electrophonic projects; 24 HF and specific family of microprocessors. There are so many of these, however, that only aportion
VHF circuits; 16 circuits for a number of hobbies and pastimes; 54 projects for Home and of them can be dealt with in one book. Those contained in this collection have been chosen
Garden; 29 Power Supply circuits; 29 circuits for Test and Measurement equipment; nine carefully on the basis of their practical application and frequency of use. Complete data are
N and Video projects; as well as 42 Design Ideas. given for coprocessors from the 80 series (AMD, Cyrix, ITT, Intel, Weitek); real-time clocks
ISBN 0-90570542-2 from MEM, OKI, Statek, National Semiconductor, and Dallas Semiconductor; transmitters
BKAA13 Price $15.90 and receivers of serial interfaces RSO-to, 422, 423, 485 from Motorola, Newport Components,
Maxim, Texas Instruments, National Semiconductor, Dallas Semiconductor, and Linear
DATA SHEET BOOK 2 Technology; UARTS, DUARTS, and QUARTS (i.e., programmable ICs intended for data
transfer); and the cse221 set of Cs from Chips & Technology that are used in agreat number
Like its predecessor (now out of print), this book offers concise, relevant, and rapidly ac-
of PC mother boards (also included is the data sheet of associated software LIM 4.0 for the
cessible information, which is both practical (e.g., the pin-out of a device) and informative.
management of the Extended Memory System).
The book contains data on integrated circuits as well as on discrete transistors and diodes.
Apart from the actual data, the book contains much other useful information, such as com-
Moreover, it gives an introduction to fast (HCMOS) devices and a review of the new sym-
parisons between and second sources for all important IC families; addresses of manufac-
bolic logic as laid clown in British Standard BS3939:Section 21 (IEC Standard 617-12).
turers and their representatives; and overviews of all peripheral chips (including many that
The final part of the bock deals with anumber of computer chips, such as memory devices
could not be included in this book) that are available from various manufacturers.
(including programming information for these) and I/O circuits. This section also includes data
on a number of non-digital discrete and integrated devices, such as op amps, as well as ISBN 0-905705-32-7
on some microprocessor peripherals (e.g., the KV? VIA, the 6580 ACIA, and the 8355A PPI). BKAA17 Price $17.95
ISBN 0-905705-27-0
BKAA14 Price 918.50
SPECIALS!
DATABOOK 3: PERIPHERAL CHIPS BKAAL1 BKAA11, 12, 13: all 3 for $35 (Save $5.95!)
This book lists the most important design data of peripheral chips whose type numbers and
functions relate them unambiguously to arnictoptic.r in the same family. All listed devices BKAA7J2 BKAA14, 15, 16, or 17: ANY THREE for $45 (Save $7.355
MI SUM TO IIPOOFYI)
form pert of families based on widely used microprocessors or microcontrollers. Their most
evident application will therefore be in conjunction with the associated microprocessor. This BKAAVS Complete Elektor library: all 7 for $85 (Save $26.201)
should, however, not be taken to mean that a peripheral cannot be used in another ap-
These books are all available direct from Elektor Electronics USA through the Readers Services, from a number of bookshops and electronics retailers in the US and
Canada, and from selected bookshops throughout the world. Special prices are those of EEUSA only.

102
THE COLORADO AUDIO SOCIETY is agroup of audio
WANTED CLASSIFIEDS
enthusiasts dedicated to the pursuit of music and audio-
phile arts in the Rocky Mountain region. We offer acom-
prehensive annual journal, five bi-monthly newsletters,
plus participation in meetings and lectures. For more in-
27XX series EPROM programmer and related software THOSE INTERESTED IN AUDIO and speaker building
formation, send SASE to: CAS, 4506 Osceola St., Denver,
for Atari Mega-2 ST, complete unit or plans or source for in the Knoxville-East Tennessee area please contact Bob
CO 80212, or call Art Tedeschi, (303) 477-5223.
one, will pay reasonable price, PLEASE HELP! Ron Yost, Wright, 7344 Toxaway Dr., Knoxville, TN 37909-2452,
646 Bolen Dr., Paso Robles, CA 93446-2760, (805) (615) 691-1668 after 6 p.m. ELECTROSTATIC LOUDSPEAKER USERS GROUP is
238-1071. now aworld-wide network for those interested in sharing
TUBE AUDIO ENTHUSIASTS. Northern California club
valuable theory, design, construction, and parts source
meets every other month. For next meeting announce-
information. If you are interested in building, or have built,
ment send aself-addressed, stamped #10 envelope to Tim
FOR SALE
your own SOTA ESL we invite you to join our loose-knit
Eding, PO Box 611662, San Jose, CA 95161.
organization. For information, send an SASE to: Barry
WASHINGTON AREA AUDIO SOCIETY Meetings are Waldron, 1847 Country Club Dr., Placerville, CA 95667.
held every two weeks, on Fridays from 19:00 hours to
CHICAGO AREA ENTHUSIASTS WANTED for audio
Wharfedale W7OD speakers, each 70 lb. cabinet contains 21:30 hours at the Charles Barrett Elementary School in
construction club. Call Tom, (312) 558-3377 or (708)
a2"h soft dome tweeter, 41/ 2"midrange, 7" woofer and the city of Alexandria, Va. Prospective members are
516-0170 evenings for details.
11" passive radiator, oiled walnut cabinets are welcome but must register in advance in order to be ad-
23W x24H x13V2D, too big for our room, $300. Prefer not mitted to the meetings. No exceptions please. If interested CONNECTICUT AUDIO SOCIETY is an active and grow-
to ship. Kent Merideth, 1623 Sherwood Dr., Anderson, IN please call Horace Vignale, (703) 578-4929. ing club with activities covering many facets of audio—
46012, (317) 642-8371. including construction, subjective testing, and tours of
THE INLAND EMPIRE AUDIO SOCIETY (soon to
local manufacturers. New members are always welcome.
become) THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA AUDIO
For acopy of our current newsletter and an invitation to
SOCIETY—SCAS is now inviting audiophiles from all
TRADE areas of Southern California and abroad to join our serious

pursuit for that elusive sonic truth through our meetings
our next meeting, write to: Richard Thompson, 129
Newgate Rd., E. Granby, CT 06026, (203) 653-7873.
and the lEAS' official speaker The Reference Newsletter. MEMPHIS AREA AUDIO SOCIETY being formed.
GET YOUR "FCC commercial general radio-telephone For information write or call, Frank Manrique, President, Serious audiophiles contact J.J. McBride, 8182 Wind
license." Electronics home study. Fast, inexpensive! Free 1219 Fulbright Ave., Redlands, CA 92373. (714) 793-9209. Valley Cove, Memphis, TN 38125, (901) 756-6831.
Details! COMMAND PRODUCTIONS, D-266, Box 2824,
San Francisco, CA 94126-2824. T1/92
RADIO—TV RECEIVING, transmitting, C.R.T. tubes, INDEX OF ADVERTISERS

Sam's Fotofacts and more. P.E.M. TUBES, 8005 Florin
Road, #10, Sacramento, CA 95828, (916) 383-9107. T3/92
AIE Corporation 95 A.W. Sperry Instruments 12
All Electronics Corporation CV Ill Basicon 12
CLUBS Deco Industries

Easy Tech
95
CV IV
Blue Earth Research
Caig Laboratories
94
12
Hampshire Industries CV III Communications Specialists, Inc. 12
THE ATLANTA AUDIO SOCIETY is dedicated to furnish Kelvin Electronics 95 CO Bookstore 94
pleasure and education for people with acommon interest Meadowlake Corp 93 Dolby 13
in fine music and audio equipment. Monthly meetings
Mondo-tronics 95 Hewlett-Packard Co 13
often feature guest speakers from the audio manufactur-
OLD COLONY SOUND LAB Jameco Electronic Components 13
ing and recording industry. Members receive a monthly
Books 100, 101 Leads Metal Products, Inc 13
newsletter. Call: Chuck Bruce, (404) 876-5659, or Denny
Meeker, (404) 872-0428, or write: PO Box 361, Marietta, EPROMs, Etc 100 Logical Systems Corporation 94
GA 30061. Front Panel Foils 100 Mackie Designs, Inc. 12
Meek-It Kits 96, 97 MCG Electronics 12
THE HI-FI CLUB of Cape Town in South Africa sends a
Parts Sources 93 Midland LMR 13
monthly-newsletter to its members and world-wide sub-
Printed Circuit Boards 100 Neutrik USA 12
scribers. To receive an evaluation copy of our current
newsletter, write to: PO Box 18262, Wynberg 7824, South Software 4-9, 100 Norman Lathrop Enterprises 12
Africa. We'll be very pleased to hear from you. PC Boards 95 PC Boards 12
Pseudo Corporation CV Ill Startek International, Inc. 13
LONDON LIVE D.I.Y. HI-FI CIRCLE meets quarterly in
Radio Shack CV II The Math Works, Inc. 13
London, England. Our overall agenda is abroad one, hav-
ing anything to do with any aspect of audio design and Electronics Scene/New Products
construction. We welcome everyone, from novice to ex- American Reliance, Inc. 94
pert. For information contact Dick Bowman, 081 520 6334
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS CLASSIFIED ORDER FORM

PLEASE FILL OUT IN CLEAR BLOCK LETTERS OR TYPE. PLEASE SPELL OUT ENTIRE WORD.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 so
E Private For Sale E Private Wanted D Trade Please indicate # of insertions

Private For Sale ads are for non-profit use. Individuals selling items for retail/profit should be using Trade ads. Private For Sale
and Private Wanted ads are on aone time insertion basis. Ads must be resubmitted for renewal. Ads will not be taken over the phone.
Definition of a word: A series of letters with a space before and ECheck/Money Order Enclosed I: Please charge to my MasterCard/Visa:
after. Count words, not letters. Any words over 50, 2oe per word.
Trade ads are 75e per word and indicate number of insertions. CARD NUMBER EXP DATE
Deduct 10% for a6x contract; deduct 15% for a 11 x (year) con-
NAME
tract in Elektor Electronics USA.
COMPANY
Please remember to include your name, address and telephone
number. In order for Private For Sale and Want ads to be free,
STREET 8, NO.
you must be a current subscriber. Ten dollar minimum for charge
card orders. Payment MUST accompany first ad. CITY ST ZIP

103
I
(Project Pro)
Courteous Service • Discount Prices • Fast Shipping
e (0 P e
P.O. Box 567 -Van Nu s, CA 91408

Call For FREE Catalog HIGHEST QUALITY METAL CASSETTES (ERASED)
Call (800) 800-3321 or (216) 425-8888 Premium quality metal tape in C-60 and C•90 cassettes (30 or
45 min. per side). One of the finest "brand-name" tapes on the
Project Pro brings acomplete line of electronic market, in durable, clear plastic transport mechanisms. Recorded -------
and bulk erased, the record-protect tabs have been removed and 0710
enclosures, hardware, and tools to both the therefore, need to be taped over to re-record. Audiophiles will
appreciate the wide dynamic range of this tape. If your cassette
professional project engineer and the hobbiest. deck has a"metal" setting you will hear the difference. A real bargainl
60 min. tape -CAT* C-60M $1.25 each •10 for $10.00
Everything you need to bring ANY project 90 min. tape -CAT* C-90M $1.65 each •10 for $15.00
a
a
from development to finished product. CASSETTE STORAGE CASE
Black, unbreakable plastic audio cassette storage case. ---___
CATO CBOX 5for $1.00 • 100 for $15.00
TOUCH DIMMER SWITCHES

The "brain" SPDT Mini-Toggle (Flat Handle)
pan of the (ON-ON)
"LITE C8K ii 7101 or equivalent.
TOUCH" Standard size SPDT
touch it•-
.5-".
--
mini-toggle switch with
dimmer, - flat lever handle. 1/4-40
when connected to any larrp, will turn 0on threaded bushing. Solder
and off and change the brightness level when loop terminals. Rated 5amps @ 125 yac.
any metal part is touched. We don't have the CAT* MTS-14 $1.35 each
wiring harness that originally connected this
Electronic Enclosures Custom Services Fasteners to the lamp, but we can provide asimple SPST N.O. Pushbutton
hook-up diagram and instruction sheet. The SPST normally open
*Aluminum *Fabricating *Nickel Plated solid-state circuitry is contained in athermo- p.c. mount pushbutton. 7-
plastic box 1.91" X 3.11" X 0.835". 0.47" square mounting pad.

*Steel *Screening *Black Zinc CATO DMR-1 $3.50 each Plunger extends 0.47" above surface. No
*72 hour- pushbutton cap available. Ideal, inexpen-
*Plastic (ABS) sive switch where look is not important.
turnaround OPTO SENSOR 4p.c. pins on 0.2" X 0.5" mounting center:
Racks Chassis Tools CAT* PB-35 5for $1.00
TRW/Optron tt 01'135447-2 Mini Snap-Action Switch

1710 Enterprise Pky. Twinsburg, Ohio 44087 IR emitter/sensor pair in
/
Omron 02F-L
Miniature snap-action •dex•
Rectangular package with •i( ., I ---- -
28" color coded leads. ',I switch with lever. ':- --31
CAT* OSR-4 2for $1.00 Rated 1amp @ 125 yac.
0.50" LX 0.26' V -i X 0.22" W. Lever ex-
Special Reduced Price tends 0.05" beyond end of switch
CAT* SMS-282 75c each 10 lor $6.50
PHOTOFLASH CAPACITOR
Cross-Assemblers from $50.00 AUDIO SLIDE POT
Rubicon CE
Simulators from $100.00 210 Mfd 330 Voit photoflash
capacitor. 0.79" dia. X 1.1" high.
-_=. .1
Dual 1K audio
3 1/2' long,
Cross-Disassemblers from $100.00 These are new capacitors that
have been prepped with 1.4"
..,i
21/2" slide.
CAT* ASP-1K0
Developer Packa g es black and red wire leads soldered to the ter-
minals. CAT* PPC-210 $1.25 each
Reduced to 50e each •100 for $40.00
from $200.00(a $50.00 Savings) 10 for $11.00 • 100 for $100.00

20 AMP RFVEMI FILTER
Make Programming Easy l'i'llifittelZizledol;h 114; , Corwin* 2096

20 amp RP I/E M I
a
Our Macro Cross-assemblers are easy to use. With powerful 12 Vdc 500 ma. _,., general purpose
conditional assembly and unlimited include files. 2.1mm D.C. power plug with common-mode filter. 1
center negative. White case. Controls line-to-ground
----4
Get It Debugged--FAST CAT* DCTX-125W $4.50 each
4----
/
noise. Small size, low leakage
3.46" X 1.16" X 2.81'. UL and CSA listed.
12 Vdc, 200 ma. 1̀
Don't wait until the hardware is finished. Debug your software CAT* RA-203 $8.50 each
2.1 mm D.C. power plug with center negative.
with our Simulators. CAT* DCTX-122 $3.00 each
HEAT SINK COMPOUND
Recover Lost Source! 4PDT -24 Vdc RELAY
Our line of disassemblers can help you re-create the original
assembly language source. 24 Vdc, 650 ohm coil -
ri
3amp contacts
Idafi-jiie,
Thousands Of Satisfied Customers Standard 14 pin
(ICE CUBE) style. li 1,1j -e G C Electronics* 10-8109 -For effective
t,,,j0:4
Plastic dust cover. transfer of heat between corrponents and
Worldwide Size: 11/4" X 1314" heat sinks. Z9 silicone heat sink corr-
PseudoCorp has been providing quality solutions for X 7/8" CATI4PRLY-24N $4.00 each pound. CAT* HSC-1 $2.00 per 1oz tube
microprocessor problems since 1985.
TOLL FREE ORDER LINES
Intel 8048
Motorola 6800
Processors
RCA 1802,05
Motorola 6801
Intel 8051
Motorola 68HC11
Intel 8096,196kc
Motorola 6805
1-800-826.5432
Hitachi 6301 Motorola 6809 MOS Tech 6502 WDC 65CO2 CHARGE ORDERS to Visa, MasterCard or Discover
Rockwell 65CO2 Intel 8080,85 Zlog Z80 NSC 800
Hitachi HD64180 Mot. 68k,8,10 Zlog Z8 Zilog Super 8
• JI products require an IBM PC or compatible. TERMS •Minimum order $10.00.ShMping and handling for the 48 continental U.S.A. $3.50
per order All others including AK, HI, PR or Canada must pay full shipping. All orders
For Information Or To Order Call:
delivered in CALIFORNIA must include state sakes tax (7 1/4 ,7 1/2, 7 3/4 or 8 1/4%).
PseudoCorp
Quantities Limited. NO C.00. Prices subject to change without notice.
CALL OR WRITE FOR OUR FREE 64 PAGE CATALOG
716 Thimble Shoals Blvd, Suite E ALL ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Newport News, VA 23606 P.O. Box 567 •Van Nuys, CA •91408
(804) 873-1947 FAX:(804)873-2154
WorldRadioHistory
EASY ORDER EASY FAX
1-800-582-4044 1-800-582-1255
LgarLcmilmme
TRIPP LITE - PRECISION REGULATED DC POWER SUPPLIES.' ACTIVE COMPONENIS

Complete Line of DC Power Supplies to Convert 120VAc to 13.8Vcc ±0.5Vcc. MICROS
Order 4 Price Order #
DRAMS
Price Desc.
PRa.5 6242 8.95 MK4027N2 .75 4x1
Standard Features Include: 6502 2.95 4116-20 .85 16x1
•Solid state integrated circuit provides excellent regulation 6522A 3.75 4416-12 2.95 16x4
•Output voltage maintained up to 95% of no load value 6821 1.75 4164-10 1.95 64x1
.High quality filtering for low noise operation 6845 2.45 4164-15 1.55 64x1
*Heavy duty power transformer for complete line isolation 8080A 2.75 4164-20 1.25 64x1
.0n/Off indicator light and rugged on/off switch on faceplate 8085A 2.95 41464-12 2.75 64x4
8086 4.45 41256-80 2.75 256x1
.3 conductor grounded cord on 10 Amp and larger models
8088 4.25 41256-12 2.15 256x1
•Current limiting electronic foldback for auto overcurrent protection
8237A5 4.15 51258-80 4.95 256x1
8250 5.75 514256-10 6.95 256x4
PR25 8251A 2.25 514258-80 9.95 256x4
Tripp Lite DC Power Supplies Are Designed For Reliability and Superior Performance.
8253-5 2.25 511000-80 7.25 1Mx1
ICS* Continuous Ripple 8255A5 2.75 511000-10 6.95 1Mx1
Order # Price (amps) Duty (amps) Fusina Voltaue HxWxD (Inches) Weight 8275 18.95 511001-80 8.25 1Mx1
PR4.5 32.95 4.5 3 Internal 0.1 Volt Max 3.125 x4.75 x8.25 5 lbs.
STATIC RAMS EPROMS
PR7 44.95 7 5 Chassis Mount 0.15 Volt Max. 3.75 x6.5 x7.5 7 lbs.
Order # Price Order # Price Proe
PR10 64.95 10 7.5 Chassis Mount 0.15 Volt Max. 4.5 x6.625 x7.625 10 lbs.
2101 1.65 2708 4.75 25V
PR15 89.95 15 12 Chassis Mount 0.15 Volt Max. 4.75 x7.5 x8.25 13 lbs.
2114L25 1.39 2716 3.45 25V
PR25 126.95 25 20 Chassis Mount 0.15 Volt Max. 5.125 x 12.5 x 10.5 20 lbs.
2147-3 3.75 2732 3.95 25V
PR40 179.95 40 32 Chassis Mount 0.15 Volt Max 7.25 x 12.5 x10 26 lbs.
6116LP3 2.75 2732A25 3.45 21V
PR60 249.95 60 48 Chassis Mount 0.15 Volt Max 8.5 x12.5 x10 29 lbs.
6116-3 2.25 2732E145 4.25 12.5V
*Intermittant Communications Duty (50% Duty Cycle) 6264LP10 4.95 2764-25 3.75 21V
6264LP15 3.95 2764A25 3.25 12.5V
SOLDERLESS PROter7M 6264-10
6264-15
4.75
3.75
27C64A15
27128A25
3.95
3.95
12.5V
12.5V
62256LP10 6.75 27256-25 4.75 12.5V
62256LP15 6.25 27C512-15 6.95 12.5V
SB830 628128LP8 34.95 27C010-15 9.95 12.5V
628128LP10 32.95 27CO20-15 24.95 12.5V
LINEAR LINEAR
Features
Order # Price Order # Price Description
.Color coordinates for easy recognition
MAX232CPE 4.55 CA3161E 1.95 Decoder Driver
•Insertion wire: 20-29 AWG (0.3 - 0.8 mm)
LM311N .49 CA3162E 6.25 Converter
*Over 10,000 insertion cycles SB1660 SB2390 SB3220 LM324N .35 78L05 .35...5V Pos Reg. TO-92
*Accepts all standard components
LM339N .39 7805K 1.25 5V Pos. Reg. TO-3
Price Price Dimensions (in.) Dist. Dist. Terminal Terminal Binding LM555CN .29 7805T .45 5V Pos. Reg. TO-220
Order # 1-9 10+ LxWxH Strips Points Strips Points Posts LM741CN .29 7812T .45 5V Pos. Reg. TO-220
SB200 2.99 2.49 6.5 x0.37 x0.4 2 100 x2 0 0 0 LM1488N .45 79L05 .29 ..5V Neg. Reg. TO-92
I
MEMORTFMIDULES-SIMMS
SB400 4.89 4.39 3.3 x2.2 x0.4 2 100 1 300 0 LM1489N .45 7905T .49 5V Neg. Reg. TO-220
SB630 5.45 4.95 6.5 x 1.4 x0.4 0 0 1 630 0
SB830 6.49 5.99 6.5 x2.2 x0.4 2 200 1 630 0
SB1360 12.49 11.99 8.5 x3.9 x 1.2 1 100 2 1,260 2
Order li Price Organization Speed
SB1660 17.45 16.95 8.5 x5.1 x 1.2 4 400 2 1,260 3
256x9-80 19.95 262,144x9 8Ons
SB2390 22.49 21.49 9.1 x6.9 x 1.2 5 500 3 1,890 4
1x9-80 57.00 1,048,576x9 8Ons
SB3220 31.49 30.49 9.5 x8.3 x1.2 7 700 4 2,520 4 4x9-80 210.00 4.194 ,304 x9 8Ons
Z80 CPU Technical Manual

This 338 page manual contains the architecture, pin description, timing, instruction set, instruction
description, interrupt response and hardware/software implementation examples of the Z80 CPU.
Order 4 Z29 9.95 Z80 CPU Technical Manual Weight: 1lb.
Zli
Intelligent Peripheral Controllers 2917 Bayview Drive
Over 700 pages of data sheets, application notes and technical information on Zilog's intelligent
VISA [MasterCard
peripheral controllers. The part numbers contained in this book are Z8400, Z84C00, Z84C01,
Fremont, CA 94538
Z8410/C10, Z8420/C20, Z8430/C30, Z8440/1/2/4, Z84C40/1/2/3/4, Z84C50, Z8470, Z84C90,
Z84011/C11, Z84013/15, Z84C13/C15, Z80180, Z80181 and Z280. E
asy Order: 1-800-582-4044
Order #Z2480 13.95 Intelligent Peripheral Controllers Weight: 2 lbs. Easy Fax: 1-800-582-1255
Datacom ICs International Fax: 1-510-770-2346
Over 700 pages of data sheets and other technical information on Zilog's Data Communications ICs.
Part numbers contained in this book are the Z16C30/31/33/35/50, Z5380, Z85230, Z80C30, Z85C30, Customer Service: 1-510-770-2345
Z8030, Z8530, Z80181, Z84013, Z84015, Z84C13, Z84C15, Z8440, Z84C40 and Z85C80. Also Monday-Friday, lam -5pm (PST)/10am-8pm (EST)
included are application notes.
Order # Z2503 13.95 Datacom ICs Weight: 2 lbs.
COD-No personal checks, US funds ($5.00 Surcharge)
Microcontrollers USPS UPS E Federal Express Airborne

Over 1300 pages of data sheets, application notes and technical information on Zilog's microcontrollers. Add 5% of total for shipping UPS Ground ($3.00 min.).
The part numbers contained in this book are Z8600/01/02/03/04/11/12/13/71/81/82/91,
Z8800/01/20/22, Z86C00/C06/C08/C09/C10/C12/C19/C20/C21/C27/C30/C40/C50/C61/C62/C89/C90/ Actual shipping charges based on weight.
C91/C93/C94/C96/C97, Z86E08/E19/E21/E30/E40, Z88C00, Z86127, Z86128, Z765A, Z5380 and Coll or write today for your free copy of our catalog.
Z53C80.
CI:Mania resident, odd appropriate soles or
Order # Z8275 16.95 Microcontrollers Weight: 3 lbs. 12 month «runty on oil Easy Tech products.
30 day money bock guarantee.
*Books are not returnable. We carry the newest versions available. We reserve the right to substitute manulodurers.
Pokes subject to change without notice.
WorldRadioHistory

Elektor Electronics USA 1991 12

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Elektor Electronics USA 1991 12

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Elektor Electronics USA 1991 12

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What types of electronic components are listed for sale?

What types of electronic components are listed for sale?

What tools and equipment are mentioned as being available?

What tools and equipment are mentioned as being available?

E

Cumulative 1991 index

Class A Power Amplifier

Economy Power Supply

FSK/RTTY Decoder for PCs

THE PARTS PLACE

LED a lap« mages

Cumulative 1991 Index pages 98-99

EDITORIAL GENERAL INTEREST -continued

11 Join Our Triangle 45 Variable Time Switch

DESIGN IDEAS RADIO, TELEVISION, & COMMUNICATIONS

78 6-digit Coded AC Power Switch 18 FSK/RTTY Decoder for PCs

14 Musical Christmas Present SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

Electronics Scene 12-13; New Books 92;

ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA (US ISSN

POSTMASTER: Send address changes to

WorldRadioHistory ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991

From Denmark, this program computes component values for the Q

SOF-AFS1B5 Q COMPENSATION NETWORK The Difference Between

ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991 WorldRadioHistory

WorldRadioHistory ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991

OLD COLONY SOFTWARE

SOF-LMP3B5G "SOUPED UP" SD-LMP LOUDSPEAKER

SOF-LMP3M3G "SOUPED UP" SD-LMP LOUDSPEAKER

MACSPEAKERBOX is amust for those who would rather be building and

SOF-MSB1M3GD MACSPEAKERBOX WITH GRAPHICS GRAPHICS for IBM $50.00

Hercules; coprocessor; LaserJet or dot matrix.

ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991 WorldRadioHistory

#6 QKLOOK.EXE: This allows you to enter the Thiele/Small (T/S)

DOS 2.0 or higher, 256K of RAM required. Coprocessor optional. 1x

Demo for IBM PC $12.95

PC/XT/AT version: 1x51/

WorldRadioHistory ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991

OLD COLONY SOFTWARE

SOF-VNT1A5 VENTWRK VENTED BOX CONSTRUCTION

USE OUR EASY ORDER FORM BELOW!

AMATEUR INDEXES, 1980-1990 Purchasing options available:

Russell Schoof SOF-SBX2B5 SPEAKER BUILDER INDEX, 1980-1990,

DEALER DISCOUNTS AVAILABLE

OLD COLONY SOFTWARE

al-Y. ITEM NO. PRICE EACH TOTAL

Overseas Surface: $6 first item, $.75 each additional 24-Hour Lines

WorldRadioHistory ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991

NOW THAT YOU'VE SEEN OUR

That's why tubes are having such arenaissance

CLASS AUDIO AUDIO AMATEUR SPEAKER BUILDER

CITY STATE ZIP

MC OR VISA NUMBER EXPIRE

AUDIO AMATEUR PUBLICATIONS

Published by Audio Amateur Publications, Inc. European Offices HUNGARY SPAIN

I PANEL CONNECTORS Lohkemper, Caig Laboratories, Inc., 16744

WorldRadioHistory ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA DECEMBER 1991

A MUSICAL CHRISTMAS PRESENT

M ELODY ICs are now available in such

Bett2 IC1 = 74HC132 LP